Fiat 500X 2018 Car User Manual

The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FCA Italy S.p.A. reserves the right to modify

the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.

If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer.

Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.

OWNER HANDBOOK

FIAT500X

ENGLISH

Cop 500X LUM GB.qxp_500 UM ITA 02/08/16 12:16 Pagina 1

We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail.

At Fiat Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us,

offering quality and professionalism for all service operations.

Fiat workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks

and practical recommendations by our experts.

With Original Parts distributed by MOPAR

, you maintain the reliability, comfort

and performance features that you bought your new car for over time.

Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our cars; we recommend them because

they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies.

For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones designed

by FCA for your car.

SAFETY:

BRAKING SYSTEM

ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS,

CLIMATE CONTROL MAINTENANCE

COMFORT: SUSPENSION

AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS

PERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS,

INJECTORS AND BATTERIES

LINEACCESSORI

ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS

WHY CHOOSING

GENUINE PARTS

This Owner Handbook is intended to show the vehicle's operating conditions.

For the enthusiast user who wants to have insights, curiosities and detailed information about the characteristics and functions

of the vehicle, Fiat gives the opportunity to consult a dedicated section which is available in electronic format.

ONLINE VEHICLE OWNER HANDBOOK

The following symbol is reported within the text of the Owner Handbook, next to the subjects for which details are provided.

Go to the www.mopar.eu/owner

website and access your personal area.

The “Maintenance and care” page includes all the information about your vehicle and the link to access eLUM, where you will find

all the details of the Owner Handbook.

Alternatively, to access this information, go to the Internet website at http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum/

The eLUM website is free and will allow you, among many other things, to easily consult the on-board documents

of all the other vehicles of the Group.

Have a nice reading and happy motoring!

Cop 500X LUM GB.qxp_500 UM ITA 02/08/16 12:16 Pagina 2

Dear Customer,

We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing a Fiat.

We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way.

Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your vehicle and how to achieve the best

performance from the technical features of your Fiat 500X.

You are advised to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls and

above all with those concerning brakes, steering and gearbox; at the same time, you can understand the vehicle behaviour on

different road surfaces.

This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care

and maintenance of your Fiat 500X over time.

After reading it, you are advised to keep the handbook inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains

on board the vehicle should it be sold.

In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that Fiat offers to its customers, the Warranty

Certificate and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.

We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new vehicle and the service provided by the

people at Fiat.

Enjoy reading. Happy motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat 500X versions. Options, equipment dedicated to specific markets or

versions are not explicitly indicated in the text: as a consequence, you should only consider the information which

is related to the trim level, engine and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the

production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified with the

wording (where provided).

All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA Italy

S.p.A. aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason it reserves the right to make

changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.

For further information, contact a Fiat Dealership.

READ THIS CAREFULLY

REFUELLING

Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95 in compliance with the European specification

EN228. Do not use petrol containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage

fundamental components of the supply system.

For further details on the use of the correct fuel see the "Refuelling the car" paragraph in the "Starting and driving" chapter.

Diesel engines: refuel only with Diesel fuel motor vehicles conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of other products or

mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused.

For further details on the use of the correct fuel see the "Refuelling the car" paragraph in the "Starting and driving" chapter.

LPG engines: refuel only with LPG for motor vehicles conforming to the European specification EN589. The use of other products or mixtures

may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused. For further details on the use of

the correct fuel see the "Refuelling the car" paragraph in the "Starting and driving" chapter.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Versions with manual gearbox (petrol engines): make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gear lever to neutral, fully depress the

clutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV or press the ignition device button; release the key or the button

as soon as the engine has started.

Versions with manual gearbox (diesel engines): make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gear lever to neutral, fully depress the

clutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the

warning light to switch off. Bring the ignition

key to AVV or press the ignition device button; release the key or the button as soon as the engine has started.

Versions with automatic transmission: make sure that the handbrake is engaged and that the gear lever is in P (Parking) or N (Neutral),

depress the brake pedal, without pressing the accelerator pedal, then turn the ignition key to AVV or press the ignition device button; release

the key or the button as soon as the engine has started.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other

flammable material: fire hazard.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the

environment.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

If, after buying the vehicle, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact a Fiat Dealership.

They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the vehicle is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmental

friendliness and low running costs unchanged in time.

“CYBERSECURITY” DEVICES

The car is equipped with security devices developed according to the technological standards currently applied in the

automotive industry to protect the onboard electronic systems from hacking attempts. The purpose of these security devices is

to minimise the risk of cyber-attacks or the installation of viruses or malware which could compromise the performance of the

car and/or allow stealing of personal data of the buyers and/or users and/or unauthorised dissemination of said information.

The car's purchaser must not remove, modify or tamper with these anti-hacking security devices. The Manufacturer will

therefore not be liable for negative consequences and/or damage to the vehicle and/or to the buyer and/or to third parties

deriving from the removal, modification or alteration of the security devices performed by the car's purchaser and/or user.

SYMBOLS

Some car components have coloured labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component.

A plate summarising these symbols can also be found under the bonnet.

J0A2300C

CHANGES/ALTERATIONS TO THE CAR

IMPORTANT Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents,

in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.

IMPORTANT The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical

systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the car in addition to constituting a potential hazard for

passengers' health.

IMPORTANT If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the car and/or close to the electronic key, reduced

performance of the Keyless Entry/Keyless Go system may occur.

USE OF THE OWNER HANDBOOK

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Each time direction instructions (left/right or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are given, these must be understood as

regarding an occupant in the driver's seat.

Special cases not complying with this rule will be specified as appropriate in the text.

The figures in the Owner Handbook are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do

not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.

In addition, the Handbook has been conceived considering vehicles with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible

that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position or construction of some controls is not exactly mirror-like with

respect to the figure.

To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner Handbook.

Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few pages further there is a key

for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. There is in any case a textual indication of the

current chapter at the side of each even page.

WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS

While reading this Owner Handbook you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your

vehicle.

There are also PRECAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle,

which could cause accidents or injuries.

Therefore all WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.

WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:

personal safety;

vehicle safety;

environmental protection.

NOTE These symbols, when necessary, are indicated besides the title or at the end of the line and are followed by a number.

That number recalls the corresponding warning at the end of the relevant section.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND DRIVING

IN AN EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MULTIMEDIA

INDEX

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

In-depth knowledge of your new vehicle

starts here.

The booklet that you are reading simply

and directly explains how it is made and

how it works.

That’s why we advise you to read it

seated comfortably on board, so that

you can see immediately what is

described here for yourself.

DASHBOARD ...............10

THE KEYS .................11

IGNITION DEVICE ............12

FIAT CODE .................14

ALARM ...................14

DOORS ...................15

SEATS....................19

HEAD RESTRAINTS ...........21

STEERING WHEEL ............23

REAR VIEW MIRRORS .........23

EXTERIOR LIGHTS ............25

INTERIOR LIGHTS ............29

WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW

WIPER ...................29

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM.....33

ELECTRIC WINDOWS ..........37

ELECTRIC SUN ROOF .........38

BONNET ..................40

BOOT ....................41

VERSION WITH LPG SYSTEM ....43

DASHBOARD

1. Adjustable side air diffusers 2. Left stalk: direction indicators, main beam headlights, flashing, Lane change

function 3. Instrument panel 4. Controls on the steering wheel: Cruise Control, Speed Limiter 5. Right stalk: windscreen

wiper/washer, rear window wiper/washer, rain sensor sensitivity level setting 6. Uconnect™ 7. Start&Stop, hazard lights,

passenger airbag LED status 8. Refrigerated upper storage compartment (for versions/markets, where

provided) 9. Passenger front airbag 10. Adjustable central air diffusers 11. Lower compartment box 12. Climate

controls 13. Buttons on central console: seat heater, steering wheel heater, USB port + AUX port (where provided) 14. Knee

bag 15. Ignition device (key or button) 16. Driver's front airbag 17. Steering wheel controls: display menu, trip computer,

multimedia, telephone, voice recognition 18. Control panel: light switch, headlight adjuster.

F1B0626C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

THE KEYS

KEY WITH REMOTE

CONTROL

Metal insert A fig. 3 of the key operates:

the ignition device;

the driver's door lock.

Press button B to open/close the metal

insert.

ELECTRONIC KEY

(versions with "Keyless Go" system)

On versions equipped with "Keyless

Go" system, the vehicle features an

electronic key A fig. 4, of which two

copies are provided.

Locking door and boot

Briefly press the

or " FIAT" button:

locking of doors and boot with roof light

off and single flash of direction

indicators (where provided).

Rapidly press the

button twice to

open the luggage compartment

remotely (where provided).

The direction indicators will flash twice

to indicate that the boot has been

opened.

Lights switching on (key with

remote control only)

Pressing button

you can remotely

control the switching on of the side and

main beam headlights, for a maximum

of 90 seconds.

Pressing the

button again the

lights switched on previously switch off

(if the parking light function was already

active it will remain so). If, when

90 seconds have passed, button

pressed, the main beam headlights and

the side lights will stay on for a further

30 seconds.

REQUEST FOR

ADDITIONAL KEYS

Should a new key with remote control

or a new electronic key be necessary,

go to a Fiat Dealership, taking an ID

document and the vehicle ownership

documents.

WARNING

1) Press button B only with the key away

from your body, especially your eyes and

from objects which could get damaged

(e.g. your clothes). Do not leave the key

unattended to avoid the button being

accidentally pressed while it is being

handled, e.g. by a child.

F1B0007C

F1B0008C

IMPORTANT

1) The electronic components inside the

key may be damaged if the key is subjected

to strong shocks. In order to ensure

complete efficiency of the electronic

devices inside the key, it should never be

exposed to direct sunlight.

IMPORTANT

1) Used batteries may be harmful to the

environment if not disposed of correctly.

They must be disposed of as specified by

law in the special containers or taken to a

Fiat Dealership, which will take care of their

disposal.

IGNITION DEVICE

Versions with key without remote

control

The key can be turned to three different

positions fig. 5:

STOP: engine off, key can be

removed, steering column locked (with

key removed). Some electrical devices

(e.g. central door locking system, alarm,

etc.) are still available;

MAR: driving position. All electrical

devices are available;

AVV: engine starting.

2) 3)

Versions with electronic key

("Keyless Go" system)

To activate the ignition device fig. 6 the

electronic key must be inside the

passenger compartment.

The ignition device activates also if the

electronic key is inside the boot or on

the rear shelf.

The ignition device has the following

possible states:

STOP: engine off, steering locked.

Some electrical devices (e.g. central

door locking system, alarm, etc.) are

still available;

MAR: driving position. All electrical

devices are available. This state can be

entered by pressing the ignition device

button once, without pressing the brake

pedal (versions with automatic

transmission) or the clutch pedal

(versions with manual gearbox);

AVV: engine starting.

NOTE The ignition device does NOT

activate if the electronic key is inside the

boot and this is open.

F1B0627C

F1B0014C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

NOTE With the ignition device at MAR,

if 30 minutes pass with the vehicle

stationary (versions with manual

gearbox) or with the gear lever at P

(Park) (versions with automatic

transmission) and the engine stopped,

the ignition device will automatically

move to the STOP position.

NOTE With the engine running, it is

possible to go away from the car taking

the electronic key with you. The engine

will still be running. The vehicle will

indicate the absence of the key on

board when the door is closed.

NOTE If the device does switch off the

engine, refer to the “Display” paragraph

in the “Knowing the instrument panel”

chapter, where available, and contact

the Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

For more information on the engine

start-up, see the description in the

"Starting the engine" paragraph, in the

"Starting and driving" chapter.

4) 5)

STEERING LOCK

Activation

Versions with key without remote

control: with the device at STOP,

remove the key and turn the steering

wheel until it locks.

IMPORTANT If the ignition key has been

moved from the MAR to the STOP

position, the steering lock cannot

engage until the key is removed from

the ignition device.

Versions with electronic key: the

steering lock engages when the driver

door is opened, with the ignition device

button at STOP and speed below

3 km/h.

Deactivation

Versions with key without remote

control: slightly moving the steering

wheel, turn the key to the MAR

position.

Versions with electronic key: the

steering lock disengages when the

ignition device is pressed and the

electronic key is recognised.

6) 7)

WARNING

2) If the ignition device has been tampered

with (e.g. an attempted theft), have it

checked by a Fiat Dealership before driving

again.

3) Always take the key with you when you

leave your vehicle to prevent someone

from accidentally operating the controls.

Remember to engage the electric parking

brake. Never leave children unattended in

the vehicle.

4) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any

after-market operation involving steering

system or steering column modifications

(e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that

could adversely affect performance,

invalidate the warranty, cause serious

safety problems and also result in the car

not meeting type-approval requirements.

5) Never extract the mechanical key while

the vehicle is moving. The steering wheel

will automatically lock as soon as it is

turned. This holds true for cars being

towed as well.

6) Before exiting the vehicle, ALWAYS

engage the parking brake, steer the

wheels, engage the first gear if uphill and

the reverse if downhill. On versions with

automatic transmission, bring the gear

lever to P (Park) and press the ignition

device to bring it to STOP. If the vehicle is

parked on a steep slope, chock the wheels

with wedges or stones. When leaving the

car, always lock all the doors by pressing

the dedicated button on the handle (see

"Keyless Entry" in the paragraph "Doors").

7) For versions equipped with the Full

Keyless System, do not leave the

electronic key inside or near the car or in a

place accessible to children. Do not leave

the vehicle with the ignition device in MAR

position. A child could activate the electric

window winders, other controls or even

start the vehicle.

FIAT CODE

The Fiat Code system prevents

unauthorised use of the vehicle,

disabling engine starting.

The system does not need to be

enabled/activated: operation is

automatic, regardless of the fact that

the vehicle's doors are locked or

unlocked.

When the ignition device is set to MAR,

the Fiat Code system identifies the

code transmitted by the key. If the code

is recognised as valid, the Fiat Code

system enables engine starting.

When the ignition device is brought

back to STOP, the Fiat Code system

deactivates the control unit controlling

the engine, thus preventing its starting.

For the correct engine starting

procedures, see the instructions in the

"Starting the engine" paragraph,

"Starting and driving" chapter.

IRREGULAR OPERATION

If, during starting, the key code is not

correctly recognised, the

icon is

displayed on the instrument panel (see

the instructions in the "Warning lights

and messages" paragraph, "Knowing

the instrument panel" chapter). This

condition leads to the engine switching

off after 2 seconds. In this case, bring

the ignition device to STOP and then to

MAR; if it is still blocked, try with the

other keys provided. If it is still not

possible to start the engine, contact a

Fiat Dealership.

If the

icon is displayed while

driving, this means that the system is

running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a

voltage drop). If the display persists,

contact a Fiat Dealership.

ALARM

Activation of the alarm triggers the

acoustic warning and the direction

indicators.

IMPORTANT The alarm is adapted by

the Manufacturer to meet the

requirements of the various countries

where the vehicle is marketed.

TURNING THE ALARM ON

(where provided)

With the doors, bonnet and tailgate

closed and the ignition device on to

STOP, point the key with remote control

or electronic key towards the vehicle

and press and release the

" FIAT"

button.

For versions with electronic key, the

alarm can also be armed by pressing

the "door lock" button, located on the

door external handle. For more

information, refer to the Keyless Entry

paragraph a few pages further on.

The system emits a visual and acoustic

warning (where provided) and enables

door locking.

With the alarm on, warning light A

fig. 7 flashes on the instrument panel.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The activation of the alarm is preceded

by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is

detected, the system emits a further

acoustic warning.

Locking the doors without engaging the

alarm is also always possible by locking

the doors by putting the metal insert of

the key inside the driver side door lock.

IMPORTANT If the doors are unlocked

by putting the metal insert into the

driver side door lock, the alarm, if

previously enabled, is not disabled. It

will be possible to disable the alarm by

turning the ignition device to MAR, or

by pressing button

on the remote

control.

TURNING THE ALARM

OFF

IMPORTANT The alarm does not switch

off when the central opening is

activated using the metal insert in the

key.

DISABLING THE ALARM

To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g.

during a long period of vehicle

inactivity), close the doors by turning

the metal insert of the key with remote

control in the door lock.

IMPORTANT If the batteries of the key

with the remote control run out or there

is a fault with the system, the alarm can

be switched off by setting the ignition

device to MAR.

DOORS

LOCKING/UNLOCKING

DOORS FROM THE

INSIDE

Central locking/unlocking

If all doors are closed properly, they will

automatically be locked once the

vehicle has exceeded 20 km/h

("Autoclose" function). This function can

also be disabled using the menu on the

instrument panel.

To lock the doors, press the

button

located on the front door trim fig. 8.

To unlock the doors, press the

button.

Manual locking/unlocking

Doors can also be locked/unlocked by

rotating the device A fig. 9, integrated

into the front door inner handles.

F1B0015C

F1B0024C

Operating the rear door device locks

only the door concerned.

Position 1: door unlocked

Position 2

: door locked

Operating the handle of the front doors

unlocks all doors and the tailgate.

LOCKING/UNLOCKING

DOORS FROM THE

OUTSIDE

Locking doors from the outside

With the doors closed, press the

FIAT" button on the key or fit and then

turn its metal insert in the driver's door

lock.

Door unlocking from the outside

Press the

button on the key or turn

its metal insert in the driver's door lock.

PASSIVE ENTRY

(where provided)

The Keyless Entry system can identify

the electronic key near the doors and

tailgate.

The system enables the doors (or the

tailgate) to be locked/released without

pressing any button on the electronic

key.

If the system recognises that the

electronic key detected outside the

vehicle is valid, the owner of the key

can simply grasp one of the front

handles to deactivate the alarm and

unlock the door and tailgate opening

mechanism.

Where the function is provided,

grasping the handle of the driver's door

unlocks the driver's side door or all

doors depending on the mode set

using the display menu or the

Uconnect™ system.

Door locking

To lock the doors, proceed as follows:

make sure that you have the

electronic key with you and are near the

driver or passenger door handle;

press the "door locking" button A

fig. 10 on the handle: this will lock all

doors and the tailgate. Locking the

doors will also activate the alarm (where

provided).

IMPORTANT After pressing the "door

locking" button, you need to wait two

seconds before the doors can be

unlocked again using the door handle.

It is therefore possible to check whether

the vehicle is locked correctly by pulling

the door handle within 2 seconds. The

doors will not be unlocked again.

IMPORTANT Do not simultaneously

lock and unlock by pulling the handle

(see fig. 11 ).

F1B0017C

F1B0063C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Driver side door emergency

opening

If the electronic key does not work (e.g.

because its battery is flat), the

emergency metal insert inside the key

can anyway be used to operate the

lock, unlocking the driver side door.

To extract the metal insert, proceed as

follows:

press point A fig. 12 and pull out the

metal insert B;

insert the metal insert in the driver

side door lock and turn it to unlock the

door.

Tailgate locking

Approaching the tailgate with a valid

electronic key, press the opening button

fig. 13 underneath the tailgate handle to

lock/unlock the luggage compartment.

NOTE If there is an alarm system, the

latter will be temporarily disabled only

for the boot area. After closing the boot,

the alarm system will be reactivated

again.

The tailgate can however be locked by

pressing the

button on the electronic

key or on the inside door panel.

NOTE The tailgate door lock also

performs a central locking of the doors.

Boot opening is disabled while the car

is moving.

DEAD LOCK

(where provided)

This safety device inhibits the operation

of the interior door handles and the

door locking/unlocking button.

Activating the device

The device is enabled on all the doors

by pressing the

" FIAT" button on

the key with remote control twice

quickly.

Deactivating the device

The device disengages automatically:

when the doors are unlocked

(pressing button

on the key with

remote control);

when the ignition device is set to

MAR.

F1B0251C

F1B0020C

F1B0166C

CHILD SAFETY DEVICE

9) 10)

This system prevents the rear doors

from being opened from the inside.

The fig. 14 device can only be engaged

with the doors open:

position : device engaged (door

locked);

position : device not engaged

(door may be opened from the inside).

The device remains engaged even if the

doors are electrically unlocked.

IMPORTANT The rear doors cannot be

opened from the inside when the child

safety device is engaged.

WARNING

8) Once the Dead Lock system is engaged,

it is impossible to open the doors from

inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the

car, please therefore check that there is

no-one left inside.

9) NEVER leave children unattended inside

the car, let alone leave the car with the

doors unlocked in a place that children can

access easily. Children may seriously, or

even fatally, injure themselves. Also ensure

that children do not inadvertently operate

the electric parking brake, the brake pedal

or the automatic transmission lever.

10) Always use this device when carrying

children. After engaging the child lock on

both rear doors, check for effective

engagement by trying to open a door with

the internal handle.

IMPORTANT

2) Make sure to take the key with you once

a door or the tailgate is locked, to prevent

locking the same key inside the vehicle. If

the key has been locked in, it can only be

recovered using the second provided key.

3) The operation of the recognition system

depends on various factors, such as, for

example, any electromagnetic wave

interference from external sources (e.g.

mobile phones), the charge of the battery in

the electronic key and the presence of

metal objects near the key or the car. In

these cases it is still possible to unlock the

doors by using the metal insert in the

electronic key (see description on the

following pages).

F1B0023C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SEATS

FRONT SEATS WITH

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT

11)

Longitudinal adjustment

Lift lever A fig. 15 and push the seat

forwards or backwards.

12)

IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustment

while sitting on the seat involved (driver

side or passenger side).

Height adjustment

Move lever B upwards or downwards to

achieve the required height.

IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustment

while sitting on the seat involved (driver

side or passenger side).

Backrest angle adjustment

Move lever C to adjust the backrest

angle, accompanying it with the

movement of the torso (operate the

lever until the desired position is

reached, then release it).

Electric lumbar adjustment

When the ignition device is at MAR,

press button A fig. 16 to adjust the

lumbar area support, until the maximum

driving comfort is achieved.

ELECTRICALLY

ADJUSTABLE FRONT

SEATS

(where provided)

The buttons for electrical seat

adjustment are on the outer side of the

seat, near the floor.

These buttons can be used to adjust

the height, the lengthwise position in

relation to the vehicle and the angle of

the backrest.

Height adjustment

Use the front or rear part of the switch

A fig. 17 to modify the height and/or the

angle of the seat cushion.

Longitudinal adjustment

Push switch A forwards or backwards

to move the seat in the corresponding

direction.

F1B0019C

F1B0016C

F1B0018C

Backrest angle adjustment

Push switch B forwards or backwards

to adjust the backrest in the

corresponding direction.

Electric lumbar adjustment

Use the joystick C to actuate the

lumbar area device until the maximum

driving comfort is achieved.

IMPORTANT The electrical adjustment

is only allowed when the ignition device

is turned to MAR and for about

3 minutes after it is turned to STOP.

With the car STOPPED, after the door

has been opened, the system will allow

an additional 3-minute adjustment

period.

FRONT SEAT ELECTRIC

HEATING

(where provided)

With ignition device in the MAR

position, press buttons

fig. 18 on the

dashboard.

You can select two heating levels:

“minimum heating”: one orange LED

lit on the buttons;

"maximum heating": two orange

LEDs lit on the buttons.

After selecting one heating level, you

need to wait for a few minutes until

warm air flows into the compartment.

When the "maximum heating" setting is

selected, the heater produces a

boosted heat level for the first minutes

of operation.

IMPORTANT To preserve the battery

charge, this function cannot be

activated when the engine is off.

REAR SEATS

Partial extension of the boot (1/3 or

2/3)

13)

remove the rear shelf;

completely lower the rear seat head

restraints;

move the seat belt to the side,

making sure that it is fully extended and

not twisted;

operate release device A fig. 19 to

fold the required backrest section. After

release a red mark is visible.

Accompany the backrest during folding.

F1B0624C

F1B0027C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Repositioning the backrests

Move the seat belts to the side, making

sure that they are correctly extended

and not twisted.

Raise the backrests and push them

back until the locking click of both

retainers is heard. Visually check that

the red marks have disappeared from

the release devices A fig. 19. The red

marks indicate that the backrest is not

secured.

WARNING

11) All adjustments must be made with the

car stationary.

12) Once you have released the

adjustment lever, always check that the

seat is locked on the guides by trying to

move it back and forth. If the seat is not

locked into place, it may unexpectedly slide

and cause the driver to lose control of the

car.

13) Make sure the backrests are properly

secured at both sides (not visible "red

notches) to prevent them from moving

forward, in the event of sharp braking, with

possible impact with of the passengers.

IMPORTANT

4) The fabric upholstery of the seats has

been designed to withstand long-term wear

deriving from normal use of the car. Some

precautions are however required. Avoid

prolonged and/or excessive rubbing

against clothing accessories such as metal

buckles and Velcro strips which, by

applying a high pressure on the fabric in a

small area, could cause it to break, thereby

damaging the upholstery.

5) Do not arrange objects beneath the

electrically adjustable seat and do not

impede its movement, since the controls

may be damaged. The fabric upholstery of

the seats has been designed to withstand

long-term wear deriving from normal use of

the car. Some precautions are however

required. Avoid prolonged and/or excessive

rubbing against clothing accessories such

as metal buckles and Velcro strips which,

by applying a high pressure on the fabric in

a small area, could cause it to break,

thereby damaging the upholstery. They

may also restrict the seat travel.

6) Before tilting the backrest, remove any

objects on the seat cushion.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

FRONT

14)

Adjustment

They can be adjusted to 4 height

positions (completely raised /

2 intermediate positions / completely

lowered).

Upward adjustment: raise the head

restraint until it clicks into place.

Downward adjustment: press button A

fig. 20 and lower the head restraint.

F1B0029C

Removal

Proceed as follows to remove the head

restraint:

tilt the backrest (to prevent it from

coming into contact with the roof);

press both buttons A and B fig. 20 at

the side of the two supports, then

remove the head restraint.

IMPORTANT Always reposition the

head restraints if they have been

removed before starting to drive

normally.

REAR

14)

Adjustment

Three head restraints that can be

height-adjusted to 3 positions

(completely raised / intermediate /

completely lowered) are provided for

the rear seats

Upward adjustment: raise the head

restraint until it clicks into place.

On some versions, the label

fig. 21 reminds the user of the centre

rear seat to adjust the headrest in a

correct position, pulling it upward in

both preset positions.

IMPORTANT The headrests must be

placed in rest position (fully lowered) to

guarantee visibility to the driver.

Downward adjustment: press button A

fig. 22 and lower the head restraint.

Removal

Proceed as follows to remove the head

restraint:

raise the head restraint to its

maximum height;

press buttons A and B fig. 22 at the

side of the two supports, then remove

the head restraint.

IMPORTANT Always reposition the

head restraints if they have been

removed before starting to drive

normally.

WARNING

14) Head restraints must be adjusted so

that the head, rather than the neck, rests

on them. Only in this case they can protect

your head correctly. Any removed head

restraints must be repositioned correctly, in

order to protect the occupants in the event

of impact: follow the instructions above.

F1B0236C

F1B0030C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

STEERING WHEEL

15) 16)

ADJUSTMENTS

The steering wheel can be adjusted

both in height and axially.

To adjust, move lever A

fig. 23 downwards to position 1, then

adjust the steering wheel to the most

suitable position and lock it in position

by moving lever A to position 2.

ELECTRIC STEERING

WHEEL HEATING

(where provided)

With ignition device at MAR, press the

fig. 24 button on the dashboard.

When the function is on, the LED on the

button switches on.

IMPORTANT The activation of this

function with the engine stopped could

flatten the battery.

WARNING

15) All adjustments must be carried out

only with the car stationary and engine

stopped.

16) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out

any after-market operation involving

steering system or steering column

modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft

device) that could adversely affect

performance and safety, invalidate the

warranty and also result in the car not

meeting type-approval requirements.

REAR VIEW

MIRRORS

INTERIOR MIRROR

Manual adjustment: operate lever A

fig. 25 to adjust the mirror into two

different positions: normal or anti-glare.

The mirror is fitted with a safety device

that causes its release in the event of a

violent impact with a passenger.

Electrochromic mirror

On some versions, an electrochromic

mirror is available, that can

automatically modify its reflecting action

to prevent dazzling the driver fig. 26.

The electrochromic mirror has an

ON/OFF button to activate/deactivate

the electrochromic anti-glare function.

F1B0628C

F1B0625C

F1B0033C

When reverse gear is engaged, the

mirror is automatically set for daytime

use.

DOOR MIRRORS

Electric adjustment

17)

Adjusting the mirrors is possible with

the ignition device at MAR and for

about 3 minutes after the ignition device

switches to STOP (or also after the

mechanical key has been extracted, for

cars equipped with mechanical key with

remote control). When one of the front

doors is opened this operation is

disabled.

Select the desired mirror using device A

fig. 27:

position 1: left mirror selected;

position 2: right mirror selected;

To adjust the selected mirror, press

button B in the four directions shown by

the arrows.

IMPORTANT Once adjustment is

complete, rotate device A to position

0 to prevent accidental movements.

Electric folding

(where provided)

To fold back the mirrors press button C.

Press the button again to restore the

mirrors to the driving position. Once the

chosen command has been given,

before the mirror reaches the fully open

or closed position its direction of travel

can be reversed by pressing button C

again.

It is possible to fold or open the mirrors

with the ignition device at MAR and for

about 3 minutes after the ignition device

switches to STOP (or also after the

mechanical key has been extracted, for

cars equipped with mechanical key with

remote control). When one of the front

doors is opened this operation is

disabled.

IMPORTANT NOTE Except when using

this function for passing through narrow

gaps, when on the move the mirrors

must always be kept open (position 1

fig. 28 ) and must never be folded

(position 2).

F1B0034C

F1B0035C

F1B0340C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Mirrors realignment operation

In case one of the door mirrors has

been moved manually it may occur that

the mirror itself does not retain its

position in a stable way while driving.

In that case it is necessary to carry out

the following realignment operation:

manually close the mirror in parking

position, folding it from position 1 to

position 2 (see fig. 28 );

Actuate the mirrors opening control

one or two times C fig. 27 to realign the

system and bring both mirrors in the

driving position.

WARNING

17) As the driver's door mirror is curved, it

may slightly alter the perception of

distance.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

LIGHT SWITCH

Light switch ring A fig. 29, located on

the left side of the dashboard, controls

operation of side lights, daytime running

lights, dipped beam headlights, fog

lights and adjusts the instrument panel

and control button graphic dimmer.

With the ignition device in the MAR

position, the instrument panel and the

various dashboard controls will come

on with the external lights.

AUTO FUNCTION

(Dusk sensor)

(where provided)

This is an infrared LED sensor that

works in conjunction with the rain

sensor and is located on the

windscreen. It is able to detect

variations in outside lighting based on

the light sensitivity set in the display

Menu or the Uconnect™ system.

The higher the sensitivity, the lower the

amount of external light needed to

automatically switch the external lights

on.

Function activation

Turn the light switch ring nut to AUTO.

IMPORTANT The function can only be

activated with the ignition device at

MAR.

Function deactivation

To deactivate the function, turn the light

switch ring nut to a position other than

AUTO.

DIPPED BEAM

HEADLIGHTS

With the ignition device in MAR

position, turn the light switch ring to

: the position lights, the dipped

beam headlights and the instrument

panel come on; the

light on the

panel illuminates.

F1B0206C

DAYTIME RUNNING

LIGHTS (DRL)

"Daytime Running Lights"

18) 19)

With the ignition device in the MAR

position and the light ring turned to the

O position, the daytime running lights

are automatically activated. The other

lights and interior lighting remain off.

The daytime running lights are

temporarily deactivated when the

direction indicators are activated. When

the direction indicators are deactivated,

the daylight running lights are

reactivated.

FOG LIGHTS

(where provided)

The fog light switch is integrated with

the light switch.

With the ignition device in the MAR

position and the dipped beam

headlights on, press the

button to

switch on the fog lights.

When the fog lights are on, the position

and number plates lights are on while

the daytime running lights are off.

To switch them off, press the button

again or turn the light switch ring to O.

REAR FOG LIGHT

(where provided)

The button which turns the rear fog light

on and off is integrated in the light

switch.

With the ignition device in the MAR

position and the dipped beam

headlights or fog lights on, press the

button to switch on the rear fog

light.

PARKING LIGHTS

These can be turned on by turning the

light switch ring to the

position.

The

warning light switches on in

the instrument panel.

IMPORTANT NOTE Do not select this

light switch position when the car is

moving, but only to indicate that the car

is parked when prescribed by the

regulations in force in the country where

you are driving (Highway Code).

To turn the lights off, turn the light

switch ring to the O position

HEADLIGHTS OFF DELAY

(Follow me home)

Activation

With multifunction display and

Uconnect™Radio: turn the ignition

device to STOP. Within 2 minutes, pull

the left stalk to headlight flashing mode:

the headlight off delay is activated for

30 seconds. The function can be

activated for 7 times in sequence, i.e.

up to a total of 210 seconds.

With reconfigurable multifunction

display and/orUconnect™7'': the

headlight off delay can be set (from 0,

30, 60 to 90 seconds) in the Menu.

If the headlight off delay is set to

0 seconds, it is possible to turn on the

lights for a predefined time of

30 seconds using the main beam

headlights stalk within 2 minutes after

stopping the engine. It is possible to

turn on the lights 7 times, for a

maximum of 210 seconds.

If the value set on the Menu is different

from 0, the lights can be switched of for

the predetermined time by taking the

ring from position

(with the engine

running) to position O (with the engine

off).

The function can be activated

automatically on versions with dusk

sensor: turn the ring to the AUTO

position with the engine running. The

dipped beam headlights will be turned

on if the sensor detects a low level of

light. The headlights off delay is

activated automatically when the engine

is switched off with the headlights on

for the time selected in the Menu.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Deactivation

If the function is activated by using the

left steering wheel stalk, the function

can be deactivated by holding the left

lever in "main beam flashing" mode for

longer than 2 seconds or by waiting for

the deactivation time shown on the

display.

The function cannot be deactivated if it

is activated using the light line. The

headlights will be switched off at the

end of the set time.

Turning the ignition device to the MAR

position will deactivate the function.

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

To activate the fixed main beam

headlights, with the ignition device in

MAR, push left lever A fig. 30 towards

the dashboard. The light switch should

be turned to AUTO with the dipped

beam headlights on, or it should be

turned to position

With main beam headlights on, the

warning light on the instrument

panel will come on at the same time.

Flashing the headlights

Pull the lever A fig. 30 towards you;

when released it returns automatically

to the stable, central position.

With main beam headlights on, the

warning light on the instrument

panel will come on at the same time.

Automatic main beam headlights

(where provided)

In order not to disturb other road users,

the main beam headlights are

automatically turned off when

approaching oncoming vehicles or

when following a vehicle travelling in the

same direction.

This function can be set using the

display Menu (see the instructions in the

"Display" paragraph, "Knowing the

instrument panel" chapter); to activate

it, turn the light switch ring to AUTO.

To activate the function, push the lever

towards the instrument panel (it will

hold this position): the

light

illuminates on the instrument panel. If

the main beam headlights are on, the

light also illuminates. If the car is

stopped with the setting just described,

when it is restarted the automatic main

beam headlight function will have to be

set again: return the lever to the central

position and push it towards the

instrument panel as before.

When the speed is over 40 km/h and

the function is active, returning the lever

to the stable central position

deactivates the function and switches

the main beam headlights off.

When the speed is lower than 15 km/h

and the function is active, the system

automatically switches main beam

headlights off.

If the lever is pulled back to the central

stable position and then pushed

towards the instrument panel again and

left there, this is interpreted as a request

for permanent main beam headlights:

the light illuminates on the instrument

panel and the main beam headlights

remain on until the car's speed rises

back above 40 km/h. Above this speed,

the function is automatically reactivated

and the

light illuminates again on

the instrument panel.

To disable the function, turn the light

switch ring to the

position.

F1B0037C

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Bring left stalk A fig. 30 to the (stable)

position:

upwards: activates the right direction

indicator;

downwards: activates the left direction

indicator.

The

or warning light respectively

will flash on the instrument panel.

The direction indicators switch off

automatically when the steering wheel

is straightened or when the daytime

running lights (DRL)/parking lights are

activated.

"Lane Change" function

If you wish to signal a lane change while

running, place the left stalk in the

unstable position for less than half a

second.

The direction indicator on the side

selected will flash five times and then

switch off automatically.

HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT

ADJUSTMENT

Headlight alignment corrector

The headlight alignment corrector

operates with ignition device at MAR

and dipped headlights on.

To adjust rotate ring nut A fig. 31.

Position 0: 1 or 2 occupants on

front seats;

Position 1: 4 or 5 occupants

Position 2: 4 or 5 occupants+ load

in the boot

Position 3: driver + maximum

admissible load stowed only in the

luggage compartment.

IMPORTANT Check the headlight

alignment each time the weight of the

load transported changes.

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND

CONTROL BUTTON

GRAPHIC BRIGHTNESS

ADJUSTMENT

With side lights or headlights on, turn

ring nut B fig. 31 upwards to increase

light brightness of the instrument panel

and of the control button graphics, or

turn the ring nut downwards to

decrease it.

WARNING

18) The daytime running lights are an

alternative to the dipped headlights for

driving during the daytime in countries

where it is compulsory to have lights on

during the day; where it is not compulsory,

the use of daytime running lights is

permitted.

19) Daytime running lights cannot replace

dipped beam headlights when driving at

night or through tunnels. The use of

daytime running lights is governed by the

highway code of the country in which you

are driving. Comply with legal

requirements.

F1B0207C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INTERIOR LIGHTS

FRONT ROOF LIGHT

Switch A fig. 32 is used to switch on/off

the roof light bulbs.

Switch A positions:

central position: lights B and E

switch on/off when the doors are

opened/closed;

pressed to the left (OFF): lights B and

E are always switched off;

pressed to the right ( ): lights B

and E are always switched on.

The lights switch on/off gradually.

Switch C switches light B on/off.

Switch D switches light E on/off.

Roof light timing

On certain versions, to facilitate getting

in/out of the vehicle at night or in

poorly-lit areas, two timed modes have

been provided.

Timing while getting into the vehicle

Timing while getting out of the

vehicle.

WINDSCREEN/REAR

WINDOW WIPER

Operation is only possible with the

ignition device at MAR.

SCREEN WIPER/WASHER

Operation

7) 8)

20)

Ring nut A fig. 33 can be set to the

following positions:

windscreen wiper off.

fixed intermittent wipe (slow)

intermittent operation linked to the

speed

LO constant slow wipe

HI constant fast wipe

MIST function

F1B0041C

F1B0635C

Move the stalk upwards (unstable

position) to activate the MIST

function: operation is limited to the

time for which the stalk is held in this

position. When released, the stalk will

return to its default position and the

windscreen wiper automatically stop.

IMPORTANT This function does not

activate the windscreen washer;

windscreen washer fluid will not

therefore be sprayed onto the

windscreen. To spray windscreen

washer fluid onto the windscreen, the

washing function must be used. With

the ring nut A fig. 33 in position

, the

windscreen wiper is not activated. In

position

, the pause time between

the strokes of the windscreen wiper is

10 seconds, independently of the

vehicle speed. In position

, the pause

time between two strokes is set

according to the vehicle speed: when

the speed increases, the time between

two strokes decreases. In position LO

or HI, the windscreen wiper moves

continuously, i.e. without a pause

between two strokes.

“Smart washing” function

Pull the stalk towards the steering

wheel (unstable position) to operate the

windscreen washer.

When the stalk is held pulled for longer

than half a second, the windscreen

wiper moves with active control.

Releasing the stalk will activate three

strokes.

With the ring nut A fig. 33 turned to

position LO or HI, the smart washing

function is not carried out.

IMPORTANT If the stalk is activated for

less than half a second, only the

windscreen washer jet is activated. Do

not prolong the activation of the "Smart

Washing" function for more than

30 seconds. Do not activate the

windscreen washer control when the

reservoir is empty.

RAIN SENSOR

(where provided)

9) 10)

This is located behind the interior rear

view mirror fig. 34, in contact with the

windscreen and can measure the

amount of rain and, consequently,

manage the automatic wiping mode of

the windscreen in accordance with the

amount of water on the screen.

The rain sensor will be activated when

the ignition device is turned to MAR. If

no rain is detected, the wiper will not

carry out any strokes. If it is raining, the

windscreen wiper moves according to

the amount of rain measured by the

sensor.

The device is able to recognise, and

automatically adjust itself in the

presence of the following conditions:

presence of dirt on the surface (e.g.

salt, dirt, etc.);

presence of streaks of water caused

by the worn window wiper blades;

difference between day and night.

The rain sensor will be deactivated only

when the ignition device is turned to

STOP.

IMPORTANT Keep the glass in the

sensor area clean.

AUTOMATIC WIPING

Activation

The automatic wiping can be chosen by

selecting the rain sensor from the

display Menu or on the Uconnect™

system and rotating the ring nut A

fig. 33 to position

or .

F1B0048C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

These will be used to set the sensitivity

level of the rain sensor: in position

the sensor has a lower sensitivity and

the windscreen wipers will activate

when there is a significant amount of

water on the windscreen; while in

position

, the windscreen wipers will

be activated by a minimum amount of

rain measured.

The activation of the automatic wiping

will be notified to the driver by a single

stroke.

The same stroke will be visible every

time the sensor sensitivity is increased,

by rotating the ring nut from position

to position .

The "Smart Washing" function activates

the normal washing cycle, after which

the automatic wiping function is

restored. The failure of the sensor is

indicated by the

symbol lighting up

on the display.

If the rain sensor malfunctions, the

wiper mode can be modified according

to requirements. The malfunction signal

remain active during the operation time

of the sensor or until the device is reset.

Inhibition

If the ignition device is turned to STOP,

leaving the ring nut A in position

, when the engine is next started

(ignition device at MAR), no wiping

cycle occurs for system protection

reasons.

This temporary inhibition prevents

unwanted activation of the wipers when

the car is started (i.e. when the

windscreen is being washed by hand or

the wipers are stuck to the windscreen

by ice).

It is possible to reactivate the automatic

wiping mode in three ways:

by rotating the ring nut to position O

and then again to position

by moving the stalk upwards to

position MIST

upon exceeding the 5 km/h speed

with the rain sensor

When the windscreen wiper is

reactivated using any of the

manoeuvres described above,

reactivation is indicated by a single

stroke of the windscreen wipers,

regardless of the condition of the

windscreen.

IMPORTANT For automatic

transmission vehicles with rain sensor,

engaging the gear N (Neutral) inhibits

the automatic wiping mode.

Deactivation

It is possible to deselect the automatic

wiping through the display Menu or the

Uconnect™ system, or by rotating ring

nut A to any non-intermittent position (

or ).

Service Position

The function allows the driver to replace

the windscreen wiper blades more

easily, protecting them also from ice

and/or snow.

Activation

To activate this function deactivate the

windscreen wiper (ring nut A fig. 33 in

position

) before setting the ignition

device to STOP. This function can only

be activated within 2 minutes of setting

the ignition device to STOP.

To activate this function, move the lever

upwards (unstable position) for at least

half a second.

Each time the function is activated

correctly, the wiper blades move to

signal the correct reception of the

command. The command can be

repeated up to a maximum of the three

times. The fourth repetition of the

command deactivates the function.

If, after using the function, the ignition

device is set back to MAR with the

blades in a position other than rest

position (at the base of the windscreen),

they will only return to rest position

following a command given using the

stalk (stalk upwards, into unstable

position) or when a speed of 5 km/h is

exceeded.

IMPORTANT Before activating the

function, make sure that when the

engine is turned on the windscreen

wiper is free of snow or ice

Deactivation

The function is deactivated if:

2 minutes have passed since the

ignition device was set to STOP;

the ignition device is set to MAR and

the blades are in rest position;

the ignition device is set to MAR and

a wiping command is carried out.

REAR WINDOW WIPER/

WASHER

Turn the ring B fig. 33 to set the

rearscreen wiper to operate in the

following modes:

continuous: when ring is in the

position;

intermittent: when ring is in the

position and the windscreen wiper is

stationary;

synchronous: when the rearscreen

wiper ring is in the

position and the

windscreen wiper is moving or set to

AUTO. In this mode, the rear window

wiper makes one stroke for each two

strokes of the windscreen wiper;

single wipe: with the selector in the

position, the windscreen wiper on

and reverse gear engaged.

Push the stalk towards the dashboard

(rocking position) to activate the rear

window washer jet. Keep pushing the

lever to automatically activate both the

rear window washer jet and the rear

window wiper with a single movement.

Releasing the stalk will activate three

strokes, as described for the

windscreen wiper. The smart wash

cycle will not be performed if the ring is

in the

position.

Deactivation

The function stops when the stalk is

released.

WARNING

20) If the window needs to be cleaned,

make sure the device is deactivated or the

ignition button and the key are on STOP.

IMPORTANT

7) Never use the windscreen wipers to

remove layers of snow or ice from the

windscreen. In such conditions, the

windscreen wiper may be subjected to

excessive stress and the motor cut-out

switch, which prevents operation for a few

seconds, may intervene. If operation is not

subsequently restored, even after restarting

the engine, contact a Fiat Dealership.

8) Do not operate the windscreen wiper

with the blades lifted from the windscreen.

9) Do not activate the rain sensor when

washing the car in an automatic car wash.

10) Make sure the device is switched off if

there is ice on the windscreen.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

A - fan activation/adjustment knob:

0 = fan off

= fan speed (7 different speeds can be chosen)

B - air recirculation on/off button;

C - air temperature adjustment knob and MAX A/C function activation:

blue section = cold air

F1B0052C

red section = hot air

D - climate control system compressor activation/deactivation button (not available for versions with heater only);

E - air distribution knob:

air flow from central and side vents

air flow from central vents, side vents and front / rear footwell vents

air outlet from the front and rear footwell diffusers and a light air flow also from the side vents on the dashboard

air outlet from the front and rear footwell diffusers, to the windscreen, the side windows and a light air flow also at the side

vents on the dashboard

air outlet to the windscreen, the side windows and a light air flow also at the side vents on the dashboard

4 further intermediate positions are also possible in the 5 main distributions described above.

F - Heated rear window on/off button;

Selecting the windscreen air distribution activates the climate control system compressor (LED on A/C button on) and the air

recirculation is set to "outside air" (LED on button B off). This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows. The driver can

always set air recirculation and climate control system compressor.

Additional heater

(where provided)

The additional heater ensures more rapid passenger compartment heating.

It activates in cold weather conditions, if the following conditions are verified:

outside temperature low;

engine coolant temperature low;

engine started;

fan speed set at least to 1

speed;

knob C turned completely clockwise to red section.

The heater is switched off when at least one of the conditions above is no longer verified.

NOTE The power of the electric heater is modulated according to the battery voltage.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AUTOMATIC DUAL ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

A - driver side temperature adjustment knob;

B - internal air recirculation on/off button;

C - climate control system compressor on/off button;

D - MAX-DEF function activation button (rapid defrosting/demisting of front windows);

E - climate control on/off button;

F - fan speed adjustment knob;

G - Fan speed indicator LED;

H - air distribution selection buttons;

I - Heated rear window on/off button;

F1B0051C

L - passenger side temperature adjustment knob;

M - SYNC function activation button (alignment of set temperatures) driver/passenger side;

N - AUTO function activation button (automatic operation).

Air distribution selection

Air flow to the windscreen and front side window diffusers to demist/defrost them.

Air flow at central and side dashboard vents to ventilate the chest and the face during the hot season.

Air flow to the front and rear footwell diffusers. This air distribution setting heats the passenger compartment most quickly,

giving a prompt sensation of warmth.

Air flow distributed between footwell diffusers (hotter air) and central and side dashboard vents (cooler air). This

distribution setting is useful in spring and autumn on sunny days.

Air flow distributed between footwell vents and windscreen and front side vents. This distribution setting allows the

passenger compartment to be warmed up efficiently and prevents the windows from misting up.

Air flow distributed between central and side dashboard vents and windscreen and front side window vents. This

distribution allows air to be sent to the windscreen in conditions of strong sunlight.

+ +

Air flow distribution to all diffusers on the vehicle.

In AUTO mode, the climate control system automatically manages air distribution (the LEDs on buttons H are off). When set

manually, the air distribution is indicated by the LEDs on the selected buttons switching on. In combined function mode the

relevant function is enabled simultaneously with those already set by pressing the corresponding button. If a button whose

function is already active is pressed, its operation is cancelled and the corresponding LED switches off. To restore automatic

control of the air distribution after a manual selection, press the AUTO button.

Start&Stop

The automatic dual zone climate control system manages the Start&Stop system (engine off when vehicle speed is 0 km/h) to

ensure adequate comfort inside the vehicle. When the Start&Stop system is on (engine off and vehicle at a standstill), the

automatic recirculation management is turned off always taking air in from outside, to reduce the probability of the windows

misting up (as the compressor is off).

IMPORTANT

2) The system uses R134a coolant, which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances use

R1234yf and R12 fluids, which are incompatible with the components of the system.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ELECTRIC WINDOWS

21)

Moving the windows up and down is

possible with the ignition device at MAR

and for about 3 minutes after the

ignition device switches to STOP (or

also after the mechanical key has been

extracted, for cars equipped with

mechanical key with remote control).

When one of the front doors is opened

this operation is disabled.

Driver side front door controls

All windows can be controlled from the

driver side door panel fig. 37.

A: front left window opening/closing.

"Continuous automatic" operation

during window opening/closing stage

and anti-pinch system activated.

B: right front window opening/

closing. "Automatic continuous"

operation during window

opening/closing and anti-pinch system

activated (where provided);

C: enabling/disabling of rear door

electric window controls;

D: left rear window opening/closing

(if present). "Automatic continuous"

mode for opening only;

E: right rear window opening/closing

(if present). "Automatic continuous"

mode for opening only.

Window opening

Push the buttons to open the desired

window fig. 38.

When any of the buttons on front or

rear doors is pressed briefly, the

window moves in stages; if the button

is held down, "continuous automatic"

operation is activated.

If the button is pressed again, the

window will stop in the desired position.

Window closing

Lift the buttons to close the desired

window fig. 39.

When any of the buttons on front or

rear doors is pressed briefly, the

window moves in stages; "continuous

automatic" operation is only available

for the front door windows.

The rear door windows can only be

closed in stages.

Front window anti-pinch safety

device

(where provided)

This safety system can recognise the

presence of any obstacle during the

window closing movement. If this

occurs, the system stops the window's

movement and reverts it, depending on

its position.

F1B0066C

F1B0067C

F1B0068C

The window is therefore lowered by

about 5 cm from its initial stop position.

The window cannot be operated in any

way during this time.

Electric window system

initialisation

If power supply is interrupted, the

electric window automatic operation

must be reinitialised.

The initialisation procedure described

below must be carried out with the

doors closed and for each door:

close the window by holding down

the button;

once the window has closed

completely, keep holding the button

down for at least a further 3 seconds.

WARNING

21) Incorrect use of the electric windows

may be dangerous. Before and during

operation, always check that nobody is

exposed to the risk of being injured either

directly by the moving window or through

objects getting caught or hit by it. When

leaving the vehicle (equipped with

mechanical key with remote control),

always remove the key from the ignition

device to prevent accidental operation of

the electric windows from being a hazard

for those still on board.

ELECTRIC SUN

ROOF

22) 11)

The electric sun roof comprises two

glass panels (the front one is mobile

and the rear one fixed) and is fitted with

two manually operated sun blinds.

Operation of the sun roof is only

possible with the ignition device at

MAR.

OPENING

Press button A fig. 40: the roof will

open up completely.

The automatic motion can be

interrupted in any position by pressing

button A again.

CLOSING

Press button A fig. 40: the roof will

close completely.

The automatic motion can be

interrupted in any position by pressing

button A again.

F1B0069C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SWIVEL OPENING

To bring the roof into "swivel" position,

press and release button B fig. 40.

This type of swivel-opening can be

activated irrespective of the position of

the sun roof. When starting with the

roof in closed position, pressing the

button automatically causes its

swivel-opening. If the roof is already

open, the button must be held until the

roof reaches the swivel-opening

position.

Pressing button B again during

automatic movement of the roof will

stop it.

SUN BLIND MOVEMENT

The blind is manually-operated: it can

be stopped in any position.

ANTI-PINCH DEVICE

The sun roof has an anti-pinch safety

system capable of detecting the

presence of an obstacle during the

closing movement: if this happens, the

system intervenes and the movement of

the roof is immediately reversed into

opening.

EMERGENCY OPERATION

If the control buttons fail to operate, the

sun roof can be moved manually,

proceeding as described below:

remove protective cap A fig. 41 on

the internal trim;

take Allen key B provided;

place Allen key B into housing A;

turn Allen key B in a clockwise

direction to open the roof or in an

anticlockwise direction to close it.

INITIALISATION

PROCEDURE

After irregular behaviour of the sun roof

or an emergency manoeuvre (see

description in the previous paragraph),

the automatic operation of the sun roof

must be initialised again.

Proceed as follows:

press button A fig. 40 to bring the

roof into completely closed position;

bring the ignition device to STOP

and wait at least 10 seconds;

bring the ignition device to MAR;

hold button A down for at least

10 seconds, then you should hear the

mechanical stop of the roof motor;

within 5 seconds hold button A

down: the roof will perform a complete

automatic opening and closing cycle (to

indicate that the initialisation procedure

has been successful). If this does not

occur, the procedure must be restarted

from the beginning.

WARNING

22) When leaving the vehicle, always

remove the key (where present) from the

ignition to avoid the risk of injury due to

accidental operation of the sun roof.

Improper use of the roof can be

dangerous. Before and during operation,

always check that no-one is exposed to

the risk of being injured by the moving

sunroof or by objects getting caught or hit

by it.

IMPORTANT

11) Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack

or crossbars are fitted. Do not open the

sun roof if there is snow or ice on it: you

may damage it.

F1B0070C

BONNET

OPENING

Proceed as follows:

pull lever A fig. 42 in the direction

indicated by the arrow;

operate lever B fig. 43, in the

direction indicated by the arrow, and

raise the bonnet;

release bonnet stay C fig. 44 from its

locking device D, then insert its end in

housing E on the bonnet.

IMPORTANT Before raising the bonnet,

make sure that the arms of the wipers

are not raised from the windscreen and

that the wiper is not operational.

23) 24) 25)

CLOSING

26)

Proceed as follows:

hold the bonnet up with one hand

and with the other remove the stay C

fig. 44 from the housing E and fit it back

in the locking device D;

lower the bonnet to approximately

40 centimetres from the engine

compartment and let it drop. Make sure

that the bonnet is completely closed

and not only fastened by the locking

device by trying to open it. If it is not

perfectly closed, do not try to press the

bonnet lid down but open it and repeat

the procedure.

IMPORTANT Always check that the

bonnet is closed correctly to prevent it

from opening while the vehicle is

travelling.

WARNING

23) Perform these operations only when

the car is stationary.

24) The bonnet may drop suddenly if the

supporting rod is not positioned correctly.

25) Use both hands to lift the bonnet.

Before lifting, check that the windscreen

wiper arms are not raised from the

windscreen, that the vehicle is stationary

and that the electric parking brake is

engaged.

26) For safety reasons, the bonnet must

always be properly closed while the car is

travelling. Therefore, make sure that the

bonnet is properly closed and that the lock

is engaged. If you discover that the bonnet

is not perfectly closed during travel, stop

immediately and close the bonnet in the

correct manner.

F1B0500C

F1B0072C

F1B0073C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

BOOT

The boot unlocking is electrically

operated and is deactivated when the

vehicle is in motion.

OPENING

27)

Opening from the outside

When unlocked, the tailgate can be

opened from outside the vehicle using

the electric opening handle A

fig. 45 located under the handle until

the unlocking click is heard or by

quickly pressing button

on the

remote control twice.

The direction indicators will blink twice

and the internal roof light will

simultaneously come on when the boot

is opened; the roof light will

automatically switch off when the

tailgate is closed (see also "Interior

lights").

If the tailgate is left open, the roof light

will automatically switch off to preserve

the battery charge.

Emergency opening from the inside

Proceed as follows:

lower the head restraints and fold the

backrests;

identify and remove yellow guard A

fig. 46, which is press-fitted on the lock,

using the screwdriver provided;

insert the screwdriver in order to

activate tab B fig. 47, for mechanical

release of the lock.

CLOSING

Grip handle A fig. 48 and lower the

tailgate, pressing next to the lock until it

clicks.

IMPORTANT Before closing the boot

make sure that you have the keys since

the boot is automatically locked.

F1B0074C

F1B0075C

F1B0076C

F1B0077C

BOOT INITIALISATION

IMPORTANT If the battery is

disconnected or the protection fuse

blows, the boot opening/closing

mechanism must be reinitialised as

follows:

close all the doors and the boot;

press the " FIAT" button on the

remote control;

press the button on the remote

control.

LOAD COMPARTMENT

FEATURES

Reconfigurable load platform

12)

The car is equipped with a

reconfigurable load platform A, which

makes the boot volume modular:

The load platform can be set to

2 different positions:

Floor level (low) fig. 49: allows use

of the full luggage compartment

capacity.

Sill level (high) fig. 50: combined

with folding the rear seats and front

passenger seat, it allows long items to

be loaded and also makes

loading/unloading items in the luggage

compartment easier. It also allows the

space underneath (double bottom) to

be used as a further compartment for

stowing objects which are more fragile

or small.

The load platform can also be tilted,

and is equipped with a washable plastic

surface, useful for instance for

transporting wet or muddy items.

IMPORTANT Movements of the load

platform must take place in a central

position relative to the luggage

compartment.

Anchoring your load

Four hooks may be arranged in the

corners of the boot, according to the

versions, at the corners of the boot (two

at the front A fig. 51 and two at the rear

B ) for attaching cables for firmly

securing the carried load.

EMERGENCY KIT

(where provided)

Inside the kit, located in the luggage

compartment, are a fire extinguisher

and a first-aid bag.

WARNING

27) Be careful not to hit objects on the

storage shelf when you open the tailgate.

F1B0327C

F1B0328C

F1B0079C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT

12) The dimensions of the platform permit

a maximum distributed weight capacity of

70 kg: do not load objects with a greater

weight.

VERSION WITH LPG

SYSTEM

28) 29)

13) 14) 15)

INTRODUCTION

The LPG version features two fuel

supply systems: one for petrol and one

for LPG.

Like the petrol system, the LPG system

is timed, sequential multipoint type with

special injectors.

PASSIVE SAFETY /

ACTIVE SAFETY

Although the LPG system has

numerous safety features, it is advisable

to proceed as follows every time the car

is not in use for a long period or moved

in an emergency as a result of a

breakdown or accident:

unscrew the fixing devices A

fig. 52 and then remove the cover B;

close the LPG cock rotating the ring

C fig. 53 clockwise;

refit the cover and retighten the

fastening devices.

F1B0602C

F1B0270C

LPG TANK

16)

The car has a pressurised tank for

storing LPG in a liquid state. It is

toroidal and is located in the spare

wheel compartment with suitable

protection.

LPG tank certification

The LPG tank is certified in

accordance with the regulations in

force.

In Italy, the tank has a life of

10 years starting from the car

registration date. If the car has

been registered in a country other

than Italy, the duration and the

testing/inspection procedures of

the LPG tank can vary depending

on the national provisions in force

in that country. In all case, when the

time limit for your country has

expired, go to a Fiat Dealer to have

the tank replaced.

LPG/PETROL SWITCH

30)

18) 19) 20)

This engine normally runs on LPG

except during starting when it runs on

petrol.

Switching to LPG is automatic: the

green warning light

on the

instrument panel turns off.

To change fuel type, press the

button on the dashboard fig. 54with

the car stationary and engine running,

or while driving.

If the LPG runs out during LPG

operation, the system automatically

switches over to running on petrol.

The four bars on the digital indicator

near the letters LPG on the instrument

panel indicate the level of LPG in the

tank.

REFUELLING

17) 21) 22) 23)

LPG

Maximum refuelling capacity (including

reserve) (*): 38 litres

(*) The figure already takes into account

the 80% tank filling limit and the

residual fluid required for priming; it is

the maximum permitted capacity. In

addition, after different refuelling

processes, this figure may vary due to

differences between the network pump

supply pressures, pumps having

different supply/locking features, tank

not completely run out of fuel.

Note that when using a fuel such as

LPG, the range is very variable

because, in addition to the vehicle

driving and servicing conditions, it also

depends on the composition of the gas

which may vary, not only seasonally, but

also from supplier to supplier. LPG is, in

effect, a composition of gas (butane

and propane) mixed in a way that may

not be standardised.

IMPORTANT In order to avoid

inconsistent information by the LPG

gauge on the instrument panel, it is

recommended to refill with at least

10 litres each time.

F1B0611C

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

WARNING

28) Note that in some countries (including

Italy) there are legal restrictions in force for

parking/garaging motor cars fuelled by gas

that is denser than air; LPG comes under

this category.

29) If gas is smelt, switch from LPG

operation to petrol operation and

immediately go to a Fiat Dealership to have

the vehicle checked and possible system

faults excluded.

30) Do not switch between the two

operating modes whilst starting the engine.

IMPORTANT

13) The car is equipped with a specifically

designed gaseous LPG injection system: it

is therefore absolutely forbidden to alter the

configuration of the system or its

components. The use of other components

or materials could cause malfunctions and

lead to a reduction in safety; therefore, in

the case of problems, contact a Fiat

Dealership. When towing or lifting the

vehicle, follow the instructions in the main

handbook under the paragraph on "Towing

the vehicle" to prevent damage to the gas

system parts.

14) When painting in an oven, the LPG tank

must be removed from the car and later

refitted by a Fiat Dealership.

15) The system operates at temperatures

ranging between -20°C and 100°C.

16) Periodically (at least once every six

months), it is advisable to let the LPG in the

tank run out and, at the next refuelling,

check that it does not exceed the

maximum capacity of 38 litres (reserve

included) (with a tolerance of 2 litres

excess) (see instructions in the "Capacities"

paragraph of this supplement). If the level is

above 38 litres (reserve included) contact a

Fiat Dealership immediately.

17) It is strictly forbidden to use any

additive in the LPG. Periodically (at least

once every six months) it is advisable to let

the LPG in the tank run out and, at the first

refuelling, to check that it does not exceed

the maximum capacity of 42 litres (reserve

included) (with a tolerance of 1 litres

excess). If the level is above 42 litres

(reserve included) contact a Fiat Dealership

immediately.

18) Regardless of the last fuel system used,

at the following engine starting, after the

initial petrol stage, the system will

automatically switch to LPG.

19) When switching is requested, metallic

noise from the valves which pressurise the

circuit can be heard. For the switching logic

described above, a delay between the

valve ticking and the switching off of the

instrument panel indication is completely

normal.

20) In particular usage conditions, such as

starting and operation at low ambient

temperature or LPG supply with low

propane content, the system may switch

temporarily to petrol operation, without a

visual indication of switching on the

instrument panel. In the event of low LPG

levels in the tank or request for high

performance (e.g. overtaking, car fully

laden, steep hills) the system may

automatically switch to petrol operation to

guarantee the engine power requested; the

green warning light

on the instrument

panel switches on to indicate this. When

the above conditions are no longer present,

the system automatically restores LPG

operation; the green warning light

switches off. To achieve the automatic

switching described above, make sure that

there is always enough fuel in the petrol

tank.

21) Only use LPG for motor vehicles.

22) It is strictly forbidden to use any

additive in the LPG.

23) Periodically (at least once every six

months), it is advisable to let the LPG in the

tank run out and, at the next refuelling,

check that it does not exceed the

maximum capacity of 38 litres (reserve

included) (with a tolerance of 2 litres

excess) (see instructions in the "Capacities"

paragraph of this supplement). If the level is

above 38 litres (reserve included) contact a

Fiat Dealership immediately.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section of the booklet gives you all

the information you need to

understand, interpret and use the

instrument panel correctly.

CONTROL PANEL AND

ON-BOARD INSTRUMENTS ......47

DISPLAY ..................49

TRIP COMPUTER.............51

WARNING LIGHTS AND

MESSAGES ................52

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTROL PANEL AND ON-BOARD INSTRUMENTS

VERSIONS WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY

A. Speedometer / B. Digital fuel level gauge and reserve war ning light / C. Display / D. Digital engine coolant thermometer with

overheating warning light / E. Tachometer.

For LPG versions: the temperature indicator D is replaced by the LPG fuel level and the “Coolant temperature” is shown on the

instrument panel display.

Warning light present on Diesel versions only.

IMPORTANT The illumination of the instrument panel graphics may vary according to version.

F1B0341C

VERSIONS WITH COLOUR DISPLAY

A. Speedometer / B. Digital fuel level gauge and reserve war ning light / C. Display / D. Digital engine coolant thermometer with

overheating warning light / E. Tachometer

For LPG versions: the temperature indicator D is replaced by the LPG fuel level and the “Coolant temperature” is shown on the

instrument panel display.

Warning light present on Diesel versions only.

IMPORTANT The illumination of the instrument panel graphics may vary according to version.

F1B0342C

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

The vehicle is equipped with a display

that can show useful information to the

driver while driving.

The display fig. 57 will show the

following information:

A: time, Gear Shift Indicator (where

provided), gear engagement (versions

with automatic transmission only),

outside temperature, compass

indications (where provided), date.

B: vehicle speed, warning

messages/any failure indications.

C: total kilometres (or miles) run and

icons of any failure indications.

GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR

(where provided)

The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system

advises the driver when to change gear

through a special indication on the

display

Through the GSI, the driver is informed

that the gear change will allow a

reduction in fuel consumption to be

obtained.

When the SHIFT UP icon (

SHIFT) is

shown on the display, the GSI is

advising the driver to engage a higher

gear, while the SHIFT DOWN (

SHIFT) icon advises the driver to

engage a lower gear.

The indication in the display remains

until a gear is shifted or the driving

conditions go back to a situation where

gearshifting is not required to improve

consumption.

CONTROL BUTTONS

These are located on the left side of the

steering wheel fig. 58.

They allow the driver to select and

interact with the items in the Main menu

of the display (see paragraph "Main

menu").

/ : press and release the

buttons to access the Main menu and

to scroll the menu and the submenus

upwards or downwards.

/ : press and release the

buttons to access the information

displays or the submenus of an item of

the Main menu.

OK: press this button to

access/select the info displays or the

submenus of an item of the Main menu.

Hold the button pressed for 1 second

to reset the displayed/selected

functions.

F1B0179C

F1B0183C

MAIN MENU

The Menu includes the following items:

TRIP

MOOD SELECTOR (or DRIVE MODE

depending on the market) (where

provided) / GSI

VEHICLE INFO

DRIVER ASSIST

AUDIO

PHONE

NAVIGATION

ALERTS

VEHICLE SET-UP

Vehicle setup (Change car settings)

This menu item allows you to change

the settings for:

"Vehicle off" (where provided);

"Display";

"Units";

"Clock & Date";

"Security"

"Security & Assistance";

"Lights";

"Doors & Locks".

“Vehicle off” (where provided)

This is used to switch off the engine in

the event of a Keyless Enter-N-Go

system fault, following the procedure

described on the display.

Display

By selecting item "Display" you can

access the settings/information

regarding: "Language", "See phone",

"See navigation", "Automatic Trip B

reset", "Drive Mode Repeat" (or “Mood

Selector Repeat” depending on the

market) (where provided), "Display

settings".

"Units"

Select item "Units" to choose the unit of

measurement between: "Imperial",

"Metric", "Custom".

"Clock & Date"

Select item "Clock & Date" to make the

following adjustments: "Set time", "Time

format", "Set date".

"Security"

Select item "Security" to make the

following adjustments: "Passenger

AIRBAG", "Speed beep", "Seat belt

buzzer", "Hill Hold Control".

"Passenger AIRBAG" adjustment allows

you to activate/deactivate the

passenger airbag:

Passenger's protection active:

the

ON LED comes on constantly in

the instrument panel dashboard.

Passenger's protection not

active: the

OFF LED comes on

constantly in the instrument panel

dashboard.

"Security & Assistance"

For possible adjustments see

paragraph Uconnect™ in the

dedicated chapter.

"Lights"

Select item "Lights" to make the

following adjustments: "Interior Ambient

lighting", "Headlight sensor", "Follow

me", "Headlights while opening", "Auto

high beams", "Daytime Lights",

"Cornering lights".

"Doors & Locks"

Select item "Doors & Locks" to make

the following adjustments: "Autoclose",

"Aut. unl. on exit", "Flsh.Light w/Lock",

"Horn with Lock", "Horn with remote

start", "Remote unlock", "Door Unlock"

(versions with Keyless Entry), "Keyless

Entry".

NOTE With the Uconnect™ system,

some Menu items are shown and

managed on the display of the latter

and not on the instrument panel display

(refer to the Multimedia chapter or to

the supplement available online).

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

TRIP COMPUTER

The "Trip computer" is used to display

information on vehicle operation when

the ignition device is at MAR.

This function is characterised by two

separate memories, called "Trip A" and

"Trip B", where the vehicle's "complete

missions" (journeys) are recorded in a

reciprocally independent manner.

“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display

the values relating to:

Distance travelled

Average fuel consumption

Average speed

Trip time (driving time)

On LPG versions, the “Range”,

“Average consumption” and

“Instantaneous consumption” values

are available for both petrol and LPG.

To reset the values, press and hold

down the OK fig. 59 button on the

steering wheel.

NOTE "Range" and "Instant

consumption" values cannot be reset.

F1B0184C

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

IMPORTANT The war ning light switches on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal

when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or

alternative to the information contained in the Owner Handbook, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always

refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication.

IMPORTANT Failure indications displayed are divided into two categories: serious and less serious failures. Serious failures are

indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious failures are indicated by a warning "cycle" with a shorter

duration. The display cycle of both categories can be interrupted. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause

of the failure is eliminated.

Warning light What it means

red

INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID / ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE ON

Low brake fluid level

The warning light turns on when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum level,

possibly due to a leak in the circuit. Restore the brake fluid level, then check that the warning light has

switched off. If the warning light stays on, contact a Fiat Dealership.

Electric parking brake on

The warning light switches on when the electric parking brake is engaged. Release the electric parking

brake, then check that the warning light has switched off. If the warning light stays on, contact a Fiat

Dealership.

red

yellow

EBD FAILURE

The simultaneous switching on of the

(red) and (amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates

either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may

suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking sharply.

Drive very carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have the system inspected immediately.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning light What it means

red

ELECTRONIC ALARM

The warning light turns on when the electronic alarm is activated (deterrent function).

red

SEAT BELTS REMINDER

The warning light switches on constantly if the car is stationary and the driver side and/or passenger side

seat belt (with passenger seated) is not fastened. The warning light flashes and an acoustic warning will

sound if the car is in motion and the driver side and/or passenger side seat belt (with passenger seated) is

not correctly fastened. Fasten the seat belt.

red

AIR BAG FAILURE

If the warning light switches on constantly, this indicates a failure in the airbag system.

31) 32)

Warning light What it means

red

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH

The warning light (or the icon on the display on some versions) switches on when the engine is overheated.

In normal driving conditions: stop the car, stop the engine and check that the water level in the reservoir

is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open

the cap, top up with coolant and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir

itself. Also check visually for any fluid leaks. If, when restarting, the warning light switches on (or the icon is

displayed) again, contact a Fiat Dealership.

If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down and,

if the warning light stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes with the engine running and

slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant

level is correct as described above.

IMPORTANT Over demanding routes, it is advisable to keep the engine running and slightly accelerated for

a few minutes before turning it off.

red

POWER STEERING FAILURE

This warning light (or symbol in the display) switches on when the ignition device is brought to MAR, but it

should switch off after a few seconds. If the warning light (or symbol on the display) remains on, you could

not have steering assistance and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be increased;

steering is, however, possible. On some versions the display shows the dedicated message. Contact a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning light What it means

yellow

iTPMS

iTPMS failure

When an iTPMS system failure is detected, the light flashes for 75 seconds, then stays on and a warning

message appears. This also happens if there are one or more wheels without sensors, until initial

conditions are restored.

IMPORTANT Do not continue driving with one or more flat tyres as handling may be compromised. Stop

the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tyre repair kit (see

the “Fix&Go Automatic kit” paragraph in the "In an emergency" chapter) and contact a Fiat Dealership as

soon as possible.

Tyre pressure low

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tyre pressure is lower than

the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tyre duration

and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

In any situation in which the dedicated message is shown on the display, it is ESSENTIAL to refer to the

contents of the "Wheels" paragraph in the "Technical data" chapter, strictly complying with the indications

that you find there.

Once the normal operating conditions of the car are restored, carry out the "Reset" procedure.

WARNING Do not continue driving with one or more flat tyres as the car handling may be compromised.

Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering.

yellow

ABS FAILURE

The warning light switches on to indicate an ABS fault. In this case the braking system maintains its

efficiency unaltered but without the advantage of the ABS system. Drive carefully and contact a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible.

Warning light What it means

yellow

ESC SYSTEM

ESC system activation

Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the warning light: it indicates that the car is in

critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC system failure

If the warning light does not switch off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found on the

ESC system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

Hill Hold Control system failure

The warning light switches on and the displays shows the dedicated message, indicating Hill Hold Control

system failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

yellow

PARTIAL / TOTAL DEACTIVATION OF ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS

The turning on of the warning light indicates that some safety systems have been partially deactivated by a

driver's request.

yellow

REAR FOG LIGHT

The warning light switches on when the rear fog light is activated.

yellow

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE FAILURE

The warning light switches on when electric parking brake failure is detected. Contact a Fiat Dealership as

soon as possible.

33)

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning light What it means

yellow

INJECTION / EOBD SYSTEM FAILURE

In normal conditions, when the ignition device is brought to MAR, the warning light switches on, but it

should switch off as soon as the engine is started. The operation of the warning light may be checked by

the traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws and regulations of the country where you are

driving.

24)

Injection system failure

If the warning light remains on, or it switches on whilst driving, the injection system is not working properly.

The warning light on constantly signals a malfunction in the supply/ignition system which could cause high

exhaust emissions, a possible loss of performance, poor driveability and high consumption. On some

versions the display shows the dedicated message. The war ning light switches off if the malfunction

disappears, but is still stored by the system. Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling at

moderate speed but without demanding excessive effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of

the car with the warning light on may cause damage. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

Catalytic converter damaged

If the warning light flashes, it means that the catalytic converter may be damaged. Release the accelerator

pedal to lower the speed of the engine until the warning light stops flashing. Continue the journey at

moderate speed, trying to avoid driving conditions that may cause further flashing and contact a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible.

Warning light What it means

yellow

LANE ASSIST SYSTEM

The warning light switches on as follows:

Warning light continuously on (white): the system is activated, but the lane limits were not detected (the

lane lines are grey).

Warning light on and flashing (amber): the vehicle has approached the lane line and is about to pass it.

Warning light switched on continuously (green): the system has detected the limits of both lanes. The

system will act on the steering wheel if the lane was passed unintentionally.

yellow

GLOW PLUG PREHEATING (Diesel versions)

This warning light comes on when the ignition device is brought to MAR and will switch off when the glow

plugs have reached the preset temperature. The engine can be started as soon as the warning light

switches off.

IMPORTANT In mild or high temperature conditions, the warning light comes on for a very short time only.

GLOW PLUG PREHEATING FAILURE (Diesel versions)

The warning light will flash to indicate a failure in the glow plug preheating system. In this case, contact a

Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

yellow

FULL BRAKE CONTROL OFF

The warning light comes on when the Full Brake Control system is deactivated by the driver or in the event

of automatic deactivation following a temporary system failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as

possible.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning light What it means

yellow

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE

This warning light or icon on the display turns on when about 5 to 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank.

25)

yellow

LPG FUEL RESERVE

The warning light switches on when the residual quantity of LPG drops below 1/5 of the tank capacity.

green

SIDE LIGHTS AND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS

The warning light switches on when the side lights or dipped headlights are turned on.

This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition device was

placed in STOP position ("Follow me" function).

green

AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

This warning light comes on when the automatic main beam headlights are activated.

green

FOG LIGHTS

The warning light comes on when the front fog lights are turned on.

green

LEFT DIRECTION INDICATOR

The warning light switches on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved downwards or, together

with the right direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

Warning light What it means

green

RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATOR

The warning light switches on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved upwards or, together with

the left direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

green

START&STOP SYSTEM ACTIVATION

The symbol turns on to indicate that the engine has been switched off by the Start&Stop system.

Activation: the symbol turns on when the system is activated; in this case the LED on the button is off.

Deactivation: a dedicated message appears on the display when the Start&Stop system is deactivated; in

this case the LED on the button is on.

green

RUNNING ON PETROL

The warning light turns on when running on petrol.

blue

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

The warning light switches on when the main beam headlights are turned on.

white

BRIGHTNESS SENSOR

This sensor measures the light in the passenger compartment and autonomously adjusts the instrument

panel brightness.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

SYMBOLS ON THE DISPLAY

Symbol What it means

red

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

The symbol switches on, together with a message on the display, if there is insufficient engine oil pressure.

26)

IMPORTANT Do not use the car until the failure has been solved. The switching on of the symbol does not

show the quantity of oil in the engine: the oil level must be checked manually.

red

AIR BAG FAILURE

If the symbol switches on constantly, this indicates a failure in the airbag system. Contact a Fiat Dealership

as soon as possible.

red

BONNET NOT PROPERLY SHUT

The symbol switches on when the engine bonnet is not properly shut. Close the bonnet properly.

red

TAILGATE NOT PROPERLY SHUT

The symbol switches on when the tailgate is not properly shut. Close the tailgate correctly.

red

AT9 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE / DUAL CLUTCH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE

The symbol turns on to indicate that there is a failure in the automatic transmission or in the dual clutch

automatic transmission. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

27)

Symbol What it means

red

ALTERNATOR FAILURE

The switching on of the symbol with engine on corresponds to an alternator failure. Contact a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible.

red

DOOR OPEN

The symbol switches on when one or more doors are not completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated

with the doors open and the car moving. Close the doors properly.

yellow

FULL BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbols switch on (with the displayed message) in the case of failure of the Full Brake Control system.

Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

yellow

LANE ASSIST SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol comes on in the case of permanent Lane Assist system failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as

soon as possible.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What it means

yellow

FIAT CODE SYSTEM FAILURE/BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Fiat CODE system failure

The symbol switches on to indicate a failure of the Fiat CODE system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as

possible.

Break-in attempt

The symbol switches on when the ignition device is moved to MAR position, to indicate a possible break-in

attempt detected by the alarm system.

yellow

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM OPERATION

The symbol switches on in the event of fuel cut-off system intervention.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to the description in the "Fuel cut-off system" section in the "In

an emergency" chapter. If it is still not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact a Fiat Dealership.

yellow

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the event of fuel cut-off system failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as

possible.

yellow

EXCESSIVE AT9 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE / EXCESSIVE DUAL CLUTCH

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE

The symbol switches on in the case of transmission overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this

case an engine performance limitation is carried out. With engine off or at idle speed, wait until the symbol

switches off.

yellow

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol switches on to report a failure of the audio system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as

possible.

yellow

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE

The symbol switches on along with a message on the display in the event of dusk sensor failure. Contact a

Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

Symbol What it means

yellow

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the rain sensor. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as

possible.

yellow

START&STOP SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol switches on to report a failure of the Start&Stop system. The display will show a dedicated

message. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

yellow

KEYLESS GO SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the event of Keyless Go system failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as

possible.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What it means

yellow

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD

The symbol turns on when the outside temperature falls to or below 3°C.

IMPORTANT In the event of outside temperature sensor failure, the digits that indicate the value are

replaced by dashes.

yellow

SPEED LIMITER FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the Speed Limiter device. Contact a Fiat Dealership as

soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

yellow

4x4 ALL-WHEEL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol turns on to indicate that there is a failure in the four-wheel drive system. Contact a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible.

yellow

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE

The symbol switches on to indicate a failure on the following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs); parking

lights; side lights; direction indicators; rear fog light; reversing light; number plate lights; stop lights.

The anomaly may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown protection fuse or an interruption of the electrical

connection.

yellow

AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE

The symbol switches on to report a failure of the automatic main beam headlights. Contact a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible.

Symbol What it means

yellow

WATER IN DIESEL FILTER (Diesel versions)

The symbol switches on constantly while driving (along with a message in the display), to indicate the

presence of water in the diesel filter.

28)

yellow

DPF CLEANING (particulate trap) in progress (diesel versions with DPF only)

The symbol switches on constantly to indicate that the DPF system needs to eliminate the trapped

pollutants (particulate) through the regeneration process.

The symbol does not switch on during every DPF regeneration, but only when driving conditions require

that the driver is notified. To turn off the symbol, keep the vehicle in motion until the regeneration process is

over. On average, the process lasts 15 minutes. Optimal conditions for completing the process are

achieved by travelling at 60 km/h with engine speed above 2000 rpm.

When this symbol switches on, it does not indicate a defect of the car and thus it should not be taken to a

workshop.

29)

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What it means

yellow

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the event of fuel level sensor failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership.

yellow

LPG FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol on the display turns on in the event of an LPG fuel system failure. In this case, all the bars on

the digital indicator will be off.

In the event of a failure, contact a Fiat Dealership.

yellow

ENGINE OIL DETERIORATED

(where provided)

Diesel versions: the symbol turns on and is displayed for 3 minute cycles and intervals of 5 seconds until

the oil is changed.

The symbol is displayed until the problem is solved.

Petrol versions: the symbol switches on and then is not displayed when the display cycle is completed.

IMPORTANT After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue to switch on

as described above until the oil is changed.

If the symbol flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is

now necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle.

The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the car for short drives, preventing the engine from

reaching operating temperature.

Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

30) 31)

yellow

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE

The symbol switches on constantly together with the message in the display in the case of engine oil

pressure sensor failure.

Symbol What it means

yellow

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) FAILURE

(where provided)

The symbol turns on (together with a message on the display) to indicate an Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

system failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership.

yellow

SCHEDULED SERVICING (SERVICE)

The “Service Schedule” includes car maintenance at fixed intervals (refer to the "Maintenance and care"

chapter). When the next scheduled service is approaching, the symbol will be displayed, followed by the

number of kilometres/miles or days (where provided) left, when the ignition device is turned to MAR.

This is displayed automatically, with ignition device at MAR, 2000 km before servicing or, where provided,

30 days before servicing. It is also displayed each time the ignition device is turned to MAR. The display will

be in km or miles depending on the unit of measurement set.

Go to a Fiat Dealership, where the "Scheduled Servicing Plan" operations will be performed and the

message will be reset.

white

This symbol turns on to indicate that the clutch pedal must be pressed to enable starting.

white

This symbol appears to suggest engaging a higher gear (upshifting).

white

The symbol appears to suggest engaging a lower gear (downshifting).

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What it means

white

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED

The (white) symbol switches on when the speed limit (e.g. 110 km/h) set through the menu of the display is

exceeded (the inner value updates according to the set speed).

white

ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL

The symbol switches on if the electronic Cruise Control is activated.

Messages on the display

Message on display

BLIND SPOT ASSIST

BLIND

SPOT ASSIST SYSTEM

Sensor locking: in case of failure of the Blind Spot Assist system sensor, a

message will appear on the display. In this case, the LEDs on the door mirrors are

switched on continuously. Free the bumper of any obstacles or clean it.

System not available: in case the Blind Spot Assist system is not available, a

message will appear on the display. In this case, the LEDs on the door mirrors are

switched on continuously. The failed operation of the system might be due to the

insufficient voltage from the battery or other failures on the electrical system.

Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the electrical system

checked.

Blind Spot Assist system failure: in case of a failure of the Blind Spot Assist

system, a message will appear on the display. In this case, the LEDs on the door

mirrors are switched off. An acoustic signal is also emitted. Contact a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible.

DYNAMIC STEERING TORQUE

DST SYSTEM (Dynamic Steering Torque)

A dedicated message is displayed in the case of a DST system failure. Contact a

Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

PARK ASSIST

ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (where provided)

Temporary parking sensors failure: a dedicated message is displayed in case

of a temporary failure of the parking sensors. If the problem is still present after

cleaning the parking sensor area, contact a Fiat Dealership.

Permanent parking sensors failure: a dedicated message is displayed in case

of a permanent failure of the parking sensors. The failed operation of the system

might be due to the insufficient voltage from the battery or other failures of the

electrical system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

LANE ASSIST

LANE ASSIST SYSTEM

Camera obstructed: a dedicated message is shown on the display in the case

of dirt on the windscreen, which may adversely affect correct operation of the

camera. Clean the windscreen using a soft clean cloth, taking care not to scratch

it. Should the failure persist, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Message on display

START&STOP

ART&STOP SYSTEM ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

Activation: the system activation is signalled by a message on the display. In this

case, the LED on the button is off.

Deactivation: a message will appear on the display when the system is off. In

this case, the LED on the button is on.

WARNING

31) If, when the ignition device is turned to MAR, the warning light does not switch on or stays on whilst driving, a failure may have

occurred in the restraint systems. In this case the airbags or pretensioners may not be deployed in an impact or, in a lower number of cases,

they may be deployed accidentally. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked.

32) The fault of the

warning light is signalled by the switching on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may

not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked.

33) If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.

IMPORTANT

24) If, turning the ignition device to MAR, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some

versions together with the message on the display), contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

25) If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes whilst driving, contact a Fiat Dealership.

26) If the symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership.

27) Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with

hot engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.

28) The presence of water in the fuel system circuit may cause severe damage to the injection system and irregular engine operation. If the

symbol is displayed contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to bleed the system. If the above indications come on immediately after

refuelling, water has probably been poured into the tank: switch the engine off immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership.

29) Vehicle travel speed should always be adapted to the traffic and weather conditions, and must always comply with traffic regulations. The

engine can be stopped even if the DPF warning light is on: however, repeated interruptions of the regeneration process could cause

premature deterioration of the engine oil. For this reason it is always advisable to wait for the symbol to go off before turning off the engine,

following the instructions above. Do not complete the DPF regeneration process when the vehicle is stopped.

30) If the

warning light comes on, the exhausted engine oil should be changed as soon as possible, never drive more than 500 km from

the first switching-on of this warning light. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the warranty.

Remember that when this warning light comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up

the engine oil.

31) If the symbol flashes when driving, contact a Fiat Dealership.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

The chapter that you are about to read

is very important: it describes the safety

systems with which the vehicle is

equipped and provides instructions on

how to use them correctly.

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ......74

DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS . .78

OCCUPANT PROTECTION

SYSTEMS .................87

SEATBELTS................87

SBR (Seat Belt Reminder)

SYSTEM ..................89

PRE-TENSIONERS ............91

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....93

SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS) - AIRBAG .......106

ACTIVE SAFETY

SYSTEMS

The vehicle has the following active

safety systems:

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System);

DTC (Drag Torque Control);

ESC (Electronic Stability Control);

TC (Traction Control);

PBA (Panic Brake Assist);

HHC (Hill Hold Control);

DST (Dynamic Steering Torque);

ERM (Electronic Rollover Mitigation);

TSC (Trailer Sway Control).

For the operation of the systems, see

the following description.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking

System)

This system, which is an integral part of

the braking system, prevents one or

more wheels from locking and slipping

in all road surface conditions,

irrespective of the intensity of the

braking action, ensuring that the vehicle

can be controlled even during

emergency braking and optimising

stopping distances.

The system intervenes during braking

when the wheels are about to lock,

typically in emergency braking or

low-grip conditions, when locking may

be more frequent.

The system also improves control and

stability of the vehicle when braking on

a surface where the grip of the left and

right wheels varies, or on corners.

The Electronic Braking Force

Distribution (EBD) system completes

the system allowing the brake force to

be distributed between the front and

rear wheels.

System intervention

The driver can feel that the ABS system

has come into action because the

brake pedal pulsates slightly and the

system gets noisier: this is entirely

normal with the system operating.

34) 35) 36) 37) 38) 39) 40)

DTC (Drag Torque

Control) SYSTEM

The DTC (Drag Torque Control) system

prevents the drive wheels from possibly

locking, which could happen, for

example, if the accelerator pedal is

released suddenly or in the case of a

sudden downshifting in conditions of

poor grip. In this conditions, the engine

braking effect could cause the drive

wheels to slip, resulting in a loss of car

stability. In these situations, the DTC

system intervenes, restoring torque to

the engine in order to conserve car

stability and increase car safety.

ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) SYSTEM

The ESC system improves the

directional control and stability of the

vehicle in various driving conditions.

The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s

understeer and oversteer, distributing

the brake force on the wheels

appropriately. The torque supplied by

the engine can also be reduced in order

to maintain control of the vehicle.

The ESC system uses sensors installed

on the vehicle to determine the

trajectory that the driver intends to

follow and compares it with the

vehicle’s effective trajectory. When the

real trajectory deviates from the desired

trajectory, the ESC system intervenes to

counter the vehicle’s understeer or

oversteer.

Oversteer: occurs when the vehicle is

turning more than it should according

to the angle of the steering wheel.

Understeer: occurs when the vehicle

is turning less than it should according

to the angle of the steering wheel.

SAFETY

System intervention

The intervention of the system is

indicated by the flashing of the

warning light on the instrument

panel, to inform the driver that the

vehicle is in critical stability and grip

conditions.

41) 42) 43) 44) 45)

TC (Traction Control)

SYSTEM

The system automatically operates in

the event of slipping, loss of grip on wet

roads (aquaplaning) and acceleration on

slippery, snowy or icy roads, etc. on

one or more drive wheels. Depending

on the slipping conditions, two different

control systems are activated:

if the slipping involves both drive

wheels, the system intervenes, reducing

the power transmitted by the engine;

if the slipping only involves one of the

drive wheels, the BLD (Brake Limited

Differential) function is activated,

automatically braking the wheel which

is slipping (the behaviour of a

self-locking differential is simulated).

This will increase the engine torque

transferred to the wheel which isn't

slipping. This function remains active

even if the "Systems partially disabled"

and "Systems disabled" modes are

selected (see description in the

following pages).

System intervention

The intervention of the system is

indicated by the flashing of the

warning light on the instrument

panel, to inform the driver that the

vehicle is in critical stability and grip

conditions.

46) 47) 48) 49) 50)

PBA (Panic Brake

Assist) SYSTEM

The PBA system is designed to improve

the vehicle’s braking capacity during

emergency braking.

The system detects emergency braking

by monitoring the speed and force with

which the brake pedal is pressed, and

consequently applies the optimal brake

pressure. This can reduce the braking

distance: the PBA system therefore

completes the ABS.

Maximum assistance from the PBA

system is obtained by pressing the

brake pedal very quickly. In addition, the

brake pedal should be pressed

continuously during braking, avoiding

intermittent presses, to get the most

out of the system. Do not reduce

pressure on the brake pedal until

braking is not necessary anymore.

The PBA system is deactivated when

the brake pedal is released.

51) 52) 53)

HHC (Hill Hold Control)

SYSTEM

This is an integral part of the ESC

system and facilitates starting on

slopes, activating automatically in the

following cases:

uphill: vehicle stationary on a road

with a gradient higher than 5%, engine

running, brake pressed and

transmission in neutral or gear other

than reverse engaged;

downhill: vehicle stationary on a road

with a gradient higher than 5%, engine

running, brake pressed and reverse

gear engaged.

When setting off, the ESC system

control unit maintains the braking

pressure on the wheels until the engine

torque necessary for starting is

reached, or in any case for a maximum

of 2 seconds, allowing your right foot to

be moved easily from the brake pedal

to the accelerator.

When two seconds have elapsed,

without starting, the system is

automatically deactivated, gradually

releasing the braking pressure. During

this release stage it is possible to hear a

typical mechanical brake release noise,

indicating the imminent movement of

the vehicle.

54) 55)

DST SYSTEM (Dynamic

Steering Torque)

The DST function uses the integration

of the ESC system with the electric

power steering to increase the safety

level of the whole vehicle.

In critical situations (braking on surfaces

with different grip conditions), through

the DST function the ESC system

controls the steering to implement an

additional torque contribution on the

steering wheel, to suggest the most

correct manoeuvre to the driver.

The coordinated action of the brakes

and steering increases the sensation of

safety and control of the vehicle.

56)

ERM (Electronic Rollover

Mitigation) SYSTEM

The system monitors the tendency of

the wheels to rise from the ground if the

driver performs extreme manoeuvres

like quick steering to avoid an obstacle,

especially in poor road conditions.

If these conditions occur, the system

intervenes on the brakes and engine

power to reduce the possibility that the

wheels are raised from the ground. It is

not possible to avoid tendency to roll

over if the phenomenon is due to

reasons such as driving on high side

gradients, collision with objects or other

vehicles.

57)

TSC (Trailer Sway

Control) SYSTEM

The system employs a series of sensors

located on the vehicle to identify

excessive swerving of the trailer and

take the necessary precautions to

eliminate it.

To counteract the effect of trailer sway,

the system can reduce the engine

power and intervene on the wheels

involved. The TSC system activates

automatically once excessive sway of

the trailer is detected.

System intervention

When the system is active, the

warning light flashes on the

instrument panel, the engine power is

reduced and braking can be felt on the

individual wheels, following the attempt

to eliminate the swerving of the trailer.

58) 59)

WARNING

34) When the ABS intervenes and you feel

the brake pedal pulsating, do not reduce

the pressure, but hold it down firmly and

confidently; in doing so you will brake in the

shortest distance possible, depending on

the current road conditions.

35) To obtain the maximum efficiency of

the braking system, a bedding-in period of

about 500 km is needed: during this period

it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and

prolonged braking.

36) If the ABS intervenes, this indicates

that the grip of the tyres on the road is

nearing its limit: you must slow down to a

speed compatible with the available grip.

37) The ABS cannot overrule the natural

laws of physics, and cannot increase the

grip available according to the condition of

the road.

38) The ABS cannot prevent accidents,

including those due to excessive speed on

corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or

aquaplaning.

SAFETY

39) The capability of the ABS must never

be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in

such a way as to compromise personal

safety and the safety of others.

40) For the correct operation of the ABS,

the tyres must of necessity be the same

make and type on all wheels, in perfect

condition and, above all, of the prescribed

type and dimensions.

41) The ESC system cannot alter the

natural laws of physics, and cannot

increase grip, which depends on the

condition of the road.

42) The ESC system cannot prevent

accidents, including those due to excessive

speed on corners, driving on low-grip

surfaces or aquaplaning.

43) The capability of the ESC system must

never be tested irresponsibly and

dangerously, in such a way as to

compromise personal safety and the safety

of others.

44) For the correct operation of the ESC

system, the tyres must necessarily be of

the same make and type on all wheels, in

perfect condition and, above all, of the

prescribed type and size.

45) ESC performance features must not

induce the driver to take unnecessary or

unwarranted risks. Your driving style must

always be suited to the road conditions,

visibility and traffic. The driver is, in any

case, responsible for safe driving.

46) For the correct operation of the TC

system, the tyres must of necessity be the

same make and type on all wheels, in

perfect condition and, above all, of the

prescribed type and dimensions.

47) TC performance features must not

induce the driver to take unnecessary or

unwarranted risks. Your driving style must

always be suited to the road conditions,

visibility and traffic. The driver is, in any

case, responsible for safe driving.

48) The TC system cannot overrule the

natural laws of physics, and cannot

increase the grip available according to the

condition of the road.

49) The TC system cannot prevent

accidents, including those due to excessive

speed on corners, driving on low-grip

surfaces or aquaplaning.

50) The capability of the TC must never be

tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in

such a way as to compromise personal

safety and the safety of others.

51) The PBA system cannot overrule the

natural laws of physics, and cannot

increase the grip available according to the

condition of the road.

52) The PBA system cannot prevent

accidents, including those due to excessive

speed on corners, driving on low-grip

surfaces or aquaplaning.

53) The capability of the PBA system must

never be tested irresponsibly and

dangerously, in such a way as to

compromise the safety of the driver, the

other occupants of the vehicle or any other

road user.

54) The Hill Hold Control system is not a

parking brake; therefore, never leave the

vehicle without having engaged the electric

parking brake, turned the engine off and

engaged first gear, so that it is parked in

safe conditions (for further information read

the "Parking" paragraph in the "Starting

and driving" chapter).

55) There may be situations on small

gradients (less than 8%), with vehicle

laden, in which the Hill Hold Control system

may not activate, causing a slight reversing

motion and increasing the risk of collision

with another vehicle or object. The driver is,

in any case, responsible for safe driving.

56) DST is an aid for driving and does not

relieve the driver of responsibility for driving

the vehicle.

57) The performance of a vehicle with ERM

must never be tested in imprudent or

dangerous ways, with the possibility of

putting the safety of the driver or other

people at risk.

58) When towing trailers, the utmost

caution at the wheel is recommended.

Never exceed the maximum permitted

loads (see the description in the "Weights"

paragraph in the "Technical Specifications"

chapter).

59) The TSC system cannot prevent

swerving for all trailers. If the system

activates during driving, reduce the speed,

stop the vehicle in a safe place and arrange

the load correctly to prevent the trailer from

swerving.

DRIVING

ASSISTANCE

SYSTEMS

The vehicle can feature the following

driving assistance systems:

BSA (Blind Spot Assist);

FBC (Full Brake Control);

iTPMS (indirect Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System).

For the operation of the systems, see

the following pages.

BSA (Blind-Spot Assist)

SYSTEM

The car can be equipped with the BSA

(Blind Spot Assist) system for blind spot

monitoring. The BSA system uses two

radar sensors, located in the rear

bumper (one for each side - see

fig. 60 ), to detect the presence of cars

(cars, trucks, motorbikes, etc.) in the

rear side blind spots of the car.

The system warns the driver about the

presence of cars in the detection area

by lighting up, on the relevant side, the

warning light located on the door mirror

fig. 61, along with an acoustic warning.

As soon as the ignition key is in MAR

position, or when the engine is started

(keyless version), the warning light turns

on to signal the driver that the system is

active.

Sensors

The sensors are activated when any

forward gear is engaged at a speed

higher than about 10 km/h, or when

reverse is engaged.

The sensors are temporarily deactivated

with car at a standstill and the gear

lever in position P (Park) (versions with

automatic transmission), or with car at a

standstill and electric parking brake

engaged (versions with manual

transmission).

The detection area of the system

covers about a lane on both sides of

the vehicle (around 3 metres).

This area starts from the door mirror

and extends for about 6 metres

towards the rear part of the car.

When the sensors are active the system

monitors the detection areas on both

sides of the car and warns the driver

about the possible presence of cars in

these areas.

While driving the system monitors the

detection area from three different input

points (side, rear and front) to check

whether a warning needs to be sent to

the driver. The system can detect the

presence of a vehicle in one of these

three areas.

F1B0093C

F1B0094C

SAFETY

IMPORTANT The system does not

signal the presence of fixed object (e.g.

safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.).

However, in some circumstances, the

system may activate in the presence of

these objects. This is normal and does

not indicate a system malfunction.

IMPORTANT The system does not

warn the driver about the presence of

vehicles coming from the opposite

direction, in the adjacent lanes.

60)

Important notes

If a trailer is connected to the car, to

avoid false indications this system must

be manually deactivated using the

relative menu.

For the system to operate correctly, the

rear bumper area where the radar

sensors are located must stay free from

snow, ice and dirt gathered from the

road surface.

Do not cover the rear bumper area

where the radar sensors are located

with any object (e.g. adhesives, bike

rack, etc.).

Rear-view

The system detects vehicles coming

from the rear part of your vehicle on

both sides and entering the rear

detection area with a difference in

speed of less than 50 km/h with

respect to your vehicle.

Overtaking vehicles

If another vehicle is overtaken slowly

(with a difference in speed of less than

about 25 km/h) and this stays in the

blind spot for about 1.5 seconds, the

warning light on the door mirror of the

corresponding side lights up.

If the speed delta between the two

vehicles is higher than about 25 km/h,

the warning light does not light up.

RCP (Rear Cross Path detection)

system

This system helps the driver during

reverse manoeuvres in the case of

reduced visibility.

The RCP system monitors the rear

detection areas on both sides of the

vehicle, to detect objects moving

towards the sides of the vehicle at a

minimum speed between about 1 km/h

and 3 km/h and objects moving at a

maximum speed of 35 km/h, as

generally happens in parking areas.

The system activation is signalled to the

driver by means of a visual and acoustic

warning.

IMPORTANT If the sensors are covered

by objects or vehicles, the system will

not warn the driver.

Operating mode

The system can be activated/

deactivated by operating on the display

Menu, or via the Uconnect™ system

(for further information see the

dedicated Supplement).

Blind Spot Assist "Visual" mode

When this mode is active, the BSA

system sends a visual warning to the

door mirror relating to the object

detected.

However, when operating in "RCP"

mode, the system produces acoustic

and visual warnings when if the

presence of an object is detected.

When an acoustic warning is sent,

theUconnect™ volume is lowered.

Blind Spot Assist "Visual &

acoustic" mode

When this mode has been activated,

the BSA system sends a visual warning

to the door mirror relating to the object

detected.

If the direction indicator on the side

where an obstacle has been detected is

activated, an acoustic warning is

emitted as well.

If a direction indicator is in operation

and an object is simultaneously

detected on the same side, both an

acoustic and a visual warning are

emitted. TheUconnect™ volume is

also lowered.

During "RCP" operating mode, the

system emits acoustic and visual

indications if the presence of an object

is detected. When an acoustic warning

is sent, theUconnect™ volume is also

lowered.

Deactivating the Blind Spot Assist

function

When the system is deactivated ("Blind

spot alert" mode at "OFF"), the BSA or

RCP systems will not emit either

acoustic nor visual warnings.

The BSA system will store the operating

mode running when the engine was

stopped. Each time the engine is

started, the operating mode stored

previously will be recalled and used.

IMPORTANT The system is an aid for

car driving, it DOES NOT warn the

driver about incoming cars outside of

the detection areas. The driver must

always maintain a sufficient level of

attention to the traffic and road

conditions and for controlling the

trajectory of the car.

FULL BRAKE CONTROL

SYSTEM

61) 62) 63) 64)

32) 33) 34) 35) 36) 37) 38) 39) 40)

The vehicle can be equipped with the

"Full Brake Control" system. This is a

driving assistance system which

comprises a radar located behind the

front bumper fig. 62 and a camera

located in the central part of the

windscreen fig. 63.

In the event of an imminent collision the

system intervenes by automatically

braking the vehicle to prevent the crash

or reduce its effects.

The system provides the driver with

acoustic and visual signals through

specific messages on the instrument

panel display.

The system may lightly brake to warn

the driver if a possible frontal accident is

detected (limited braking). Signals and

limited braking are intended to allow the

driver to react promptly, in order to

prevent or reduce the effects of a

potential accident.

In situations with the risk of collision, if

the system detects no intervention by

the driver, it provides automatic braking

to help slow the vehicle and mitigate

the potential frontal collision (automatic

braking).

F1B0095C

F1B0096C

SAFETY

If intervention by the driver on the brake

pedal is detected but not deemed

sufficient, the system may intervene in

order to improve the reaction of the

braking system, therefore reducing

vehicle speed further (additional

assistance in braking stage).

Versions equipped with Start&Stop

system: at the end of the automatic

braking, the Start&Stop system will

activate as described in paragraph

"Start&Stop system" of the "Starting

and driving" chapter.

Versions with manual gearbox:at

the end of the automatic braking the

engine may stall and turn off, unless the

driver presses the clutch pedal.

Versions with automatic

transmission / twin clutch

automatic transmission: at the end

of the braking, the latest stored gear is

engaged: the vehicle may therefore

restart after a few seconds from the

automatic stop.

IMPORTANT Both on versions

equipped with manual gearbox and on

those with automatic transmission, after

the vehicle is stopped the brake

callipers may be stuck for about

2 seconds for safety reasons. Make

sure you press the brake pedal if the

vehicle moves slightly forwards.

Activation/deactivation

The Full Brake Control system can be

deactivated (and then reactivated) via

the Uconnect™ system (see the

description in the dedicated

supplement).

The system can be deactivated even

with the ignition device at MAR.

IMPORTANT The system status can be

changed with vehicle at a standstill only.

The Full Brake Control system can be

set to three activation levels through the

Uconnect™ system:

System active: the system (if active),

in addition to the visual and acoustic

warnings, provides limited braking,

automatic braking and additional

assistance in braking stage, where the

driver does not brake sufficiently in the

event of a potential frontal impact;

System partially active: the system (if

active) does not provide limited braking,

but guarantees automatic braking or

additional assistance in braking stage,

where the driver does not brake at all or

not sufficiently in the event of a potential

frontal impact. The visual and acoustic

warnings are deactivated, and will not

be provided;

System deactivated: the system

does not provide visual and acoustic

warnings, limited braking, automatic

braking or additional assistance in

braking stage. The system will therefore

provide no indication of a possible

accident.

Activation/deactivation

If the Full Brake Control system has

been correctly activated with the

Uconnect™ system, this will be active

each time the engine is started.

Following a deactivation, the system will

not warn the driver about the possible

collision with the preceding vehicle,

regardless of the setting selected with

the Uconnect™ system.

The system deactivation status will not

be stored when the engine is switched

off: if the system is deactivated when

the engine is switched off, it will be

active when it is next started.

This function is not active at a speed

lower than 7 km/h or higher than

200 km/h.

The system is only active if:

it is correctly activated via the

Uconnect™ system;

the ignition device is at MAR;

the vehicle speed is between 7 and

200 km/h;

the front seat belts are fastened.

Changing the system sensitivity

The sensitivity of the system can be

changed through the Uconnect™

system menu, choosing from one of the

following three options: "Near", "Med"

or "Far". See the description in the

Uconnect™ supplement for how to

change the settings.

The pre-set option is "Med". With this

setting, the system warns the driver of a

possible collision with the vehicle in

front when that vehicle is at a standard

distance, between that of the other two

settings.

With the system sensitivity set to "Far",

the system will warn the driver of a

possible collision with the vehicle in

front when that vehicle is at a greater

distance, thus providing the possibility

of acting on the brakes more lightly and

gradually. This setting provides the

drivers with the maximum possible

reaction time to prevent a potential

accident.

With the option set to "Near", the

system will warn the driver of a possible

collision with the vehicle in front when

that vehicle is close. This setting offers

the driver a lower reaction time

compared to the "Med" and "Far"

settings, in the event of a potential

collision, but permits more dynamic

driving of the vehicle.

The system sensitivity setting is kept in

the memory when the engine is

switched off.

System limited operation signal

If the dedicated message is displayed,

a condition limiting the system

operation may have occurred. The

possible reasons of this limitation are

something blocking the camera view or

a fault.

If an obstruction is signalled, clean the

area of the windscreen indicated in

fig. 63 and check that the message has

disappeared.

Although the vehicle can still be driven

in normal conditions, the system may

be not completely available.

When the conditions limiting the system

functions end, this will go back to

normal and complete operation. Should

the fault persist, contact a Fiat

Dealership.

System failure signalling

If the system switches off and a

dedicated message is shown on the

display, it means that there is a fault on

the system.

In this case, it is still possible to drive

the vehicle, but you are advised to

contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as

possible.

Radar indication not available

If conditions are such that the radar

cannot detect obstacles correctly, the

system is deactivated and a dedicated

message will be shown on the display.

This generally occurs in the event of

poor visibility, such as when it is

snowing or raining heavily.

The system can also be temporarily

dimmed due to obstructions such as

mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In such

cases, a dedicated message will be

shown on the display and the system

will be deactivated. This message can

sometimes appear in conditions of high

reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective

tiles or ice or snow). When the

conditions limiting the system

functioning end, it will go back to a

normal and complete operation.

In certain particular cases, this

dedicated message could be displayed

when the radar is not detecting any

vehicle or object within its view range.

If atmospheric conditions are not the

real reason behind this message, check

if the sensor is dirty. It could be

necessary to clean or remove any

obstructions in the area illustrated in

fig. 62.

SAFETY

If the message appears often, even in

the absence of atmospheric conditions

such as snow, rain, mud or other

obstructions, contact a Fiat Dealership

for a sensor alignment check.

In the absence of visible obstructions,

cleaning the radar surface, by manually

removing the decorative cover trim,

could be required. Have this operation

performed at a Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT It is recommended that

you do not install devices, accessories

or aerodynamic attachments in front of

the sensor or darken it in any way, as

this can compromise the correct

functioning of the system.

Frontal collision alarm with active

braking

(where provided)

If this function is selected, the brakes

are operated to reduce the speed of the

vehicle in the event of potential frontal

impact

This function applies an additional

braking pressure if the braking pressure

applied by the driver does not suffice to

prevent potential frontal impact.

The function is active with speed above

7 km/h.

Driving in special conditions

In certain driving conditions, such as,

for example:

driving close to a bend;

vehicles with small dimensions

and/or not aligned in the driving lane;

lane change by other vehicles;

vehicles travelling at right angles to

the vehicle.

system intervention might be

unexpected or delayed. The driver must

therefore be very careful, keeping

control of the vehicle to drive in

complete safety.

IMPORTANT In particularly complex

traffic conditions, the driver can

deactivate the system through the

Uconnect™ system.

Driving close to a bend

When tackling a wide bend, the system

may detect the presence of a vehicle in

front you, but not running on the same

driving lane fig. 64. In cases such as

these, the system may intervene.

Vehicles with small dimensions

and/or not aligned in the driving

lane

The system cannot detect vehicles in

front of you but outside the range of the

radar sensor and may therefore not

react in the presence of small vehicles,

such as bicycles or motorcycles fig. 65.

F1B0097C

F1B0098C

Lane change by other vehicles

Vehicles suddenly changing lane,

entering the driving lane of the vehicle

fig. 66 and inside the radar sensor

operating range, may cause system

activation.

Vehicles travelling at right angles to

the vehicle

The system may temporarily react to a

vehicle that is passing through the radar

sensor’s operating range at right angles

fig. 67.

Important

The system has not been designed

to prevent impacts and cannot detect

possible conditions leading to an

accident in advance. Failure to take into

account this warning may lead to

serious or fatal injuries.

The system may activate, assessing

the trajectory of the vehicle, due to the

presence of reflective metal objects

different from other vehicles, such as

safety barriers, road signs, barriers

before parking lots, tollgates, level

crossings, gates, railways, objects near

road constructions sites or higher than

the vehicle (e.g. a flyover). In the same

way, the system may intervene inside

multi-storey car parks or tunnels, or due

to a glare on the road surface. These

possible activations follow the normal

operating logic of the system and must

not be regarded as faults.

The system has been designed for

road use only. If the vehicle is driven

off-road, the system must be

deactivated, to avoid unnecessary

warnings. Automatic deactivation is

signalled by the dedicated warning

light/icon switching on in the instrument

panel (see the instructions in the

"Warning lights and messages"

paragraph, "Knowing the instrument

panel" chapter).

TPMS (Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System)

65) 66) 67) 68) 69) 70)

Description

The car can be equipped with the

iTPMS (indirect Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System) which monitors the

tyre inflation status thanks to wheel

speed sensors.

Correct tyre pressure

If no under-inflated tyres are detected,

the outline of the car will be shown on

the display.

Low tyre pressure

The system warns the driver if one or

more tyres are flat by switching on the

warning light on the instrument

panel and a warning message on the

display, along with an acoustic signal.

F1B0099C

F1B0100C

SAFETY

This warning is displayed also when

turning the engine off and on again until

the RESET procedure is carried out.

Reset procedure

The iTPMS needs an initial

"self-learning" phase (with length

depending on the driving style and road

conditions: optimal conditions being

driving on a straight road at 80 km/h for

at least 20 minutes) which starts when

the RESET procedure is carried out

manually.

The RESET procedure must be carried

out:

whenever the tyre pressure is

modified;

when even only one tyre is changed;

when tyres are rotated/inverted;

when the space-saver wheel is fitted.

Before carrying out the RESET

procedure, inflate the tyres to the rated

pressure values specified in the inflation

pressure table (see "Wheels" paragraph

in the "Technical specifications"

chapter).

If the RESET procedure is not carried

out, in all above cases, the

warning

light may give false indications on one

or more tyres.

To carry out the RESET procedure, with

the car stopped and the ignition device

at MAR, use the Main Menu as follows:

go to "Vehicle info" and then to

"Reset tyre pressure";

press the "OK" and hold down (more

than 2 seconds);

the display will show the procedure

progress (with a graphic bar) till the

RESET is completed.

At the end of the RESET procedure the

display will show the "Reset saved"

message, indicating that the

self-learning has been started and you

will hear a beep. If the self-learning

procedure of the iTPMS system has not

been carried out correctly, you will not

hear any acoustic warning.

Operating conditions

The system is active for speeds above

15 km/h.

In a few situations such as sporty

driving, particular conditions of the road

surface (e.g. icy, snowy, unsurfaced

roads) the signalling may be delayed or

partial in detecting the contemporary

deflation of more than one tyre.

Under special conditions (e.g. car

loaded asymmetrically on one side,

damaged or worn tyre, fitting the

space-saver spare wheel, use of the

"Fix&Go Automatic" tyre repair kit, fitting

snow chains, fitting different tyres on

the axles) the system may provide false

indications or be temporarily

deactivated.

If the system is temporarily deactivated

the

warning light flashes for about

75 seconds and then is continuously

on; at the same time, the display shows

a warning message and the symbols "–

–" will appear next to the shape of the

car next to each tyre.

This warning is displayed also after the

engine has been switched off and then

on again if the correct operating

conditions are not restored.

In the case of abnormal signals, it is

recommended to perform the RESET

procedure. If the indications appear

again after a successful RESET, check

that the tyres used on all four wheels

are the same and that the tyres are not

damaged. As soon as possible, refit the

standard tyre instead of the

space-saver spare, remove the snow

chains (if possible), check correct load

distribution and repeat the RESET

procedure by driving on a clean,

tarmacked road. If the indications

persist, contact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

60) The system is an aid for vehicle driving,

it DOES NOT warn the driver about

incoming vehicles outside of the detection

areas. The driver must always maintain a

sufficient level of attention to the traffic and

road conditions and for controlling the

trajectory of the vehicle.

61) The system is an aid for the driver, who

must always pay full attention while driving.

The responsibility always rests with the

driver, who must take into account the

traffic conditions in order to drive in

complete safety. The driver must always

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in

front.

62) If the driver depresses the brake pedal

fully or carries out a fast steering during

system operation, the automatic braking

function may stop (e.g. to allow a possible

manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle).

63) The system intervenes on vehicles

travelling in the same lane. People, animals

and things (e.g. pushchairs) are not taken

into consideration.

64) If the car must be placed on a roller

bench for maintenance interventions or if it

is washed in an automatic roller washing

tunnel with an obstacle in the front part

(e.g. another car, a wall or another

obstacle), the system may detect its

presence and activate. In this case the

system must be deactivated through the

settings of the Uconnect™system.

65) If the iTPMS system signals a pressure

decrease on the tyres, it is recommended

to check the pressure on all four tyres.

66) The iTPMS does not relieve the driver

from the obligation to check the tyre

pressure every month; it is not even to be

considered a replacing system for

maintenance or a safety system.

67) Tyre pressure must be checked with

tyres cold. Should it become necessary for

whatever reason to check pressure with

warm tyres, do not reduce pressure even

though it is higher than the prescribed

value, but repeat the check when tyres are

cold

68) The iTPMS cannot indicate sudden tyre

pressure drops (e.g. if a tyre bursts). In this

case, stop the vehicle, braking with caution

and avoiding abrupt steering.

69) The system only warns that the tyre

pressure is low: it is not able to inflate

them.

70) Insufficient tyre inflation increases fuel

consumption, reduces the tread duration

and may affect the capacity to drive safely.

IMPORTANT

32) The system may have limited or absent

operation due to weather conditions such

as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow.

33) The section of the bumper before the

sensor must not be covered with

adhesives, auxiliary headlights or any other

object.

34) System intervention might be

unexpected or delayed when other vehicles

transport loads projecting from the side,

above or from the rear, with respect to the

normal size of the vehicle.

35) Operation can be adversely affected by

any structural change made to the vehicle,

such as a modification to the front

geometry, tyre change, or a heavier load

than the standard load of the vehicle.

36) Incorrect repairs made on the front part

of the vehicle (e.g. bumper, chassis) may

alter the position of the radar sensor, and

adversely affect its operation. Go to a Fiat

Dealership for any operation of this type.

37) Do not tamper with nor carry out any

intervention on the radar sensor or on the

camera on the windscreen. In the event of

a sensor failure, contact a Fiat Dealership.

38) When towing a trailer (with modules

installed after purchasing the vehicle), a

vehicle or during loading manoeuvres on a

vehicle transporter (or in vehicle for

transport), the system must be deactivated

via the Uconnect™system.

39) Do not wash with high-pressure jets in

the bumper lower area: in particular do not

operate on the system's electrical

connector.

40) Be careful in the case of repairs and

new paintings in the area around the

sensor (panel covering the sensor on the

left side of the bumper). In the event of a

frontal impact the sensor may automatically

deactivate and display a warning to indicate

that the sensor needs to be repaired. Even

without a malfunction warning, deactivate

the system operation if you think that the

position of the radar sensor has changed

(e.g. due to low-speed frontal impact as

during parking manoeuvres). In these

cases, go to a Fiat Dealership to have the

radar sensor realigned or replaced.

SAFETY

OCCUPANT

PROTECTION

SYSTEMS

The most important safety equipment

of the vehicle comprises the following

protection systems:

seat belts;

SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system;

head restraints;

child restraint systems;

front airbags and side bags.

Read the information given the following

pages with the utmost care. It is of

fundamental importance that the

protection systems are used in the

correct way to guarantee the maximum

possible safety level for the driver and

the passengers.

For the description of the head restraint

adjustment see paragraph "Head

restraints" in chapter "Knowing your

vehicle".

SEAT BELTS

All vehicle seats are equipped with seat

belts with three anchor points and a

retractor.

The retractor mechanism operates

locking the belt in the event of sharp

braking or strong deceleration due to

an impact. This allows the belt strap to

slide freely and to adapt to the body of

the occupant. In the event of an

accident, the belt will lock reducing the

risk of impact inside the passenger

compartment and of being projected

outside the vehicle.

The driver is responsible for respecting,

and ensuring that all the other

occupants of the vehicle also respect,

the local laws in force in relation to the

use of the seat belts.

Always fasten the seat belts before

setting off.

USING THE SEAT BELTS

The seat belt should be worn keeping

the torso straight and rested against the

backrest.

To fasten the seat belts, hold tongue A

fig. 68 and insert it into buckle B, until it

clicks into place.

On removal of the belt, if it jams, let it

rewind for a short stretch, then pull it

out again without jerking.

To unfasten the seat belts, press button

C fig. 68 and guide the seat belt with

your hand while it is rewinding, to

prevent it from twisting.

71) 72)

The retractor may lock when the vehicle

is parked on a steep slope: this is

perfectly normal. Furthermore, the

retractor mechanism locks the belt if it

is pulled sharply or in the event of

sudden braking, collisions or

high-speed bends.

Once seated, wear the rear seat belts

as shown in fig. 69.

F1B0101C

IMPORTANT When returning the rear

seat from the tilted position to the

normal operating position, take care to

refit the seat belt correctly, in order to

guarantee prompt availability every

time.

ADJUSTING THE SEAT

BELT HEIGHT

73) 74)

Five different adjustments in height are

possible.

To carry out window height adjustment,

from the top to the bottom, buttons A

fig. 70 (located on both sides of handle

B) must be pressed simultaneously

(towards each other), and the handle

must be slid downwards.

To carry out window height adjustment,

from the top to the bottom, handle B

must be slid (without pressing

anything).

Always adjust the height of the seat

belts to fit the person wearing it: this

precaution could greatly reduce the risk

of injury in the event of collision.

Correct adjustment is obtained when

the belt passes approximately half way

between the shoulder and the neck.

WARNING

71) Never press button C when travelling.

72) Remember that, in the event of an

accident, the rear seat passengers not

wearing seat belts are exposed to a very

serious risk and also represent a serious

danger for the front seat occupants.

73) Make height adjustment of the seat

belts when the car is stationary.

74) After the height adjustment, always

check that the grip is locked in one of the

preset positions. To do this, with button A

released, exert further pressure

downwards to allow the locking device to

click if the grip has not been released in

one of the possible positions.

F1B0382C

F1B0103C

SAFETY

SBR (Seat Belt

Reminder) SYSTEM

The SBR system warns the passengers

of the front and rear (where provided)

seats if their seat belt is not fastened.

The system signals unfastened seat

belts with visual warnings (warning light

on in the instrument panel and symbols

on the display) and an acoustic signal

(see the following paragraphs).

NOTE To deactivate the acoustic

warning permanently go to a Fiat

Dealership. The acoustic warning can

be reactivated at any time through the

display Menu (see the "Display"

paragraph in the “Knowing the

instrument panel” chapter).

FRONT SEAT BELT

WARNING LIGHT

BEHAVIOUR

When the ignition device is turned to

MAR, warning light

(see fig. 71 )

lights up for a few seconds, regardless

of the status of the front seat belts.

With vehicle at a standstill, if the driver

side seat belt or the passenger side

seat belt (with occupant present) is

unfastened, the warning light stays on

constantly.

As soon as the threshold of 8 km/h is

exceeded for a few seconds with driver

or passenger side (with passenger

present) seat belts unfastened, an

acoustic warning is activated together

with the flashing of the

warning light

for approximately 105 seconds.

When this cycle of warnings is activated

it will stay on for its entire length

(regardless of the vehicle speed) or until

the seat belts are fastened again.

When the reverse is engaged, during

the cycle of warnings, the acoustic

signal is deactivated and the

warning light turns on constantly.

The cycle of warnings will be

reactivated as soon as speed exceeds

8 km/h again.

REAR SEAT BELT ICON

BEHAVIOUR

The icons are shown on the display

(fig. 72 versions with colour display or

fig. 73 versions with monochromatic

display) after a few seconds have

elapsed since the ignition device is

turned to MAR.

The icons will disappear after

approximately 30 seconds or after the

seat belts are fastened.

F1B0104C

F1B0105C

The icons on the display represent the

following (as applicable):

A: rear left seat belt fastened;

B: rear central seat belt fastened;

C: rear right seat belt unfastened.

The icons are displayed according to

the corresponding seat belts in the rear

seats, and stay on for about

30 seconds from the last seat belt

status change:

if the seat belt is fastened the

corresponding icon will appear as

shown in A and B (green on the colour

display);

if the seat belt is unfastened the

corresponding icon will appear as

shown in C (red on the colour display);

If a rear seat belt is unfastened, an

acoustic warning (3 "beeps") will be

activated along with the relevant icon

lighting up in the display.

Furthermore the icons will light up again

for 30 seconds each time one of the

doors is closed.

The icon will turn green after the

corresponding seat belt has been

fastened.

The rear seat icons will go out,

regardless of the state of the belt (red

icon or green icon), approximately

30 seconds after the last warning.

IMPORTANT NOTES

As far as the rear seats are concerned,

the SBR system will only indicate

whether the seat belts are unfastened

(red icon) or fastened (green icon), not

the presence of any passengers.

For the rear seats, the icons will activate

a few seconds after the ignition device

has been turned to MAR, regardless of

the status of the seat belts (even if the

seat belts are all fastened).

All the warning lights/icons will come on

when at least one belt changes from

fastened to unfastened status or vice

versa.

F1B0106C

SAFETY

PRE-TENSIONERS

The car is equipped with seat belt

pretensioners for the front and rear side

seats. These draw the seat belts back

by several centimetres in the event of a

strong frontal impact to ensure that the

seat belts adhere perfectly to the

occupants' bodies before retention

begins.

It is evident that the pretensioners have

been activated when the belt withdraws

toward the retractor.

The front car seats are also equipped

with a second pretensioner (fitted in the

kick plate area). Its activation is

signalled by the metal cable shortening.

A slight discharge of smoke may be

produced during the activation of the

pretensioner which is not harmful and

does not involve any fire hazard.

The pretensioner does not require any

maintenance or lubrication: any

changes to its original conditions will

invalidate its efficiency.

If, due to unusual natural events (floods,

sea storms, etc.), the device has been

affected by water and/or mud, contact

a Fiat Dealership to have it replaced.

IMPORTANT To obtain the highest

degree of protection from the action of

the pretensioner, wear the seat belt

tight to the chest and pelvis.

LOAD LIMITERS

75)

41)

To increase safety in the event of an

accident, the front seat belt retractors

contain a device which controls the

force acting on the chest and shoulders

during the belt restraining action in the

event of a frontal collision.

GENERAL

INSTRUCTIONS FOR

USING THE SEAT BELTS

76) 77) 78)

Seat belts are also to be worn by

pregnant women: the risk of injury in the

case of impact is greatly reduced for

them and the unborn child if they are

wearing a seat belt.

Pregnant women must position the

lower part of the belt very low down so

that it passes over the pelvis and under

the abdomen fig. 74. While pregnancy

progresses, the driver must adjust both

seat and steering wheel to have full

control over the car (pedals and

steering wheel must be easy to

access). The maximum clearance

should be kept between the abdomen

and the steering wheel.

The seat belt strap must not be twisted.

The upper part must pass over the

shoulder and cross the chest

diagonally. The lower part must adhere

to the pelvis fig. 75, not to the

abdomen of the occupant. Do not use

devices (clips, etc.) to hold the seat belt

away from your body.

F1B0107C

F1B0108C

Each seat belt must be used by only

one person. Never travel with a child

sitting on the passenger's lap and a

single belt to protect them both fig. 76.

In general, do not place any objects

between the person and the belt.

SEAT BELTS

MAINTENANCE

For keeping the seat belts in efficient

conditions, carefully observe the

following warnings:

always use the seat belt well

stretched and never twisted; make sure

that it is free to run without

obstructions;

check seat belt operation as follows:

attach the seat belt and pull it hard;

replace the seat belt after an

accident of a certain severity even if it

does not appear to be damaged.

Always replace the seat belt if the

pretensioners were deployed;

prevent the retractors from getting

wet: their correct operation is only

guaranteed if water does not get inside;

replace the seat belt when it shows

wear or cuts.

WARNING

75) The pretensioner may be used only

once. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have it

replaced after it has been deployed.

76) Removing or otherwise tampering with

pretensioner and seat belt components is

strictly prohibited. Any intervention on

these components must be performed by

qualified and authorised technicians.

Always go to a Fiat Dealership.

77) For maximum safety, keep the backrest

upright, lean back into it and make sure the

seat belt fits closely across your chest and

pelvis. Always fasten the seat belts for both

the front and rear seats! Travelling without

wearing seat belts will increase the risk of

serious injury and even death in the event

of an accident.

78) If the belt has been subjected to high

levels of stress, for example after an

accident, it should be changed completely

together with the attachments, attachment

fixing screws and the pretensioner. In fact,

even if the belt has no visible defects, it

may have lost its resilience.

IMPORTANT

41) Operations which lead to impacts,

vibrations or localised heating (over 100°C

for a maximum of six hours) in the area

around the pretensioner may cause

damage or make it deploy. Contact a Fiat

Dealership should intervention be

necessary on these components.

F1B0109C

SAFETY

CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS

CARRYING CHILDREN

SAFELY

79) 80) 81) 82)

For optimal protection in the event of an

impact, all occupants must be seated

and wearing adequate restraint

systems, including newborn and other

children!

This prescription is compulsory in all EC

countries according to EC Directive

2003/20/EC.

Children below the height of

1.50 metres and up to 12 years must

be protected with suitable restraint

systems and be seated on the rear

seats.

Statistics on accidents indicate that the

rear seats offer greater safety for

children.

Compared with an adult, a child's head

is larger and heavier in proportion to

their body and the child's muscular and

bone structures are not fully developed.

Therefore, correct restraint systems

other than adult seat belts are

necessary, to reduce as much as

possible the risk of injuries in the event

of an accident, braking or sudden

manoeuvre.

Children must be seated safely and

comfortably. As far as the

characteristics of the child seats used

allow, you are advised to keep children

in rear facing child seats for as long as

possible (at least until 3–4 years old),

since this is the most protected position

in the event of an impact.

The choice of the most suitable child

restraint system depends on the weight

and size of the child. There are various

types of child restraint systems, which

can be secured to the car by means of

the seat belts or with the ISOFIX/i-Size

anchorages.

It is recommended to always choose

the restraint system most suitable for

the child; for this reason always refer to

the Owner Handbook provided with the

child restraint system, to be sure that it

is of the right type for the children it is

intended for.

In Europe the characteristics of child

restraint systems are ruled by the

regulation ECE-R44, dividing them into

five weight groups:

Group Weight range

Group0 upto10kg

oup 0+

up to 13 kg in

weight

Group 1 9-18 kg

Group 2 15 - 25 kg

Group 3 22 - 36 kg

The ECE-R44 standard was recently

paired with the ECE R-129 regulation,

which defines the characteristics of the

new i-Size child restraint systems (see

the "Suitability of passenger seats for

i-Size child restraint system use"

paragraph for more information).

All restraint devices must bear the

type-approval data, together with the

control mark, on a label solidly fixed to

the child restraint system which must

never be removed.

Lineaccessori MOPAR

includes child

restraint systems for each weight

group. These devices are

recommended having been specifically

designed for Fiat vehicles.

WARNING In order to be correctly

installed in the car, some universal child

seats need a (base) accessory sold

separately from the car seat

manufacturer. Therefore, FCA

recommends confirming the retailer if

the desired child seat can be installed in

the car by having it done, before buying

the seat.

FITTING A CHILD

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

WITH SEAT BELTS

The Universal child restraint systems

installed with the seat belts only are

type-approved on the basis of the ECE

R44 standard and are divided into

various weight groups.

83) 84) 85) 86)

IMPORTANT The figures are indicative

and provided for assembly purposes

only. Fit the child restraint system

according to the instructions, which

must be included.

Group 0 and 0+

Infants up to 13 kg must be carried with

a rearward facing child restraint system

of a type as shown in fig. 77 which,

supporting the head, does not induce

stress on the neck in the event of

sudden decelerations.

The child restraint system is secured by

the vehicle seat belts, as shown in

fig. 77 and it must restrain the child in

turn with its own belts.

Group 1

Children of weight from 9 to 18 kg may

be carried in forward facing child

restraint systems fig. 78.

F1B0110C

F1B0111C

SAFETY

Group 2

Children from 15 to 25 kg may use the

vehicle seat belts directly fig. 79.

In this case, the child restraint system is

used to position the child correctly with

respect to the seat belts so that the

diagonal belt section crosses the child’s

chest and not the neck, and the lower

part is snug on the pelvis not the

abdomen.

Group 3

For children between 22 and 36 kg,

there are dedicated restraint systems

that allow the seat belt to be worn

correctly.

The fig. 80 shows the correct child

positioning on the rear seat.

Children over 1.50 m in height can wear

seat belts like adults.

F1B0112C

F1B0113C

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON UNIVERSAL CHILD

RESTRAINT SYSTEM USE

According to the European Directive 2000/3/EC the suitability of each passenger seat position for the fixing of universal child

restraint systems is shown in the following table:

Positioning the “Universal” child restraint system

Group Weight groups

Front passenger (*)

Rear central

passenger

Rear side

passengers

Airbag enabled Airbag disabled

Group 0, 0+ up to 13 kg X U X U

oup 1 9-18 kg X U X U

Group 2 15-25 kg U U X U

Group 3 22-36 kg U U X U

X = Restraint system not suitable for children in this weight category.

U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified

“Groups”.

(*) IMPORTANT NEVER fit rearward facing child restraint systems on the front seat with an active passenger side airbag. If you

wish to fit a rearward-facing child restraint system in the front passenger seat, first deactivate the relative airbag (see

instructions in the paragraph "Supplementary protection system (SRS) – Airbag”).

SAFETY

INSTALLING AN ISOFIX

CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

87) 88) 89)

The rear side seats of the car are

equipped with ISOFIX anchors, for

fitting child restraint systems quickly,

simply and safely. The ISOFIX system

lets you install the ISOFIX child

restraining system without using the car

seat belts but connecting them directly

to the car seat with three anchors in the

car.

Traditional child restraint systems can

be fitted alongside ISOFIX child restraint

systems on different seats in the same

car

To install an ISOFIX child restraint

system, attach it to the two metal

anchorages A fig. 81 located where the

rear seat cushion meets the backrest,

then fix the upper strap (available

together with the restraint system) to

the dedicated anchorage B

fig. 82 located at the bottom behind the

backrest.

As an example, fig. 83 shows an

example of a Universal ISOFIX child

restraint system for weight group 1.

IMPORTANT The fig. 83 is indicative

and for assembly purposes only. Fit the

child restraint system according to the

instructions, which must be included.

F1B0114C

F1B0115C

F1B0116C

NOTE When a Universal ISOFIX child

restraint system is used, only ECE R44

"ISOFIX Universal” (R44/03 or further

upgrades), type-approved child restraint

systems can be used fig. 84.

F1B0117C

SAFETY

SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM USE

ISOFIX POSITIONS ON THE CAR

Weight categories Size category Device Front passenger

Rear side

passengers

Rear central

passenger

Group 0 (up to 10 kg) E ISO/R1

XILX

Group 0+ (up to 13 kg)

E ISO/R1

XILX

D ISO/R2

XILX

C ISO/R3

X IL (*) X

Group 1 (from 9 up to

18 kg)

D ISO/R2

XILX

C ISO/R3

X IL (*) X

B ISO/F2

IUF

- IL

B1 ISO/F2X

IUF

- IL

A ISO/F3

IUF

- IL

X ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child protection systems for this weight and/or size category.

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Specific for the vehicle", "Restricted", or "Semiuniversal" categories, approved for this type of vehicle.

IL (*) The ISOFIX child restraint system can be installed by adjusting the front seat.

IUF Suitable for forward facing ISOFIX child restraint systems in the Universal category and type-approved for the use in the weight group.

NOTE: The other weight groups are covered by specific ISOFIX child restraint systems, which can be used only if specifically

tested for this car (see list of cars provided with the child restraint system).

SUITABILITY OF

PASSENGER SEATS FOR

i-Size CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEM USE

The rear side seats of the vehicle are

type-approved to house the

state-of-the-art i-Size child restraint

systems.

These child restraint systems, built and

type-approved according to the i-Size

(ECE R129) standard, ensure better

safety conditions to carry children on

board a vehicle:

the child must be transported

rearward facing until 15 months;

child restraint system protection is

increased in the event of a side

collision;

the use of the ISOFIX system is

promoted to avoid faulty installation of

the child restraint system;

efficiency in the choice of the child

restraint system, which isn't made

according to weight anymore but

according to the child's height, is

increased;

compatibility between the vehicle

seats and the child restraint systems is

better: the i-Size child restraint systems

can be considered as "Super ISOFIX";

this means that they can be perfectly

fitted in type-approved i-Size seats, but

can also be fitted in ISOFIX (ECE R44)

type-approved seats.

NOTE The vehicle seats, i-Size

type-approved, are marked by the

symbol shown in fig. 85.

F1B0124C

100

SAFETY

The following table, according to European standard ECE 129, indicates the possibility of i-Size child restraint system

installation.

i-Size POSITIONS ON THE VEHICLE

Device Front passenger

Rear side

passengers

Rear central

passenger

i-Size child restraint systems

ISO/R2

X i-U X

ISO/F2 X i-U X

101

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS RECOMMENDED BY FCA FOR YOUR FIAT 500X

Lineaccessori MOPAR

includes a complete range of child restraint systems to be fixed using the seat belt with three

anchorage points or the ISOFIX anchorages.

IMPORTANT FCA recommends fitting the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included.

Weight group Child restraint system

Type of child restraint

system

Child restraint system installation

Group 0+: from

birth

to 13 kg

Britax Baby Safe plus

Approval number: E1 04301146

Fiat order code: 71806415

Universal/ISOFIX child restraint system.

It must be installed facing rearwards,

using the vehicle seat belts only, or the

dedicated ISOFIX base (which can be

purchased separately) and the vehicle

ISOFIX anchorages.

It must be fitted on the rear outer

seats.

Britax Baby Safe ISOFIX base

Fiat order code: 71806416

102

SAFETY

Weight group Child restraint system

Type of child restraint

system

Child restraint system installation

Group 1: from 9

to 18 kg

Fair G0/1S

Type-approval number:

E4 04443718

Fiat order code: 71807388

Universal/ISOFIX child restraint system.

It can be fitted forward facing/rearward

facing using only the vehicle seat belts

or the Isofix anchorages.

FCA recommends fitting it using the

rearward facing ISOFIX platform (RWF

specific "G" type - to be purchased

separately) or the forward facing

ISOFIX platform (FWF specific "A" type

- to be purchased separately), the rigid

head restraint (to be purchased

separately) and the ISOFIX anchorages

for the vehicle.

It must be fitted on the rear outer

seats.

Reference A: Fair ISOFIX

RWF platform, "G" type for G

0/1S

Fiat order code: 71807455

Reference B: Fair ISOFIX

FWF platform, "A" type for G

0/1S

Fiat order code: 71805364

FAIR head restraint

Fiat order code: 71807387

103

Weight group Child restraint system

Type of child restraint

system

Child restraint system installation

Group 1: from

pto18kg

Britax Safefix TT

Approval number: E1 04301199

Fiat order code: 71805956

It must be fitted forward facing only,

using the ISOFIX attachments and the

upper strap, provided with the child

restraint system.

It must be fitted on the rear outer

seats.

Britax Roemer Duo Plus

Type-approval number:

E1 04301133

Fiat order code: 71803161

It must be fitted forward facing only,

using the ISOFIX attachments and the

upper strap, provided with the child

restraint system.

It must be fitted on the rear outer

seats.

Group 2: from

15 kg to 36 kg

Fair Junior Fix

Type-approval number:

E4 04443721

Fiat order code: 71806570

It can only be fitted facing forwards,

using the three-point seat belt and the

ISOFIX anchorages of the vehicle, if

present.

104

SAFETY

Main recommendations to carry

children safely

Install the child restraint systems on

the rear seat, which is the most

protected position in a crash.

Keep children in rearward-facing

child restraint systems for as long as

possible, ideally until they are 3–4 years

old.

If the passenger's front airbag is

deactivated always check the

dedicated warning light on the trim

located on the dashboard to make sure

that it has actually been deactivated.

Carefully follow the instructions

supplied with the child restraint system.

Keep the instructions in the car along

with the other documents and this

handbook. Do not use second-hand

child restraint systems without

instructions.

Only one child is to be strapped into

each restraint system; never carry two

children using one child restraint

system.

Always check that the seat belts do

not rest on the child’s neck.

Always check that the seat belt is

well fastened by pulling on it.

While travelling, do not let the child

sit incorrectly or unfasten the belts.

Never allow a child to put the belt's

diagonal section under an arm or

behind their back.

Never carry children on your lap,

even newborns. No-one can hold a

child in the case of a crash.

If the car has been involved in a road

accident, replace the child restraint

system with a new one. In addition, and

depending on the type of child restraint

system installed, replace the Isofix

anchorages or the seat belt with which

the child restraint system was

connected.

For any child restraint system

mounted facing the direction of travel of

the vehicle on the external rear seats,

independently of its weight group,

mount it after removing the

corresponding rear seat head restraint.

This does not apply to child restraint

systems that consist only of a cushion

(without backrest). You should install

such child restraint systems when the

corresponding head restraint is

mounted. Any removed head restraints

must be kept in the car are refitted if the

seat is used by an adult occupant.

WARNING

79) SEVERE DANGER When a front

passenger airbag is fitted, do not install

rearward facing child restraint systems on

the front passenger seat. Deployment of

the airbag in an accident could cause fatal

injuries to the child regardless of the

severity of the collision. It is advisable to

always carry children in a child restraint

system on the rear seat, which is the most

protected position in the event of a

collision.

80) On the sun visor there is a label with

suitable symbols reminding the user that it

is compulsory to deactivate the airbag if a

rearward facing child restraint system is

fitted. Always comply with the instructions

on the passenger side sun visor (see the

"Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) -

Airbag" paragraph).

81) Should it be necessary to carry a child

on the passenger side front seat in a rear

facing child restraint system, the passenger

side front airbag and side bag must be

deactivated through the display main menu

(see the "Display" paragraph, "Knowing the

instrument panel" chapter), verifying

deactivation by checking whether the

OFF LED has switched on in the trim

located on the dashboard. Move the

passenger's seat as far back as possible to

avoid contact between the child seat and

the dashboard.

82) Do not move the front or rear seat if a

child is seated on it or on the dedicated

child restraint system

105

83) Incorrect fitting of the child restraint

system may result in an inefficient

protection system. In the event of an

accident the child restraint system may

become loose and the child may be

injured, even fatally. When fitting a restraint

system for newborns or children, strictly

comply with the instructions provided by

the Manufacturer.

84) When the child restraint system is not

used, secure it with the seat belt or with

the ISOFIX anchorages, or remove it from

the vehicle. Do not leave it unsecured

inside the passenger compartment. In this

way, in the case of sudden braking or an

accident, it will not cause injuries to the

occupants.

85) After installing a child restraint system,

do not move the seat: always remove the

child restraint system before making any

adjustment.

86) Always make sure that the diagonal

section of the seat belt does not pass

under the arms or behind the back of the

child. In the event of an accident the seat

belt will not be able to secure the child,

with the risk of injury, including fatal injury.

Therefore the child must always wear the

seat belt correctly.

87) Do not use the same lower anchorage

to install more than one child restraint

system.

88) If a Universal ISOFIX child seat is not

fixed to all three anchorages, the child seat

will not be able to protect the child

correctly. In a crash, the child could be

seriously or fatally injured.

89) Fit the child restraint system when the

car is stationary. The child restraint system

is correctly fixed to the brackets when you

hear the click. Follow the instructions for

assembly, disassembly and positioning that

the Manufacturer must supply with the

child restraint system.

SUPPLEMENTARY

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS) - AIRBAG

The vehicle is equipped with:

front driver airbag;

front passenger airbag;

driver and passenger front side bags

for pelvis, chest and shoulder

protection (Side bags);

front and rear side passenger side

bags for head protection (window bag)

driver's knee bag (where provided).

The location of the airbags on the

vehicle is marked by the word

"AIRBAG" in the middle of the steering

wheel, on the dashboard, on the side

trim or on a label placed next to the

airbag deployment area.

FRONT AIRBAGS

The front driver/passenger airbags and

the driver knee bag (where provided)

protect the front seat occupants in the

event of frontal impacts of medium/high

severity, by placing the bag between

the occupant and the steering wheel or

dashboard.

Therefore non-activation of airbags in

other types of collisions (side impacts,

rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) does not

indicate a system malfunction.

106

SAFETY

Driver and passenger front airbags are

not a replacement of but

complementary to the seat belts, which

should always be worn, as specified by

law in Europe and most non-European

countries.

In a crash, those not wearing a seat

belt are projected forwards and may

come into contact with the bag which is

still inflating. The protection offered by

the bag is compromised in these

circumstances.

Front airbags may not activate in the

following situations:

frontal impacts against highly

deformable objects not involving the

front surface of the car (e.g. wing

collision against guard rail, etc.);

car wedging under other cars or

protective barriers (e.g. trucks or guard

rails).

Failure to activate in the conditions

described above is due to the fact that

they may not provide any additional

protection compared with seat belts, so

their activation would be inappropriate.

In these cases, non-deployment does

not indicate a system malfunction.

The driver's and passenger's front

airbags have been designed and

calibrated to protect front seat

occupants wearing seat belts.

At their maximum inflation, their volume

fills most of the space between the

steering wheel and the driver and

between the dashboard and the

passenger.

The airbags are not deployed in the

event of minor frontal impacts (for which

the restraining action of the seat belts is

sufficient). Seat belts must always be

worn. In the event of a frontal collision,

they ensure the correct positioning of

the occupant.

Front airbag driver's side

This consists of an instantly inflating

bag contained in a special

compartment in the centre of the

steering wheel fig. 86.

Passenger front airbag

This consists of an instantly inflating

bag contained in a special recess in the

dashboard fig. 87; this bag has a larger

volume than that of the driver's.

Passenger's front airbag and child

restraint systems

Rearward facing child restraint systems

must NEVER be fitted on the front seat

with an active passenger airbag since in

the event of an impact the airbag

activation may cause fatal injuries to the

transported child.

ALWAYS comply with the instructions

on the label stuck on the passenger

side sun visor fig. 88.

F1B0629C

F1B0126C

107

Driver knee bag

(where provided)

It is located in a specific compartment

arranged under the dashboard under a

specific cover fig. 89. It provides

additional protection in the event of a

frontal collision.

Deactivating passenger front airbag

and seat-mounted side bag for

pelvis, chest and shoulders

protection

If a child must be carried on the front

seat in a rearward facing child restraint

system, deactivate the passenger side

front airbag and front side bag.

To deactivate the airbags use the

display Menu (see the instructions in the

"Display" paragraph, "Knowing the

instrument panel" chapter).

The

OFF and ON LED are

present at the centre of the instrument

panel fig. 90.

Moving the ignition device to MAR

switches on the two LEDs for about

8 seconds. If not, contact a Fiat

Dealership.

During the first seconds, the activation

of the LEDs does not actually show the

passenger protection status, but only

checks its correct operation. After a

check lasting a few seconds, the LEDs

will indicate the status of the passenger

airbag protection.

Passenger protection activated: the

LED

ON turns on fixed.

Passenger protection deactivated:

the

OFF LED switches on with a

steady light.

The LEDs may light up with various

intensity levels depending on the vehicle

conditions. The intensity may vary

during the same key cycle.

F1B0127C

F1B0132C

F1B0630C

108

SAFETY

Passenger front airbag and child restraint system: WARNING

F1B0129C

109

SIDE BAGS

To help increase occupants protection

in the event of side impact collisions,

the car is equipped with front side bags

and window bags.

Side bag

These consist of two bags located in

the front seat backrests fig. 92 that

protect the occupants’ pelvis, chest

and shoulder area in the event of a side

impact of medium/high severity.

They are marked by the "AIRBAG" label

sewn on the outer side of the front

seats.

Window bag

These consist of two “drop-down”

cushions, housed behind the side lining

of the roof and covered with finishing

elements fig. 93.

They are designed to protect the head

of front and rear occupants in the event

of a side collision, thanks to the wide

cushion inflation surface.

The deployment of side bags in the

event of side impacts of low severity is

not required.

In the event of a side impact, the

system provides best protection if the

passenger sits on the seat in a correct

position, thus allowing correct window

bag deployment.

90) 91) 92) 93) 94) 95) 96) 97) 98) 99) 100) 101) 102) 103) 104)

105)

Important notes

Do not wash the seats with water or

pressurised steam (wash by hand or at

automatic seat washing stations).

The front airbags and/or side bags may

be deployed in the event of sharp

impacts to the underbody of the car

(e.g. impact with steps, pavements,

potholes or road bumps etc.).

When the airbag deploys it emits a

small amount of dust: the dust is

harmless and does not indicate the

beginning of a fire. The dust may irritate

the skin and eyes however: in this case,

wash with neutral soap and water.

Airbag checking, repair and

replacement must be carried out at a

Fiat Dealership.

If the car is scrapped, have the airbag

system deactivated at a Fiat Dealership.

Pretensioners and airbags are deployed

in different ways on the basis of the

type of collision. Failure to activate one

or more of the devices does not

indicate a system malfunction.

F1B0130C

F1B0131C

110

SAFETY

WARNING

90) Do not apply stickers or other objects

on the steering wheel, on the dashboard in

the passenger side airbag area, on side

upholstery on the roof or on the seats.

Never put objects (e.g. mobile phones) on

the passenger side of the dashboard since

they could interfere with correct inflation of

the passenger airbag and also cause

serious injury to the passengers.

91) Always drive with your hands on the

rim of the steering wheel so that the airbag

can inflate freely if required. Do not drive

with your body bent forward. Keep your

back straight against the backrest.

92) When there is an active passenger

airbag, DO NOT install rearward facing

child restraint systems on the front seat.

Deployment of the airbag in an accident

could cause fatal injuries to the child

regardless of the severity of the impact.

Therefore, always deactivate the passenger

side airbag when a rearward facing child

restraint system is installed on the front

passenger seat. The front passenger seat

must also be positioned back as far as

possible in order to prevent the child

restraint system from coming into contact

with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate

the passenger airbag as soon as the child

restraint system has been removed.

93) To deactivate the airbags using the

instrument panel menu, see the description

in the "Knowing the instrument panel"

chapter, "Menu Options" paragraph.

94) Do not affix rigid objects to the

garment hooks or support handles.

95) Do not rest your head, arms or elbows

on the door, windows or the area in which

the Window bag is located to avoid

possible injury during airbag inflation.

96) Never lean your head, arms or elbows

out of the window.

97) If, when the ignition device is turned to

MAR, the

warning light does not switch

on or stays on whilst driving, a fault may

have occurred in the restraint systems. In

this case the airbags or pretensioners may

not be deployed in an impact or, in a lower

number of cases, they may be deployed

accidentally. Contact a Fiat Dealership

immediately to have the system checked.

98) In some versions, in the event of a LED

OFF failure (located on the dashboard

trim), the

warning light on the

instrument panel turns on and the

passenger side airbags are deactivated. In

some versions, in the event of a LED

ON failure (located on the dashboard

trim), the

light on the console turns on.

99) On cars with side bags, do not cover

the front seat backrests with extra covers.

100) Do not travel carrying objects in your

lap, in front of your chest or between your

lips (pipe, pencils, etc.): they could cause

severe injury if the airbag is deployed.

101) If the car has been stolen or in the

case of attempt to steal it, if it has been

subjected to vandalism or floods, have the

airbag system checked by a Fiat

Dealership.

102) If the ignition device is at MAR, even if

the engine is switched off, airbags may be

deployed when the vehicle is stationary

and hit by another vehicle. Therefore, even

if the vehicle is stationary, when an active

front passenger airbag is fitted, DO NOT

install rearward facing child restraint

systems on the front passenger seat.

Deployment of the airbag following an

impact could cause fatal injuries to the

child. Therefore, always deactivate the

passenger side airbag when a rearward

facing child restraint system is installed on

the front passenger seat. The front

passenger seat must also be positioned

back as far as possible in order to prevent

the child restraint system from coming into

contact with the dashboard. Immediately

reactivate the passenger airbag as soon as

the child restraint system has been

removed. Also remember that, if the

ignition device is set to STOP, none of the

safety devices (airbags or pretensioners)

will be deployed in the event of collision.

Non-deployment in such cases does not

indicate a system malfunction.

103) Malfunction of the

warning light is

indicated by the activation of an airbag

failure icon and dedicated message on the

instrument panel display. The pyrotechnic

charges are not disabled. Contact a Fiat

Dealership immediately to have the system

checked

104) The airbag deployment threshold is

higher than that of the pretensioners. For

collisions in the range between the two

thresholds, it is normal for only the

pretensioners to be activated.

111

105) The airbag does not replace seat

belts but increases their efficiency.

Because front airbags are not deployed for

low-speed crashes, side collisions,

rear-end shunts or rollovers, occupants are

protected, in addition to any side bags,

only by their seat belts, which must

therefore always be fastened.

112

SAFETY

STARTING AND DRIVING

Let’s get to the "heart" of the vehicle:

seeing how you can exploit all of its

potential to the full.

We’ll look at how to drive it safely in any

situation, so that it can be a welcome

companion, with our comfort and our

wallets in mind.

STARTING THE ENGINE .......114

PARKING THE VEHICLE........115

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE

(EPB) ....................115

MANUAL GEARBOX ..........118

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . .119

TWIN CLUTCH TRANSMISSION . .122

START&STOP SYSTEM ........125

SPEED LIMITER .............127

ELECTRONIC CRUISE

CONTROL ................127

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

(ACC)....................129

MOOD SELECTOR / DRIVE MODE

(drive mode selector) .........133

PARK ASSIST SYSTEM ........135

LANE ASSIST SYSTEM (lane

crossing warning) ............137

REAR VIEW CAMERA .........139

TOWING TRAILERS ..........140

REFUELLING THE VEHICLE .....144

113

STARTING THE

ENGINE

Before starting the engine, adjust the

seat, the interior rear view mirrors, the

door mirrors and fasten the seat belt

correctly.

Never press the accelerator pedal for

starting the engine.

If necessary, messages indicating the

starting procedure can be shown on

the display.

LPG versions

The engine always starts up on petrol

independently of the previously selected

mode.

42)

ENGINE STARTING

PROCEDURE

106) 107) 108) 109)

43) 44) 45) 46)

Versions with manual gearbox

Proceed as follows:

engage the electric parking brake

and place the gear lever in neutral;

bring the ignition device to MAR. On

Diesel versions, warning light

lights

up in the instrument panel: wait for the

warning light to switch off;

fully depress the clutch pedal

without touching the accelerator;

turn the ignition device to AVV and

release it as soon as the engine starts;

if the engine does not start within

10 seconds, bring the ignition device

back to STOP and wait for

10-15 seconds before repeating the

starting procedure.

after the manoeuvre has been

repeated, if the problem persists,

contact a Fiat Dealership.

Versions with automatic

transmission

Proceed as follows:

engage the electric parking brake

and set the gear lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral);

fully depress the brake pedal without

touching the accelerator;

set the ignition device to AVV;

if the engine does not start, bring

the ignition device back to STOP and

wait for 10-15 seconds before

repeating the starting procedure;

after the manoeuvre has been

repeated, if the problem persists,

contact a Fiat Dealership.

ENGINE STARTING

FAILURE

Starting the engine with electronic

key battery (Keyless Go) run down

or flat

If the ignition device does not respond

when the relevant button is pressed the

electronic key battery might be run

down or flat. Therefore, the system

does not detect the presence of the

electronic key on board the vehicle and

displays a dedicated message. In this

case, rest the rounded edge of the

electronic key (the side opposite the

metal insert) on the ignition device and

press the button using the electronic

key. The ignition device is thus activated

and the engine can be started.

WARNING

106) Do not try to start the engine pouring

fuel or other flammable fluid inside the

throttle body air intake: this might damage

the engine and injury people nearby.

107) It is dangerous to run the engine in

enclosed areas. The engine takes in

oxygen and releases carbon dioxide,

carbon monoxide and other toxic gases.

108) The brake servo is not active until the

engine is started, so you would need to

apply much more force than usual to the

brake pedal.

114

STARTING AND DRIVING

109) Do not start the engine by pushing,

towing or driving downhill. These

manoeuvres may damage the catalytic

converter.

IMPORTANT

42) There must therefore always be some

petrol in the tank to protect the petrol

pump and to guarantee temporary

switching from LPG to petrol operation, if

high performance is required.

43) We recommend that during the initial

period, or during the first 1600 km, you do

not drive to full car performance (e.g.

excessive acceleration, long journeys at top

speed, sharp braking, etc.).

44) When the engine is switched off never

leave the ignition device in the MAR

position to prevent useless current

absorption from draining the battery.

45) A quick burst on the accelerator before

turning off the engine serves absolutely no

practical purpose; it wastes fuel and is

especially damaging to turbocharged

engines.

46) Warning light

will flash after starting

or during prolonged cranking to indicate a

fault with the glow plug heating system. If

the engine starts, the vehicle can be used

as normal, but a Fiat Dealership must be

contacted as soon as possible.

PARKING THE

VEHICLE

Always remove the ignition key when

leaving the car.

When parking and leaving the car,

proceed as follows:

engage a gear (1

gear if facing

uphill or reverse if facing downhill) and

leave the wheels turned;

stop the engine and apply the

electric parking brake;

Block the wheels with a wedge or a

stone if the car is parked on a steep

slope.

On versions equipped with automatic

transmission or dual clutch automatic

transmission, wait for the letter P to be

displayed before releasing the brake

pedal.

IMPORTANT NEVER leave the car with

the gearbox in neutral (or, on versions

equipped with automatic transmission

or dual clutch automatic transmission,

before putting the shift lever in the P

position).

ELECTRIC PARKING

BRAKE (EPB)

The vehicle is equipped with electric

parking brake (EPB) to guarantee better

use and optimal performance

compared to a manually operated

parking brake.

The electric parking brake features a

switch, located on the central tunnel

fig. 94, a motor with caliper for each

rear wheel and an electronic control

module.

IMPORTANT Always engage the

electric parking brake before leaving the

car.

F1B0133C

115

IMPORTANT In addition to parking the

vehicle with the parking brake always

engaged, the wheel steered, chocks or

stones positioned in front of the wheels

(when on a steep slope), a gear must

always be engaged (the 1

gear with

the vehicle parked uphill or the reverse

gear with the vehicle parked downhill).

On versions with automatic

transmission, place the gear lever at P

(Park).

IMPORTANT Should the vehicle battery

be faulty, to unlock the electric parking

brake the battery must be replaced.

The electric parking brake can be

engaged in two ways:

manually pull the switch fig. 94 on

the central tunnel in the direction shown

by the arrow;

automatically in "Safe Hold" or "Auto

Apply" conditions.

Engaging the parking brake

manually

110) 117) 112)

Briefly pull the switch located on the

central tunnel to manually engage the

electric parking brake when the car is

stationary.

Noise may be heard from the rear of the

vehicle when engaging the electric

parking brake.

A slight movement of the brake pedal

may be detected when engaging the

electric parking brake with the brake

pedal pressed.

With the electric parking brake

engaged, the warning light

on the

instrument panel and the LED on the

switch fig. 94 turn on.

IMPORTANT With the EPB failure

warning light on, some functions of the

electric parking brake are deactivated.

In this case the driver is responsible for

brake activation and vehicle parking in

complete safety conditions.

If, under exceptional circumstances, the

use of the parking brake is required with

the car in motion, keep the switch on

the central tunnel pulled as long as the

brake action is necessary.

The

warning light may switch on

with the hydraulic system temporarily

unavailable; in this case braking is

controlled by the motors.

The stop lights also automatically

switch on.

Release the switch on the central tunnel

to stop the braking action with the car

in motion.

If, through this procedure, the vehicle is

braked until a speed below 3 km/h is

reached and the switch is kept pulled,

the parking brake will definitively

engage.

IMPORTANT Driving the vehicle with

the electric parking brake engaged, or

using it several times to slow down the

vehicle, may cause severe damage to

the braking system.

Releasing the electric parking

brake manually

The ignition device must be in the MAR

position in order to manually release the

parking brake. Moreover, you need to

press the brake pedal, then press the

fig. 94 switch briefly.

Noise may be heard from the rear part

of the car and a slight movement of the

brake pedal may be detected during

release.

After disengaging the electric parking

brake, the

warning light on the

instrument panel and the LED on the

switch will turn off.

If the

warning light on the

instrument panel remains on with the

electric parking brake disengaged, this

indicates a failure: in this case contact a

Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT On versions with

automatic transmission never use the P

(Park) position instead of the electric

parking brake. Always engage the

electric parking brake when parking the

vehicle to prevent injury or damage

caused by the unexpected movement

of the vehicle.

116

STARTING AND DRIVING

IMPORTANT For cars with manual

transmission, if the clutch pedal is

pressed all the way and then released

simultaneously with the press of the

accelerator, the electric parking brake

automatically releases.

OPERATING THE

ELECTRIC PARKING

BRAKE

The electric parking brake can operate

in the following ways:

"Dynamic operating mode": this

mode is activated by pulling the switch

fig. 94 repeatedly whilst driving;

"Static engagement and release

mode": with the car stationary, the

electric parking brake can be activated

by pulling the switch once. On the other

hand, press the switch and the brake

pedal at the same time to disengage

the brake;

“ Drive Away Release”: the electric

parking brake will automatically

disengage with the detection of the

driver’s intention to move the car

forward or in reverse. On versions with

automatic transmission, the driver’s

safety belt has to be properly fastened.

"Safe Hold": if the car speed is lower

than 3 km/h and, for the versions with

automatic transmission, the gear lever

is not in P (Park) position and the driver

intention of leaving the car is detected,

the electric parking brake will

automatically engage to hold the car in

safety conditions;

"Auto Apply": if the car speed is

lower than 3 km/h, the electric parking

brake will automatically engage with the

gear lever moved to P (Park) position

(versions with automatic transmission),

or with the ignition device at STOP

(versions with manual transmission).

The LED on the switch will light up

together with the

warning light on

the instrument panel when the parking

brake is engaged and applied to the

wheels. Each automatic parking brake

engagement can be cancelled by

pressing the switch on the central

tunnel and at the same time moving the

gear lever for the automatic

transmission to position P (Park) or the

ignition device to STOP (versions with

manual transmission). This way can be

handled by using the system Menu

Uconnect™.

SAFE HOLD

It is a safety function that automatically

engages the electric parking brake in

the event of a dangerous condition for

the vehicle.

If:

the vehicle speed is below 3 km/h;

the gear lever is not at P (Park)

(versions with automatic transmission);

the driver's seat belt is not fastened;

the driver side door is open;

no attempted operation of the brake

pedal or the accelerator pedal, or, in

versions with manual gearbox, the

clutch pedal is detected

the electric parking brake engages

automatically to prevent vehicle

movement.

The Safe Hold function can be

temporarily disabled by pressing the

switch located on the central tunnel and

the brake pedal at the same time, with

the vehicle stationary and the driver

side door open.

Once disabled, the function will activate

again when the vehicle speed reaches

20 km/h or the ignition device is moved

to STOP and then to MAR.

117

WARNING

110) In the case of parking manoeuvres on

roads on a gradient, steer the wheels,

engage the parking brake, the first gear if

uphill and the reverse if downhill; on

versions with automatic transmission, set

the lever to "P". If the car is parked on a

steep slope block the wheels with a wedge

or stone.

111) Never leave children alone in an

unattended vehicle; make sure that when

you move away from the vehicle, you have

the key with you.

112) The electric parking brake must

always be engaged when leaving the

vehicle.

MANUAL GEARBOX

113)

47)

To engage the gears, press the clutch

pedal fully and put the gear lever into

the required position (the diagram for

gear engagement is shown on the knob

To engage 6

gear (if present), operate

the lever by pressing it towards the right

in order to avoid engaging 4

gear by

mistake. The same applies to the shift

from 6

to 5

gear.

1.4 Turbo Multi Air - 1.6 Multijet -

2.0 Multijet manual transmission

versions: To engage reverse R from

neutral, lift the ring 1 fig. 95 under the

knob and at the same time move the

lever to the left and then forwards.

1.6 E.Torq versions: To engage

reverse gear R from neutral, move the

lever to the right and then backwards.

IMPORTANT Reverse can only be

engaged when the car is completely

stationary. For 1.6 E.Torq versions: with

the engine running, wait for at least

2 seconds with the clutch pedal fully

pressed before engaging reverse to

prevent damage to the gears and

“grating”.

IMPORTANT The clutch pedal should

be used only for gear changes. Do not

drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal, however lightly. In some

circumstances, the electronic clutch

control could cut in by interpreting the

incorrect driving style as a fault.

F1B0134C

118

STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING

113) Depress the clutch pedal fully to

change gear correctly. It is therefore

essential that there is nothing under the

pedals: make sure the mats are lying flat

and do not get in the way of the pedals.

IMPORTANT

47) Do not drive with your hand resting on

the gear lever as the force exerted, even if

slight, could lead over time to premature

wear of the gearbox internal components.

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

GEAR LEVER

The fig. 96 lever has the following

positions:

P = Park

R = Reverse

N = Neutral

D = Drive, (automatic forward speed)

AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear

in sequential driving mode; – shifting to

lower gear in sequential driving mode.

114) 115) 116) 117)

48) 49) 50) 51)

The gear engaged is shown on the

display.

The lever has a button A fig. 96, which

must be pressed to move the lever to P

or R.

To select the "sequential" mode, move

the lever from D (Drive) to the left: the

position + (upper gear) or – (lower gear)

can be reached; these are unstable

positions, which means that the lever

always returns to the central position.

To exit from the P (Park) position, press

the brake pedal and button A on the

knob.

To shift from position N (Neutral) to

position D (Drive) or R (Reverse), you

need to press the brake pedal.

IMPORTANT DO NOT accelerate while

shifting from position P (or N) to another

position.

IMPORTANT After selecting a gear, wait

a few seconds before accelerating. This

precaution is particularly important with

a cold engine.

AUTOMATIC DRIVING

MODE

To select the automatic driving mode,

you need to shift the gear lever to D

(Drive): the best ratio is selected by the

electronic transmission control unit

depending on vehicle speed, engine

load (accelerator pedal position) and

gradient of the road.

F1B0137C

119

D can be selected from sequential

operation in any driving conditions.

“Kick-Down” function

To resume speed quickly, when the

accelerator pedal is pressed fully, the

transmission control system downshifts

(kick-down function).

IMPORTANT When driving on roads

with poor grip conditions (snow, ice,

etc.) avoid activating the kick-down

function.

Gearshifting suggestion

With the transmission in automatic

mode (selector lever in position D),

when gearshifting is required by the

paddles on the steering wheel (where

provided), the system shifts to

"Sequential mode" ("Autostick"),

displaying the engaged gear for about

5 seconds.

When this time has elapsed, if the

paddles are not operated anymore, the

system goes back to the automatic

mode (D), with following displaying.

AUTOSTICK - Sequential

mode

In the case of frequent gearshifting (e.g.

when the vehicle is driven with a heavy

load, on slopes, with strong headwind

or when towing heavy trailers), it is

recommended to use the Autostick

(sequential shifting) mode to select and

keep a lower fixed ratio.

In these conditions, using a lower gear

improves vehicle performance and

prolongs the transmission's life, limiting

gearshifting and preventing overheating.

It is possible to shift from position D

(Drive) to the sequential mode

regardless of vehicle speed.

Activation

With gear lever in position D (Drive), to

activate the sequential drive mode,

move the lever to the left (– and +

indication of the trim). The gear

engaged will be shown on the display.

Gearshifting is made by moving the

gear lever forwards, towards symbol –

or backwards, towards symbol +.

Deactivation

To deactivate the sequential driving

mode, bring the gear lever back to

position D (Drive), automatic mode.

STEERING WHEEL

CONTROLS

(where provided)

52)

On some versions, the gearbox can be

managed sequentially using the

steering wheel controls fig. 97.

To use the controls on the steering

wheel, the gear lever must be in

position D (Drive) between ( +) and ( –):

steering wheel paddle ( +) (pulling

paddle towards driver): engage higher

ratio;

steering wheel paddle ( -) (pulling

paddle towards driver): engage lower

ratio.

The engagement of a lower (or higher)

gear is only permitted if the engine revs

allow it.

F1B0508C

120

STARTING AND DRIVING

STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting the engine is allowed only

when the gear lever is in position P or

N. Therefore, when the engine is

started, the system will be at position N

or P (the latter means neutral, but with

the vehicle's wheels are locked

mechanically).

MOVING THE CAR

To move the car, from P press the brake

pedal and, using the button on the gear

lever, move the lever to the desired

position (D, R or "Sequential mode").

The display will show the gear engaged.

When the brake pedal is released, the

car starts moving forwards or

backwards, as soon as the manoeuvre

is activated ("creeping" effect). The

accelerator should not be pressed in

this case.

IMPORTANT The inconsistency

between the speed actually engaged

(shown on the display) and the position

of the gear lever is indicated by the

letter corresponding to the position of

the lever flashing on the trim (also

accompanied by an acoustic signal).

This condition should not be interpreted

as an operational fault, but simply as a

request by the system to repeat the

manoeuvre.

IMPORTANT With the electric parking

brake released and brake pedal

released, engine at idling speed and

gear lever in position D, R or sequential,

pay the utmost care because the car

can move even without the operation of

the accelerator pedal. This condition

can be used with the car on a level

surface during tight parking

manoeuvres using the brake pedal only.

GEAR ENGAGEMENT

INHIBITION

This system prevents you from moving

the gear lever from position P (Park) or

N (Neutral) if the brake pedal has not

been previously depressed.

When the ignition device is in MAR

(engine on or off):

to shift the gear to a position

different from P (Park) or from N to R,

you need to press the brake pedal and

the button A fig. 96 on the knob of the

gear lever;

to shift the lever from position N to

position D, press the brake pedal.

In case of a failure or when the vehicle's

battery is flat, the lever remains locked

in position P. To manually unlock the

lever, see paragraph "Automatic

transmission - lever unlocking" in the "In

an emergency" chapter.

VEHICLE SHUTDOWN

Versions equipped with the Keyless

Go system: this function requires the

gear lever to be positioned at P (Park);

then bring the ignition device to STOP.

Versions equipped with key without

remote control: this function requires

the gear lever to be positioned at P

(Park) before extracting the key from the

ignition device.

If the vehicle battery is flat and the

ignition key is engaged, the latter is

locked in position. To remove the key

manually see paragraph "Automatic

transmission - key removal" in the

chapter "In an emergency".

"RECOVERY" OPERATION

(where provided)

Transmission operation is constantly

monitored to detect any fault. If a

condition that might damage the

transmission is detected, the "recovery"

function is activated.

In this condition, the transmission stays

in 4

gear, regardless of the selected

gear.

Positions P (Parking), R (Reverse) and N

(Neutral) still work. Icon

might light

up in the display.

In the case of "recovery" operation

immediately contact the nearest Fiat

Dealership.

121

Temporary failure

In the event of a temporary failure,

correct transmission operation can be

restored for all the forwards gears by

proceeding as follows:

stop the vehicle;

bring the transmission lever to P

(Park).

bring the ignition device to STOP;

wait for about 10 seconds, then

restart the engine;

select the desired gear: correct

transmission operation should be

restored.

IMPORTANT In the event of a

temporary failure it is in any case

recommended to contact a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible.

WARNING

114) Never use position P (Park) instead of

the electric parking brake. Always engage

the electric parking brake when parking the

vehicle to avoid the accidental movement

of the vehicle.

115) If the P (Park) position is not engaged,

the vehicle could move and injure people.

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that

the gear lever is in position P and that the

electric parking brake is engaged.

116) Do not shift the gear lever to N

(Neutral) and do not stop the engine when

driving on a downhill road. This type of

driving is dangerous and reduces the

possibility of intervening in the case of

variation of the road traffic or surface. You

risk losing control of your vehicle and

causing accidents.

117) Never leave children alone in an

unattended vehicle; make sure that when

you move away from the vehicle, you have

the key with you.

IMPORTANT

48) Before moving the gear lever from

position P (Park), bring the ignition device

to position MAR and press the brake pedal.

Otherwise, the gear lever may get

damaged.

49) Engage reverse only with the car

stationary, engine at idling speed and

accelerator fully released.

50) If the car is on a gradient, always

engage the electric parking brake BEFORE

placing the gear lever in P.

51) Engage reverse only with the car

stationary, engine at idling speed and

accelerator pedal fully released.

52) Using the paddles incorrectly (paddles

pushed towards the dashboard ) could

break them.

TWIN CLUTCH

TRANSMISSION

GEAR LEVER

The fig. 98 lever has the following

positions:

P = Park

R = Reverse

N = Neutral

D = Drive, (automatic forward speed)

"AutoStick": + shifting to higher

gear in sequential driving mode; –

shifting to lower gear in sequential

driving mode.

118) 119) 120) 121)

53) 54) 55)

The gear engaged is shown on the

display.

To select the "sequential" mode, shift

the lever from D (Drive) towards the left.

F1B0137C

122

STARTING AND DRIVING

The reachable positions are + (higher

gear) or - (lower gear). These positions

are unstable: the lever always returns to

central position.

The lever has a button A fig. 98, which

must be pressed to move the lever to P

or R.

Shifting from P to any other position of

the selector lever, with ignition key in

MAR-ON position, must be made

pressing the brake pedal and using the

button on A fig. 98.

To shift from R to P, it is necessary to

push button A fig. 98 when engine is at

idle speed.

To shift from position N to D or R, you

need to press the brake pedal. It is

advisable not to accelerate and to

make sure that the engine is stabilised

at idle speed.

Shifting from D to N is free, while

shifting from D to R or P can only be

made by the button A fig. 98.

AUTOMATIC DRIVING

MODE

To select the automatic driving mode,

you need to shift the gear lever to D

(Drive): the best ratio is selected by the

electronic transmission control unit

depending on vehicle speed, engine

load (accelerator pedal position) and

gradient of the road.

D can be selected from sequential

operation in any driving conditions.

“Kick-Down” function

To resume speed quickly, when the

accelerator pedal is pressed fully, the

transmission control system downshifts

(kick-down function).

IMPORTANT When driving on roads

with poor grip conditions (snow, ice,

etc.) avoid activating the kick-down

function.

Gearshifting suggestion

With the transmission in automatic

mode (selector lever in position D),

when gearshifting is required by the

paddles on the steering wheel (where

provided), the system shifts to

"Sequential mode" ("Autostick"),

displaying the engaged gear for about

5 seconds.

When this time has elapsed, if the

paddles are not operated anymore, the

system goes back to the automatic

mode (D), with following displaying.

AUTOSTICK - Sequential

mode

In the case of frequent gearshifting (e.g.

when the vehicle is driven with a heavy

load, on slopes, with strong headwind

or when towing heavy trailers), it is

recommended to use the Autostick

(sequential shifting) mode to select and

keep a lower fixed ratio.

In these conditions, using a lower gear

improves vehicle performance and

prolongs the transmission's life, limiting

gearshifting and preventing overheating.

It is possible to shift from position D

(Drive) to the sequential mode

regardless of vehicle speed.

Activation

With gear lever in position D (Drive), to

activate the sequential drive mode,

move the lever to the left (– and +

indication of the trim). The gear

engaged will be shown on the display.

Gearshifting is made by moving the

gear lever forwards, towards symbol –

or backwards, towards symbol +.

Off

To deactivate the sequential driving

mode, bring the gear lever back to

position D (Drive), automatic mode.

123

STEERING WHEEL

CONTROLS

(where provided)

56)

On some versions, the steering wheel

paddles fig. 99 can be used to change

gear.

To use the paddles on the steering

wheel, the gear lever must be in

"Sequential mode" or in D:

operating the steering wheel paddle (

+) (pulling the paddle towards the

driver): engage higher gear;

operating the steering wheel paddle (

−) (pulling the paddle towards the

driver): engage lower gear.

The engagement of a lower (or higher)

gear is only permitted if the engine revs

allow it.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting the engine is allowed only

when the gear lever is in position P or

N. Therefore, when the engine is

started, the system will be at position N

or P (the latter means neutral, but with

the vehicle's wheels are locked

mechanically).

MOVING THE CAR

To move the car, from P press the brake

pedal and, using the button on the gear

lever, move the lever to the desired

position (D, R or "Sequential mode").

The display will show the gear engaged.

When the brake pedal is released, the

car starts moving forwards or

backwards, as soon as the manoeuvre

is activated ("creeping" effect). The

accelerator should not be pressed in

this case.

IMPORTANT The inconsistency

between the speed actually engaged

(shown on the display) and the position

of the gear lever is indicated by the

letter corresponding to the position of

the lever flashing on the trim (also

accompanied by an acoustic signal).

This condition should not be interpreted

as an operational fault, but simply as a

request by the system to repeat the

manoeuvre.

GEAR ENGAGEMENT

INHIBITION

This system prevents you from moving

the gear lever from position P (Park) or

N (Neutral) if the brake pedal has not

been previously depressed.

When the ignition device is in MAR

(engine on or off):

to shift the gear to a position

different from P (Park) or from N to R,

you need to press the brake pedal and

the button A fig. 98 on the knob of the

gear lever;

to shift the lever from position N to

position D, press the brake pedal.

In case of a failure or when the vehicle's

battery is flat, the lever remains locked

in position P. To manually unlock the

lever, see paragraph "Twin clutch

automatic transmission - lever

unlocking" in the "In an emergency"

chapter.

VEHICLE SHUTDOWN

Versions equipped with the Keyless

Go system: this function requires the

gear lever to be positioned at P (Park);

then bring the ignition device to STOP.

Versions equipped with key without

remote control: this function requires

the gear lever to be positioned at P

(Park) before extracting the key from the

ignition device.

F1B0508C

124

STARTING AND DRIVING

If the vehicle battery is flat and the

ignition key is engaged, the latter is

locked in position. To remove the key

manually see paragraph "Twin clutch

automatic transmission - key removal"

in the chapter "In an emergency".

"RECOVERY"

FUNCTIONS

In case of a gear lever failure, the

instrument panel display could show a

dedicated message recommending that

the driver continues driving without

shifting the lever to the P position.

In this case, the transmission will

maintain the forward gear (with reduced

performance) even if the lever is

positioned at R or N.

Once the lever is positioned at P, or

after shutting down the vehicle,

selecting R or any other forward gear

will no longer be possible. In this case,

contact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

118) Never use position P (Park) instead of

the electric parking brake. Always engage

the electric parking brake when parking the

vehicle to avoid the accidental movement

of the vehicle.

119) If the P (Park) position is not engaged,

the vehicle could move and injure people.

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that

the gear lever is in position P and that the

electric parking brake is engaged.

120) Do not shift the gear lever to N

(Neutral) and do not stop the engine when

driving on a downhill road. This type of

driving is dangerous and reduces the

possibility of intervening in the case of

variation of the road traffic or surface. You

risk losing control of your vehicle and

causing accidents.

121) Never leave children unattended in

the car. Always remove the ignition key

when leaving the car and take the key with

you.

IMPORTANT

53) Before moving the gear lever from

position P (Park), bring the ignition device

to position MAR and press the brake pedal.

Otherwise, the gear lever may get

damaged.

54) If the car is on a gradient, always

engage the electric parking brake BEFORE

placing the gear lever in P.

55) Engage reverse only with the car

stationary, engine at idling speed and

accelerator pedal fully released.

56) Using the paddles incorrectly (paddles

pushed towards the dashboard ) could

break them.

START&STOP

SYSTEM

The Start&Stop system automatically

stops the engine each time the vehicle

is stationary and starts it again when

the driver wants to move off.

In this way, the vehicle efficiency is

increased, by reducing consumption,

dangerous gas emissions and noise

pollution.

122)

57)

OPERATING MODE

Engine stopping mode

Versions with manual gearbox

With the vehicle stopped, the engine

stops with gearbox in neutral and clutch

pedal released.

Versions with automatic

transmission

With vehicle at a standstill and brake

pedal pressed, the engine switches off

if the gear lever is in a position other

than R.

In the event of stops uphill, engine

switching off is disabled to make the

"Hill Hold Control" function available

(works only with running engine).

125

The warning light on the instrument

panel switches on to signal that the

engine was stopped.

Engine restarting mode

Versions with manual gearbox

To restart the engine, press the clutch

pedal. If the vehicle does not start when

the clutch is pressed, place the gear

lever in neutral and repeat the

procedure. If the problem persists,

contact a Fiat Dealership.

Versions with automatic

transmission

To restart the engine, release the brake

pedal.

With brake pressed, if the gear lever is

in automatic mode - D (Drive) - the

engine can be restarted by moving the

lever to R (Reverse) or N (Neutral) or

"AutoStick".

With brake pressed, if the gear lever is

in "AutoStick" mode, the engine can be

restarted moving the lever to "+" or "–",

or R (Reverse) or N (Neutral).

When the engine has been stopped

automatically, keeping the brake pedal

pressed, the brake can be released

keeping the engine off by quickly

shifting the gear lever to P (Park).

To restart the engine, just move the

lever out of position P.

SYSTEM MANUAL

ACTIVATION /

DEACTIVATION

To activate/deactivate the system

manually, press the fig. 100 button

located on the dashboard.

4x4 Versions: every time "Traction"

mode is set using Drive Mode (or Mood

Selector, depending on the market), the

Start&Stop system is deactivated. To

reactivate it, press the fig. 100 button

again. When exiting from the "Traction"

mode, the Stop/Start system returns to

the previously set status.

System activation

The system activation is indicated by a

message shown on the display. In this

case, the LED on the button fig. 100 is

off.

System deactivation

A message will appear on the display

when the system is deactivated. In this

condition, the LED on the

fig. 100 button is on.

SAFETY FUNCTIONS

When the engine is stopped through

the Start&Stop system, if the driver

releases their seat belt or opens the

driver's or passenger's door, the engine

can be restarted only by using the

ignition device.

This condition is indicated to the driver

both through a buzzer and a message

on the display.

WARNING

122) If the battery needs to be replaced,

always contact a Fiat Dealership. Replace

the battery with one of the same type

(HEAVY DUTY) and with the same

specifications.

IMPORTANT

57) If the climate comfort is to be favoured,

the Start&Stop system can be deactivated,

for a continuous operation of the climate

control system.

100

F1B0631C

126

STARTING AND DRIVING

SPEED LIMITER

DESCRIPTION

This device allows the speed of the

vehicle to be limited to values which

can be set by the driver.

The maximum speed can be set both

with vehicle stationary and in motion.

The minimum speed that can be set is

30 km/h.

When the device is active, the vehicle

speed depends on the pressure at the

accelerator pedal, until the

programmed speed limit is reached

(see "Speed limit programming"

paragraph).

ACTIVATING THE DEVICE

To activate the device press button A

fig. 101 on the steering wheel.

AUTOMATIC

DEACTIVATION OF THE

DEVICE

The device deactivates automatically in

the event of fault in the system. In this

case, contact a Fiat Dealership.

ELECTRONIC

CRUISE CONTROL

This is an electronically controlled

driving assistance device that allows the

desired vehicle speed to be maintained,

without having to press the accelerator

pedal. This device can be used at a

speed above 30 km/h on long stretches

of dry, straight roads with few variations

(e.g. motorways).

It is therefore not recommended to use

this device on extra-urban roads with

traffic. Do not use it in town.

ACTIVATING THE DEVICE

123) 124) 125)

To activate the device press button A

fig. 102.

Activation of the device is indicated by

the

symbol on the display switching

on and, on some versions, by a

dedicated message.

If the Speed Limiter is activated, button

Afig. 102 must be pressed twice to

activate the Cruise Control.

101

F1B0141C

127

The device cannot be engaged in 1

or reverse gear: it is advisable to

engage it in 3

gear or higher.

IMPORTANT It is dangerous to leave

the device on when it is not used. There

is a risk of inadvertently activating it and

losing control of the vehicle due to

unexpected excessive speed.

SETTING THE DESIRED

SPEED

Proceed as follows:

to activate the device press button A

fig. 102;

when the vehicle has reached the

desired speed, press button SET + (or

SET –) and release it to activate the

device. When the accelerator is

released, the vehicle will keep the

selected speed automatically.

If needed (e.g. when overtaking), you

can increase speed simply by pressing

the accelerator; when you release the

pedal, the vehicle goes back to the

speed stored previously.

When travelling downhill with the device

active, the vehicle speed may slightly

exceed the set one.

IMPORTANT Before pressing the SET +

or SET – buttons, the vehicle must be

travelling at a constant speed on a flat

surface.

SPEED INCREASE

Once the electronic Cruise Control has

been activated, the speed can be

increased by pressing button SET +.

SPEED DECREASE

With the device activated, the speed

can be decreased by pressing button

SET–.

RECALLING THE SPEED

For versions with automatic

transmission operating in D mode (Drive

- automatic), press and release the RES

button to recall the previously set

speed.

For versions with manual gearbox or

automatic transmission in Autostick

(sequential) mode, before recalling the

previously set speed you should

accelerate until getting close to it, then

press and release the RES button.

DEACTIVATING THE

DEVICE

Lightly pressing the brake pedal or

pressing the CANC button deactivates

the electronic Cruise Control without

deleting the stored speed.

The Cruise Control may be deactivated

also by applying the electric parking

brake (EPB) or when the braking

system is operated (e.g. operation of

the ESC system).

DEACTIVATING THE

DEVICE

The electronic Cruise Control is

deactivated by pressing button A

fig. 102 or bringing the ignition device

to STOP.

WARNING

123) When travelling with the device active,

never move the gear lever to neutral.

124) In case of a malfunction or failure of

the device, contact a Fiat Dealership.

125) The electronic Cruise Control can be

dangerous if the system cannot keep a

constant speed. In specific conditions

speed may be excessive, resulting in the

risk of losing control of the vehicle and

causing accidents. Do not use the device

in heavy traffic or on winding, icy, snowy or

slippery roads.

102

F1B0140C

128

STARTING AND DRIVING

ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL (ACC)

(where provided)

126) 127) 128) 129) 130) 131)

58) 59) 60) 61) 62) 63) 64)

DESCRIPTION

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a

driver assist device which combines the

Cruise Control functions with one for

controlling the distance from the vehicle

ahead.

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses

a radar sensor, located behind the front

bumper fig. 103 and a camera, located

in the middle of the windscreen fig. 104,

to detect the presence of a vehicle

close ahead.

There are two operating modes:

“Adaptive Cruise Control” mode

to maintain an adequate distance

between vehicles (the message

“Adaptive Cruise Control” is shown on

the instrument panel display);

electronic “Cruise Control” mode

to hold the vehicle at a constant

preset speed.

To change the operating mode, use the

button on the steering wheel (see that

described on the following pages).

ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL ACTIVATION/

DEACTIVATION

Activation

To activate the device, press and

release the

button (see figure).

IMPORTANT It is dangerous to leave

the device activated when it is not

used. There is a risk of inadvertently

activating it and losing control of the car

due to unexpected excessive speed.

Deactivation

With the device active, to deactivate it

press and release the

button. The

display will show a dedicated message.

SETTING THE DESIRED

SPEED

The device can only be set when the

speed is over 30 km/h (or equivalent

in mph) and under 160 km/h (or

equivalent in mph).

When the vehicle reaches the desired

speed, press and release the button

SET + or SET to set the speed to the

current speed. The display will show the

set speed. Then take your foot off the

accelerator pedal.

103

F1B0095C

104

F1B0096C

105

J0A0917C

129

When the system has been set, the

dedicated icon on the display (see

paragraph above) is grey on models

with a monochrome display, and green

on versions with a colour display.

IMPORTANT Press the accelerator

pedal to make the car go faster than

the set speed.

While the accelerator pedal is pressed:

a dedicated message is displayed for

a few seconds;

the device will not be able to control

the distance between the vehicle and

the one ahead. In this case the speed

will be determined only by the position

of the accelerator pedal.

The device will return to normal

operation as soon as the accelerator

pedal is released.

The system cannot be set

when pressing the brake pedal;

when the brakes are overheated;

when the electric parking brake is

engaged;

when the shift lever is in the P (park),

R (reverse) or N (neutral) positions

(versions with automatic transmission or

automatic transmission with double

clutch);

when the shift lever is in the R

(reverse), neutral or in 1

(first gear

engaged) positions (versions with

manual transmission);

when the clutch is pressed (versions

with manual transmission);

when the engine speed exceeds a

maximum threshold (versions with

manual transmission and versions with

automatic transmission/automatic

transmission with double clutch) or

goes below a minimum threshold (only

versions with manual transmission);

when the car speed is not within the

settable speed range;

when the ESC (or ABS or other

stability control systems) are operating

or have just operated;

when the ESC system is off;

during automatic braking by the Full

Brake Control system (where provided);

when the Speed Limiter is active;

when the electronic Cruise Control is

active;

in case of failure of the device;

when the engine is off;

in case of obstruction of the radar

sensor (in this case the bumper area

where it is located must be cleaned).

In case of system set, the conditions

described above also cause a

cancellation or deactivation of the

system with times that may vary

according to the conditions.

IMPORTANT With the device set, it is

possible to reach speeds higher than

those set in the system by pressing the

accelerator pedal. In this condition, the

device does not turn off automatically,

but the device functions are limited: it is

therefore recommended to turn it off.

CHANGING SPEED

Speed increase

After having set the device, the stored

speed can be stored by holding the

SET + button pressed.

Press the SET + button once: the set

speed will increase by 1 km/h (or the

equivalent in mph). Each touch of the

button once will increase the speed by

1 km/h (or the equivalent in mph).

Hold the SET + button down: the set

speed will increase in 10 km/h steps (or

the equivalent in mph) until the button is

released. The set speed increase is

shown on the display.

Decreasing speed

After having set the device, the stored

speed can be reduced by holding the

SET – button pressed.

Press the SET – button once: the set

speed will decrease by 1 km/h (or the

equivalent in mph). Each touch of the

button once will reduce the speed by

1 km/h (or the equivalent in mph).

130

STARTING AND DRIVING

Hold the SET – button down: the set

speed will decrease in 10 km/h steps

(or the equivalent in mph) until the

button is released. The set speed

decrease is shown on the display.

NOTE If you select “Sport” mode in

Drive Mode (or Mood Selector,

depending on the market), the ACC will

switch to sport mode: the system will

become more reactive when

accelerating.

ACCELERATING WHEN

OVERTAKING

When driving with the device active and

following a vehicle, the device provides

additional acceleration to facilitate

overtaking, when travelling over a given

speed and switches on the left direction

indicator (of the right indicator for

right-hand drive versions).

RECALLING THE SPEED

Once the system has been cancelled

but not deactivated, if a speed was

previously set simply press the RES

button and remove your foot from the

accelerator to recall it.

The system will be set to the last stored

speed.

Before returning to the previously set

speed, bring the speed close to that

value, then press the RES button and

release it.

SETTING THE DISTANCE

BETWEEN CARS

The distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle ahead may be set to 1 bar

(short), 2 bars (medium), 3 bars (long),

4 bars (maximum) fig. 106.

The distances from the vehicle ahead

are proportional to speed. The interval

of time with respect to the vehicle

ahead remains constant and varies

from 1 second (for the short distance

1-bar setting) to 2 seconds (for the

maximum distance 4-bar setting).

The setting is 4 (maximum) the first time

the device is used. After the distance

has been modified by the driver, the

new distance will be stored also after

the system is deactivated and

reactivated.

To decrease the distance

Press and release the

button to

decrease the distance setting.

The distance setting decreases by one

bar (shorter) every time the button is

pressed.

The set speed is held if there are no

cars ahead. Once the shortest distance

has been reached, a further press of

the button will set the longest distance.

The car holds the set distance until:

the vehicle ahead accelerates to a

speed higher than the set speed;

the vehicle ahead leaves the lane or

the detection field of the Adaptive

Cruise Control device sensor;

the distance setting is changed;

the Adaptive Cruise Control device is

deactivated/cancelled.

IMPORTANT The maximum breaking

applied by the device is limited. The

driver may apply the brakes in all cases

if needed.

106

F1B0299C

131

IMPORTANT If the device predicts that

the braking level is not sufficient to hold

the set distance, the driver is warned by

a message indicating that the vehicle

ahead is too close appears on the

display. An acoustic warning is also

emitted. In this case, it is advisable to

brake immediately as necessary to hold

a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

IMPORTANT The driver is responsible

for ensuring that there are no

pedestrians, other cars or objectives

along the direction of the car. Failure to

comply with these precautions may

cause serious accidents and injuries.

IMPORTANT The driver is fully

responsible for holding a safe distance

from the vehicle ahead respecting the

highway code in force in the respective

country.

DEACTIVATION

The device is deactivated and the set

speed is cancelled if:

the button is pressed on the

Adaptive Cruise Control;

the button is pressed on the

electronic Cruise Control;

the Speed Limiter button is pressed;

the ignition device is in the STOP

position.

The device is cancelled (the set speed

and distance are stored):

when the CANC button is pressed;

when the conditions shown in the

“Setting the desired speed” paragraph

occur;

when the car speed drops under the

minimum set speed (e.g. in presence of

slow cars).

If these conditions occur while the

system is decelerating with respect to a

vehicle ahead, the system could

continue the deceleration, if necessary,

also after it is cancelled or deactivated

within the minimum speed settable on

the system.

ELECTRONIC CRUISE

CONTROL MODE

Electronic Cruise Control mode is

available for travelling at constant speed

in addition to the Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC) mode.

If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

function is implemented on the vehicle,

the electronic Cruise Control works in

the same manner as the ACC (by

pressing the

button of the Cruise

Control) with the difference that:

it does not hold the distance from the

vehicle ahead;

the device keeps working if the radar

sensor is obstructed.

Before returning to the previously set

speed, bring the speed close to that

value, then press the RES button and

release it.

WARNING

126) Pay the utmost attention while driving

at all times and be always ready to press

the brakes if needed.

127) The system is an aid for the driver,

who must always pay full attention while

driving. The responsibility always rests with

the driver, who must take into account the

traffic conditions in order to drive in

complete safety. The driver must always

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in

front.

128) The device is not activated in

presence of pedestrians, oncoming

vehicles in the opposite direction of travel

or moving in the crosswise direction and

stationary objects (e.g. a vehicle standing

in a queue or a broken down vehicle).

129) The device cannot take account of

road, traffic and weather conditions, and

conditions of poor visibility (e.g. fog).

130) The device does not always fully

recognise complex driving conditions that

could cause it to determine the safe

distance to be held incorrectly or not at all.

131) The device cannot apply the

maximum braking force: the car will not be

stopped completely.

IMPORTANT

58) The system may have limited or absent

operation due to weather conditions such

as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow.

132

STARTING AND DRIVING

59) The section of the bumper before the

sensor must not be covered with

adhesives, auxiliary headlights or any other

object.

60) Operation can be adversely affected by

any structural change made to the vehicle,

such as a modification to the front

geometry, tyre change, or a heavier load

than the standard load of the vehicle.

61) Incorrect repairs made on the front part

of the car (e.g. bumper, chassis) may alter

the position of the radar sensor, and

adversely affect its operation. Go to a Fiat

Dealership for any operation of this type.

62) Do not tamper with or carry out any

intervention on the radar sensor or on the

camera on the windscreen. In the event of

a sensor fault, contact a Fiat Dealership.

63) Do not wash with high-pressure jets in

the bumper lower area: in particular do not

operate on the system's electrical

connector.

64) Be careful in the case of repairs and

new paintings in the area around the

sensor (panel covering the sensor on the

left side of the bumper). In the event of a

frontal impact the sensor may automatically

deactivate and display a warning to indicate

that the sensor needs to be repaired. Even

without a malfunction warning, deactivate

the system operation if you think that the

position of the radar sensor has changed

(e.g. due to low-speed frontal impact as

during parking manoeuvres). In these

cases, go to a Fiat Dealership to have the

radar sensor realigned or replaced.

MOOD SELECTOR /

DRIVE MODE (drive

mode selector)

(where provided)

This device allows drivers to select

three different driving modes ("car

response") according to their needs and

to the road and traffic conditions, by

manually adjusting the knob ring A

fig. 107 on the central tunnel.

- "Auto" mode

- "Traction" mode (4x4 or

4x2 versions depending on the trim

level)

- "All Weather" mode (only

4x2 versions depending on the trim

level)

- "Sport" mode.

The device, through the on-board

electronic system, operates on the

dynamic control systems of the car:

engine, steering, ESC system,

4x4 system (if available),

gearbox/transmission, and is interfaced

with the instrument panel.

The rotating ring nut is monostable

type. In other words, it always returns

to the central position when released.

107

F1B0044C

133

The acceptance by the system of the

requested driving mode is signalled by

the LED, located besides the symbol,

coming on, and by the corresponding

symbol appearing on the instrument

panel display.

When the engine is started, the system

usually maintains the driving mode that

was active before the engine was

stopped. For versions/markets where

provided, on start-up, the system is set

to the "Auto" mode.

"Auto" MODE

Recommended mode for normal

driving, aimed at comfort and safety in

normal grip and driving conditions. On

4x4 versions, this mode also reduces

fuel consumption, since it automatically

disconnects the transmission from the

rear wheels if the road and driving

conditions allow it, in addition to

changing drive torque distribution

between the front and rear axles.

Activation

Starting from the active "Traction/All

Weather" mode, turn the ring nut

anticlockwise, keeping it in this position

for at least half a second, and in any

case until the relevant LED turns on,

and the selected mode is shown on the

display. The LED for the previously set

mode will simultaneously turn off.

Upon release, the ring nut will return to

the central position.

Starting from the active "Sport" mode,

turn the ring nut clockwise, keeping it in

this position for at least half a second,

and in any case until the relevant LED

turns on, and the selected mode is

shown on the display. The LED for the

previously set mode will simultaneously

turn off. Upon release, the ring nut will

return to the central position.

"Traction"/"All Weather"

MODE

It is a driving mode for safety in poor

vehicle grip conditions (wet/slippery

road surface, rain, snow). On the

4x4 versions use is also recommended

on unsurfaced roads or off-road.

Activation

Starting from the active "Auto" mode,

turn the ring nut clockwise, keeping it in

this position for at least half a second,

and in any case until the relevant LED

turns on, and the selected mode is

shown on the display. The LED for the

previously set mode will simultaneously

turn off. Upon release, the ring nut will

return to the central position.

Starting from the active "Sport" mode,

turn the ring nut anticlockwise, keeping

it in this position for at least half a

second, and in any case until the

relevant LED turns on, and the selected

mode is shown on the display. The LED

for the previously set mode will

simultaneously turn off. Upon release,

the ring nut will return to the central

position.

"Sport" MODE

It is the mode that emphasises the

pleasure of sport driving; it increases

fuel consumption however. Traction is

optimised on 4x4 versions, allowing the

vehicle road-hold performance to be

improved, even on bends.

Activation

Starting from the active "Auto" mode,

turn the ring nut anticlockwise, keeping

it in this position for at least half a

second, and in any case until the

relevant LED turns on, and the selected

mode is shown on the display. The LED

for the previously set mode will

simultaneously turn off. Upon release,

the ring nut will return to the central

position.

134

STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting from the active "Traction/All

Weather" mode, turn the ring nut

clockwise, keeping it in this position for

at least half a second, and in any case

until the relevant LED turns on, and the

selected mode is shown on the display.

The LED for the previously set mode will

simultaneously turn off. Upon release,

the ring nut will return to the central

position.

FAULT INDICATIONS

In the case of system and selector

faults, the mode change option will be

automatically disabled. The system will

automatically set itself to "Auto" mode.

In these cases the display will show a

dedicated warning. Go to a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible to have

the system checked.

PARK ASSIST

SYSTEM

SENSORS

132)

65) 66) 67)

The parking sensors, located in the rear

bumper fig. 108, are used to detect the

presence of any obstacles near the rear

part of the vehicle.

The sensors warn the driver about the

presence of possible obstacles with an

intermittent acoustic signal and,

depending on the version, also with

visual indications on the instrument

panel display.

Activation

The sensors are automatically activated

when reverse gear is selected. As the

distance from the obstacle behind the

vehicle decreases, the frequency of the

acoustic signal increases.

Acoustic signal

When reverse is engaged and there is

an obstacle behind the vehicle, an

acoustic signal is activated and the

signal varies as the distance of the

obstacle from the bumper varies.

The frequency of the acoustic signal:

increases as the distance between

the vehicle and the obstacle decreases;

becomes continuous when the

distance separating the vehicle from the

obstacle is less than about 30 cm;

is constant if the distance between

the vehicle and the obstacle is

unchanged. If this situation concerns

the side sensors, the signal will stop

after approximately 3 seconds to avoid,

for example, indications in the event of

manoeuvres along a wall.

stops immediately if the distance of

the obstacle increases.

When the system emits the acoustic

signal, the volume of the Uconnect™

system is automatically lowered.

108

F1B0142C

135

Detection distances

If several obstacles are detected by the

sensors, only the nearest one is

considered.

Indication on display

The indications regarding the Park

Assist system are shown on the

instrument panel display only if the

"Acoustic signal and display" item in the

"Settings" menu of the Uconnect™

system is selected (for more

information, see the description in the

dedicated chapter).

The system indicates the presence of

an obstacle by displaying a single arc in

one of the possible areas, in

accordance with the distance of the

object and the position in relation to the

vehicle. If the obstacle is detected in the

rear central area, a single arc will be

displayed as the obstacle approaches,

first constant, then flashing, in addition

to an acoustic signal.

OPERATION WITH

TRAILER

68)

The operation of the sensors is

automatically deactivated when the

trailer's electrical connection is inserted

in the vehicle's tow hook socket.

Sensors are reactivated on removing

the trailer's electrical connection.

Before using the Park Assist system, it

is recommended to remove the tow

hook ball assembly and the relevant

attachment from the vehicle. Failure to

comply with this prescription may

cause personal injuries or damage to

vehicles or obstacles since, when the

continuous acoustic signal is emitted,

the tow hook ball is already in a position

that is much closer to the obstacle than

the rear bumper.

GENERAL WARNINGS

Some conditions may influence the

performance of the parking system:

reduced sensor sensitivity and a

reduction in the parking assistance

system performance could be due to

the presence of: ice, snow, mud, paint,

etc. on the surface of the sensor;

the sensor may detect a

non-existent obstacle ("echo

interference") due to mechanical

interference, for example when washing

the vehicle, in rain (strong wind), hail;

the signals sent by the sensor can

also be altered by the presence of

ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic

brake systems of trucks or pneumatic

drills) near the vehicle;

Parking assistance system

performance can also be influenced by

the position of the sensors, for example

due to a change in the ride setting

(caused by wear to the shock

absorbers, suspension), or by changing

tyres, overloading the vehicle or fitting

specific trims that require the vehicle to

be lowered;

the presence of a tow hook without

trailer, which may interfere with the

correct operation of the parking

sensors. If you wish to leave the tow

hook fitted without towing a trailer, it is

advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership

for the relevant Park Assist system

update operations because the tow

hook could be detected as an obstacle

by the central sensors.

the presence of adhesives on the

sensors. Therefore, take care not to

place adhesives on the sensors.

136

STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING

132) Parking and other potentially

dangerous manoeuvres are, however,

always the driver’s responsibility. When

performing these operations, always make

sure that there are no other people

(especially children) or animals on the route

you want to take. The parking sensors are

an aid for the driver, but the driver must

never allow their attention to lapse during

potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even

those executed at low speeds.

IMPORTANT

65) The sensors must be clean of mud,

dirt, snow or ice in order for the system to

operate correctly. Be careful not to scratch

or damage the sensors while cleaning

them. Avoid using dry, rough or hard

cloths. The sensors should be washed

using clean water with the addition of car

shampoo if necessary. When using special

washing equipment such as high pressure

jets or steam cleaning, clean the sensors

very quickly keeping the jet more than

10 cm away.

66) Have interventions on the bumper in

the area of the sensors carried out only by

a Fiat Dealership. Interventions on the

bumper that are not carried out properly

may compromise the operation of the

parking sensors.

67) Only have the bumpers repainted or

any retouches to the paintwork in the area

of the sensors carried out by a Fiat

Dealership. Incorrect paint application

could affect the operation of the parking

sensors.

68) The sensors may provide a false

indication, interpreting the tow hook ball

assembly and the relevant attachment as

an obstacle in the area behind the vehicle.

LANE ASSIST

SYSTEM (lane

crossing warning)

DESCRIPTION

69) 70) 71) 72) 73) 74)

The Lane Assist system makes use of a

camera located on the windscreen to

detect the lane limits and calculate the

position of the vehicle within such limits,

in order to make sure that it remains

inside the lane.

When both limits of the lane are

detected and the vehicle crosses one of

them without the awareness of the

driver (direction indicator off), the Lane

Assist system provides a tactile warning

by applying torque to the steering wheel

(vibration), thus advising the driver that

he must take an action to remain in the

lane.

IMPORTANT The torque applied to the

steering wheel by the system is

sufficient for the driver to notice it, but

always limited, so that they can easily

override it, and the driver always

maintains control of the vehicle. The

driver can therefore turn the steering

wheel as required at all times.

137

If the vehicle continues going beyond

the line of the lane without any

intervention from the driver, the

warning light (or the icon on the

display) will be displayed on the

instrument panel to urge the driver to

bring the vehicle back into the limits of

the lane.

IMPORTANT The system monitors the

presence of the driver's hands on the

steering wheel. If they are not detected,

the system emits an acoustic signal and

deactivates until it is reactivated by

pressing the dedicated button (see

description below).

When one limit of the lane is detected

and the vehicle crosses it (direction

indicator off), warning light

(or the

icon on the display) will be displayed on

the instrument panel to urge the driver

to bring the vehicle back into the lane.

In this case, the tactile warning

(vibration on the steering wheel) is not

provided.

SYSTEM ACT_IVATION/

DEACTIVATION

The Lane Assist system can be

enabled/disabled using button A

fig. 109, located on the left stalk.

Each time the engine is started, the

system keeps the activation status

there was when it was previously

switched off.

On some versions, a dedicated

message appears on the display when

it is activated and deactivated.

Activation conditions

Once switched on, the system

becomes active only if the following

conditions are met:

the driver always keeps at least one

hand on the steering wheel;

vehicle speed ranges between

60 km/h and 180 km/h;

the lane limit lines are perfectly visible

on both sides;

there are suitable visibility conditions;

the road is straight or with wide

radius bends;

a suitable distance is kept from the

vehicle in front;

the direction indicator (for leaving the

lane) is not active;

the lane limit lines are perfectly

visible on both sides (for activation of

the tactile warning only).

NOTE The system does not apply the

vibration to the steering wheel every

time a safety system is activated

(brakes, ABS, ASR system, ESC

system, Full Brake Control system,

etc.).

IMPORTANT

69) Projecting loads on the roof of the

vehicle may interfere with the correct

operation of the camera. Before starting

make sure the load is correctly positioned,

in order not to cover the camera operating

range.

70) If the windscreen must be replaced due

to scratches, chipping or breakage, contact

exclusively a Fiat Dealership. Do not

replace the windscreen on your own, risk of

malfunction! It is advisable to replace the

windscreen if it is damaged in the area of

the camera.

109

F1B0334C

138

STARTING AND DRIVING

71) Do not tamper with nor operate on the

camera. Do not close the openings in the

aesthetic cover located under the interior

rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of

the camera, contact a Fiat Dealership.

72) Do not cover the operating range of the

camera with stickers or other objects. Also

pay attention to other objects on the

bonnet (e.g. a layer of snow) and make

sure they do not interfere with the camera.

73) The camera may have limited or absent

operation due to weather conditions such

as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow,

formation of ice layers on the windscreen.

74) Camera operation may also be

compromised by the presence of dust,

condensation, dirt or ice on the

windscreen, by traffic conditions (e.g.

vehicles that are driving not aligned with

yours, vehicle driving in a transverse or

opposite way on the same lane, bend with

a small radius of curvature), by road

surface conditions and by driving

conditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make sure

the windscreen is always clean. Use

specific detergents and clean cloths to

avoid scratching the windscreen. The

camera operation may also be limited or

absent in some driving, traffic and road

surface conditions.

REAR VIEW CAMERA

DESCRIPTION

The camera A fig. 110 is located on the

tailgate.

133)

75)

Every time reverse is engaged, the

display fig. 111 shows the area around

the vehicle, as seen by the rear camera.

SYMBOLS AND

MESSAGES ON THE

DISPLAY

A superimposed central broken line

indicates the centre of the vehicle to

facilitate parking manoeuvres or tow

hook alignment. The various coloured

areas indicate the distance from the

rear of the vehicle.

The table below shows the approximate

distances for each area fig. 111:

Area

Distance from the

rear of the vehicle

Red (A) 0–30 cm

ellow (B) 30–100 cm

Green (C) 1 m or more

IMPORTANT When parking, take the

utmost care over obstacles that may be

above or under the camera range.

110

F1B0064C

111

F1B0167C

139

WARNING

133) Parking and other potentially

dangerous manoeuvres are, however,

always the driver’s responsibility. While

carrying out these manoeuvres, always

make sure that no people (especially

children) or animals are in the area

concerned. The camera is an aid for the

driver, but the driver must never allow

his/her attention to lapse during potentially

dangerous manoeuvres, even those

executed at low speeds. Always keep a

slow speed, so as to promptly brake in the

case of obstacles.

IMPORTANT

75) It is vital, for correct operation, that the

camera is always kept clean and free from

any mud, dirt, snow or ice. Be careful not

to scratch or damage the camera while

cleaning it. Avoid using dry, rough or hard

cloths. The camera must be washed using

clean water, with the addition of car

shampoo if necessary. In washing stations

which use steam or high-pressure jets,

clean the camera quickly, keeping the

nozzle more than 10 cm away from the

sensors. Also, do not apply stickers to the

camera.

TOWING TRAILERS

IMPORTANT

134) 135)

For towing caravans or trailers the

vehicle must be fitted with an approved

tow hook and an adequate electrical

system. Should aftermarket installation

be requested, this must be carried out

by specialists.

Install any specific and/or additional

door mirrors as specified by the

Highway Code.

Remember that when towing a trailer,

steep hills are harder to climb, braking

distances increase and overtaking takes

longer depending on the overall weight

of the trailer. Engage a low gear when

driving downhill, rather than constantly

using the brake. The weight the trailer

exerts on the vehicle tow hook reduces

the vehicle's loading capacity by the

same amount. To make sure that the

maximum towable weight is not

exceeded (given in the vehicle

registration document) account should

be taken of the fully laden trailer,

including accessories and luggage.

Do not exceed the speed limits specific

to each country you are driving in, in the

case of vehicles towing trailers. In any

case, the top speed must not exceed

100 km/h.

Any electric brake must be powered

directly by the battery through a cable

with a cross-section of no less than

2.5 mm

. In addition to the electrical

branches, the vehicle electrical system

can only be connected to the supply

cable for an electric brake and to the

cable for an internal light for the trailer,

not exceeding 15 W. For connections,

use the preset control unit with a

battery cable with section not less than

2.5 mm

. The use of auxiliary loads

other than external lights (e.g. electric

brake) must take place with engine

running.

140

STARTING AND DRIVING

INSTALLING A TOW

HOOK

The towing device should be fastened

to the body by specialised personnel

according to any additional and/or

integrative information supplied by the

Manufacturer of the device. It must also

meet current regulations with reference

to Directive 94/20/EC and subsequent

amendments.

For any version the towing device used

must be right for the towable weight of

the vehicle on which it is to be installed.

For the electrical connection a standard

connector should be used which is

generally placed on a special bracket

normally fastened to the towing device,

and a special ECU for external trailer

light control must be installed on the

vehicle. 7 or 13-pin 12 V DC

connections should be used

(CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards).

Follow any instructions provided by the

vehicle manufacturer and/or the towing

device manufacturer.

141

Assembly diagram

The tow hook structure must be secured to the body in the points shown in the figure fig. 112.

IMPORTANT To install a tow hook contact a Fiat Dealership.

112

F1B0168C

142

STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING

134) The ABS with which the car is

equipped will not control the braking

system of the trailer. Particular caution is

required on slippery roads.

135) Never modify the braking system of

the vehicle to control the trailer brake. The

trailer braking system must be fully

independent of the car’s hydraulic system.

143

REFUELLING THE

VEHICLE

136) 137) 138)

PETROL ENGINES

Only use unleaded petrol with a number

of octanes (R.O.N.) not lower than 95

(EN228 specification).

IMPORTANT Never introduce leaded

petrol to the tank, even in small

amounts in an emergency, as this

would damage the catalytic converter

beyond repair.

DIESEL ENGINES

76)

Only use Diesel for motor vehicles (EN

590 specification).

When using or parking the vehicle for a

long time in the mountains or cold

areas, it is advisable to refuel using

locally available diesel. In this case, it is

also advisable to keep the tank over

50% full.

LPG ENGINES

The gas filler is located next to the

petrol filler cap. It has a check valve,

located in the filler body itself.

To access the LPG filler, open the

access flap A fig. 113and undo the cap

Observe the following precautions

during the refuelling operation:

switch off the engine;

engage the electric parking brake;

put the ignition device in the STOP

position;

do not smoke;

hand the special adapter A

fig. 114over to the qualified LPG

refuelling personnel.

IMPORTANT Depending on the country,

there are various types of adapters for

LPG refuelling pumps. The filler adapter

A fig. 114, supplied with the vehicle and

located in a special case, is specifically

designed for the country in which the

vehicle is sold. If you are in a different

country, find out what type of adaptor is

used there.

113

F1B0614C

114

F1B0615C

144

STARTING AND DRIVING

IMPORTANT Before refuelling with LPG,

the qualified personnel must make sure

that the adapter is correctly screwed

onto the filler.

IMPORTANT Look after the LPG

adapter carefully so that it does not get

damaged.

IMPORTANT Only use LPG for motor

vehicles.

IMPORTANT Only use the adapter

supplied with the vehicle as it is

equipped with a dedicated fuel

pre-filter.

REFUELLING

PROCEDURE

"Capless Fuel" is a device at the

opening for the fuel tank which opens

and re-closes automatically when the

fuel supply gun is introduced/removed.

The "Capless Fuel" device is provided

with an inhibitor which prevents

refuelling with incorrect fuel.

Opening the flap

To refuel proceed as follows:

open the flap A fig. 115 after

releasing it by pressing in the point

shown;

introduce the dispenser in the filler

and refuel;

after refuelling, before removing the

dispenser, wait for at least 10 seconds

in order for the fuel to flow inside the

tank;

then remove the dispenser from the

filler and close flap A.

The flap is provided with a dust cover

gaiter B which prevents deposits of

impurities and dust at the end of the

filler when the flap is closed.

Emergency refuelling

Proceed as follows:

open the boot and take adaptor C

fig. 116, located in the tool box or in the

Fix&Go kit container (according to the

versions);

open flap A fig. 115, as described

previously;

introduce the adaptor in the filler as

shown and refuel;

after refuelling, remove the adapter

and close the flap;

finally refit the adaptor in the boot.

Fuel - Vehicle

compatibility

identification Graphic

symbol for informing

consumers in

accordance with

EN16942

The symbols shown below facilitated

recognising the correct fuel type to be

used on your car.

Before proceeding with refuelling, check

the symbols inside the fuel filler flap

(where provided) and compare them

with the symbols shown on the fuel

pump (where provided).

115

F1B0164C

116

F1B0165C

145

Symbols for petrol powered cars

E5: Unleaded petrol containing up to

2.7% (m/m) oxygen and with maximum

5.0% (V/V) ethanol compliant with

EN228

E10: Unleaded petrol containing up to

3.7% (m/m) oxygen and with maximum

10.0% (V/V) ethanol compliant with

EN228

Symbols for diesel powered cars

B7: Diesel containing up to 7% (V/V) of

FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)

compliant with the EN590 specification

B10: Diesel containing up to 10% (V/V)

of FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)

compliant with the EN16734

specification

Symbols for petrol/LPG bi-fuel cars

E5: Unleaded petrol containing up to

2.7% (m/m) oxygen and with maximum

5.0% (V/V) ethanol compliant with

EN228

E10: Unleaded petrol containing up to

3.7% (m/m) oxygen and with maximum

10.0% (V/V) ethanol compliant with

EN228

LPG: Automotive LPG compliant with

EN589

WARNING

136) Do not apply any object/plug to the

end of the filler which is not provided for

the car. The use of non-compliant

objects/plugs could cause a pressure

increase inside the tank, resulting in

dangerous situations.

137) Do not bring naked flames or lit

cigarettes near to the fuel filler: fire risk.

Keep your face away from the fuel filler to

prevent breathing in harmful vapours.

138) Do not use a mobile phone near the

refuelling pump: risk of fire.

IMPORTANT

76) Vehicles with a diesel engine must only

be filled with diesel fuel for motor vehicles,

in compliance with European Standard EN

590. The use of other products or mixtures

may damage the engine beyond repair and

consequently invalidate the warranty, due

to the damage caused. If you accidentally

introduce other types of fuel into the tank,

do not start the engine. Empty the tank. If

the engine has been run for even an

extremely limited amount of time, you must

not only drain the fuel tank, but the rest of

the supply circuit as well.

146

STARTING AND DRIVING

IN AN EMERGENCY

A punctured tyre or a burnt-out bulb?

At times, a problem may interfere with

our journey.

The pages on emergencies can help

you to deal with critical situations

independently and with calm.

In an emergency we recommend that

you call the freephone number found in

the Warranty Booklet.

It is also possible to call the national or

international universal freephone

number to search for the nearest Fiat

Dealership.

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS .....148

BULB REPLACEMENT.........148

REPLACING FUSES ..........154

CHANGING A WHEEL .........159

FIX&GO AUTOMATIC KIT .......163

EMERGENCY STARTING .......166

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM .......168

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION -

LEVER UNLOCK ............168

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION -

KEY REMOVAL .............169

DUAL CLUTCH AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION - LEVER

UNLOCK .................170

DUAL CLUTCH AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION - REMOVING

THEKEY .................171

TOWING THE VEHICLE ........172

147

HAZARD WARNING

LIGHTS

CONTROL

Press the button fig. 117 to switch the

lights on/off.

When the hazard warning lights are on,

the

and warning lights flash.

IMPORTANT The use of hazard warning

lights is governed by the highway code

of the country you are driving in:

comply with legal requirements.

Emergency braking

In the event of emergency braking the

hazard warning lights switch on

automatically as well as warning lights

and in the instrument panel.

The lights switch off automatically when

emergency braking ceases.

BULB

REPLACEMENT

139) 140) 141) 142)

77)

GENERAL

INSTRUCTIONS

Before replacing a bulb check the

contacts for oxidation;

replace blown bulbs with others of

the same type and power;

after replacing a headlight bulb,

always check its alignment;

when a light is not working, check

that the corresponding fuse is intact

before replacing the bulb. For the

location of fuses, refer to the paragraph

“Replacing fuses” in this chapter.

IMPORTANT When the weather is cold

or damp or after heavy rain or washing,

the surface of headlights or rear lights

may steam up and/or form drops of

condensation on the inside. This is a

natural phenomenon due to the

difference in temperature and humidity

between the inside and the outside of

the glass which does not indicate a

fault and does not compromise the

normal operation of lighting devices.

The mist disappears quickly when the

lights are turned on, starting from the

centre of the diffuser, extending

progressively towards the edges.

117

F1B0632C

148

IN AN EMERGENCY

TYPES OF BULBS

The vehicle is equipped with the following bulbs:

Glass bulbs (type A):

they are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-type bulbs (type B): to remove them from their holder,

press the bulb and turn it anticlockwise, then extract it.

Tubular bulbs (type C): release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen bulbs (type D): to remove the bulb, turn the connector to

the side and pull it out.

Halogen bulbs (type E): to remove the bulb, turn it anticlockwise.

Xenon gas discharge bulb (type F): to remove the bulb, contact a

Fiat Dealership.

149

Light bulbs Type Power Figure reference

Front side lights/Daytime running lights (DRL) W21W 21W B

Rear

side/brake light P21W 21W B

Main beam/dipped beam headlights (halogen) H4 60/55W D

Main beam/dipped beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25W F

Front direction indicators PY21W 21W B

Rear direction indicators P21W 21W B

Side direction indicators (on door mirror) WY5W 5W A

Third brake light LED – –

Number plate W5W 5W A

Fog lights H8 35W E

Rear fog light P21W 21W B

Reversing light P21W 21W B

Front ceiling light C5W 5W A

Front roof lights (sun visors) C5W 5W A

Rear ceiling light (versions without sunroof) XENON 6W A

Rear ceiling lights (versions with sunroof) C5W 5W C

Boot ceiling lights W5W 5W A

150

IN AN EMERGENCY

REPLACING AN

EXTERNAL BULB

Dipped/main beam headlights

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

working from inside the engine

compartment, remove the rubber cap A

fig. 118, using the dedicated tab;

turn the bulb and bulb holder

assembly anticlockwise and then

remove it sliding it outwards;

disconnect the electrical connector B

and replace the bulb C.

then insert the bulb and bulb holder

assembly in its housing and turn it

clockwise, making sure that it is locked

correctly;

refit the rubber cap A.

IMPORTANT Only replace the bulb

when the engine is off. Also ensure that

the engine is cold, to prevent the risk of

burns.

Xenon gas discharge main

beam/dipped beam headlights

For replacing these bulbs, contact a

Fiat Dealership.

Side lights/daytime running lights

(DRL)

To replace the bulbs, proceed as

follows:

steer the car wheels completely

inwards;

undo screws A fig. 119 using the

screwdriver provided and remove

inspection flap B;

identify the side light/daytime running

light bulb;

turn the bulb and bulb holder

assembly anticlockwise and then

remove it sliding it outwards;

replace the bayonet-fitted bulb A

fig. 120;

finally, refit the inspection flap B

fig. 119, fully tightening fixing screws A.

Front direction indicators

To replace the bulbs, proceed as

follows:

steer the car wheels completely

inwards;

undo screws A fig. 119 using the

screwdriver provided and remove

inspection flap B;

identify the direction indicator bulb;

turn the bulb and bulb holder

assembly anticlockwise and then

remove it sliding it outwards;

replace the bayonet-fitted bulb A

fig. 120;

finally, refit the inspection flap B

fig. 119, fully tightening fixing screws A.

Fog lights

To replace the bulbs, proceed as

follows:

steer the car wheels completely

inwards;

118

F1B0146C

119

F1B0147

120

F1B0253C

151

undo screws A fig. 119 using the

screwdriver provided and remove

inspection flap B;

identify the fog light;

turn the bulb and bulb holder

assembly anticlockwise and then

remove it sliding it outwards;

disconnect the electrical connector;

replace the bulb-bulb holder

assembly B fig. 120;

reconnect the electrical connector to

the new bulb-bulb holder; then insert it

making sure it is locked correctly;

insert the assembly by turning it

clockwise and locking it correctly;

finally, refit the inspection flap B

fig. 119, fully tightening fixing screws A.

Side turn light

IMPORTANT The procedure is

described by way of example only. It is

advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership

for bulb replacement.

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

remove the cap B fig. 121 from the

door mirror very carefully (use a suitable

tool to prevent damaging the painted

parts) around the mirror frame (as

shown in the figure);

remove the lens A and then remove

the bulb C pulling it from the respective

bulb holder.

fit the new bulb, making sure it is

correctly locked;

refit the bulb holder on lens A;

refit cap B on the door mirror

correctly, ensuring that it locks correctly.

Rear light cluster

To replace the bulbs, proceed as

follows:

open the tailgate;

using the tool A fig. 122 provided

(located in the on-board document

pouch), undo the two screws A

fig. 123, then release the light cluster

from the respective pin fasteners pulling

it carefully;

disconnect the central connector B,

then undo the two screws C;

121

F1B0149C

122

F1B0022C

123

F1B0151C

124

F1B0152C

152

IN AN EMERGENCY

release the tabs shown by the arrows

and extract the bulb holder assembly D

fig. 124;

identify the bulb to be replaced

(1 Positions/Stop - 2 Direction indicator

- 3 Rear fog light (where provided) or

Reverse);

all bulbs are "bayonet-fitted"; to

replace them, press slightly and turn at

the same time: anticlockwise to extract;

clockwise to insert;

reposition the bulb holder assembly

D correctly in the headlight body;

proceed until you hear the tabs click;

fasten the two screws C fig. 123 and

reconnect the central connector B;

refit the lens by screwing the two

screws A completely;

close the tailgate.

brake lights

The 3

brake lights are LED-based. To

replace them, contact a Fiat Dealership.

Number plate lights

To replace the bulbs, proceed as

follows:

using the screwdriver provided,

remove the lenses A fig. 125 working in

the point shown;

turn the bulb holder B

fig. 126 anticlockwise, extract the bulb

C and replace it.

finally, refit the lenses.

NOTE Before removing the lens unit,

put a protection (e.g. cloth) on the tip of

the screwdriver, in order not to damage

the lens itself.

WARNING

139) Before replacing the bulb, wait for the

exhaust ducts to cool down: DANGER OF

SCALDING!

140) Modifications or repairs to the electric

system that are not carried out properly or

do not take the system technical

specifications into account can cause

malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

141) Halogen bulbs contain pressurised

gas, in the case of breakage they may

burst causing glass fragments to be

projected outwards.

142) Only replace the light bulbs when the

engine is off and in a position that does not

interfere with traffic and lets you safely

replace them (see the description in the

“Replacement” paragraph). Also ensure

that the engine is cold, to prevent the risk

of burns.

IMPORTANT

77) Halogen bulbs must be handled

holding the metallic part only. Touching the

transparent part of the bulb with your

fingers may reduce the intensity of the

emitted light and even reduce the lifespan

of the bulb. In the event of accidental

contact, wipe the bulb with a cloth

moistened with alcohol and let the bulb dry.

125

F1B0153C

126

F1B0154C

153

REPLACING FUSES

INTRODUCTION

143) 144) 145) 146)

78) 79)

Fuses protect the electrical system:

they intervene (blow) in the event of a

failure or improper action on the

system.

Fuse extracting pliers

To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked

to the side of the engine compartment

fuse box cover (see fig. 127 ).

The pliers have two different ends,

specifically designed to remove the

different types of fuses present in the

vehicle.

To take out the pliers, grab them from

the upper tabs, press and pull upwards.

After being used, the pliers should be

positioned properly in their housing,

grabbing them from the upper tabs,

pressing and pushing them until a click

is heard.

FUSE LOCATION

Fuses are grouped together in the fuse

boxes located in the engine

compartment, under the dashboard

and inside the boot.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

FUSE BOX

The fuse box is located by the side of

the battery fig. 128.

To access the fuses, proceed as

follows:

fully tighten screw A fig. 129, using

the screwdriver provided;

at the same time slowly rotate the

screw anticlockwise, until resistance is

encountered (do not overtighten);

slowly release the screw;

opening is indicated by the entire

screw head coming out of its housing;

127

F1B0187C

128

F1B0191C

154

IN AN EMERGENCY

remove cover B, sliding it upwards

on the side guides, as indicated in the

figure.

The number identifying the electrical

component corresponding to each fuse

is shown on the cover.

Once the fuse has been replaced,

proceed as follows:

correctly refit the cover B in the side

guides of the casing;

slide it down completely from the

top;

fully tighten screw A, using the

screwdriver provided;

at the same time slowly rotate the

screw clockwise, until resistance is

encountered (do not overtighten);

slowly release the screw;

closure is indicated by the securing

of the entire screw head in its housing.

DASHBOARD FUSE BOX

The fuse box fig. 130 is located near

the left side of the steering column and

the fuses can be accessed easily from

the lower part of the dashboard.

For fuse replacement, contact a Fiat

Dealership.

BOOT FUSE BOX

Open inspection cover A fig. 131 and

access the fuses in fuse box B fig. 132.

129

F1B0190C

130

F1B0193C

131

F1B0194C

155

156

IN AN EMERGENCY

132

F1B0195C

ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX

USERS FUSE AMPERE

Horn F10

Power supply for cigar lighter/power socket F84 20

DASHBOARD FUSE BOX

USERS FUSE AMPERE

Front electric window (passenger side) F33 20

ont electric window (driver side) F34 20

Power supply to Uconnect

™ system, Climate Control System,

Rear-view mirror folding system, EOBD system, USB / AUX port,

Rear side roof light (convertible version)

F36 15

Dead Lock device (Driver side door unlocking for

versions/markets, where provided)/Door unlocking/Central

locking/Electric tailgate unlocking

F38 20

Rear left electric window F47 20

Rear right electric window F48 20

157

BOOT FUSE BOX

NOTE The configuration of the boot may vary in accordance with the equipment on the vehicle.

Fuse box B

USERS FUSE AMPERE

HI-FI system F2 20

Electric

sun roof F3 20

Front seat electric lumbar adjustment (driver guide) F4 7.5

Electric front seat adjustment (driver side) F5 30

Electric front seat adjustment (driver side and passenger side) F6 7.5

Electric front seat lumbar adjustment (driver side and passenger

side)

F7 30

158

IN AN EMERGENCY

WARNING

143) If the replaced fuse blows again,

contact a Fiat Dealership.

144) Never replace a fuse with another

with a higher amp rating; DANGER OF

FIRE

145) If a fuse NOT indicated in this or the

previous page is used, contact a Fiat

Dealership.

146) Before replacing a fuse, make sure

that the ignition device is at STOP, that the

key, if mechanical, has been removed and

that all devices are switched off and/or

disconnected.

IMPORTANT

78) Never replace a fuse with metal wires

or anything else.

79) If it is necessary to wash the engine

compartment, take care not to directly hit

the fuse box and the window wiper motor

with the water jet.

CHANGING A WHEEL

JACK

154) 155)

Please note that:

the jack weight is 2.8 kg;

the jack requires no adjustment;

the jack cannot be repaired and in

the event of a fault it must be replaced

by another genuine one;

no tool other than its cranking device

may be fitted on the jack.

Maintenance

prevent any dirt from depositing on

the "worm screw";

keep the "worm screw" lubricated;

never modify the jack.

Conditions for non-use

temperatures below −40°C;

on sandy or muddy ground;

on uneven ground;

on steep roads;

in extreme weather conditions:

thunderstorms, typhoons, hurricanes,

blizzards, storms, etc...

in direct contact with the engine or

for repairs under the car;

on boats.

CHANGING PROCEDURE

147) 148) 149) 150) 151) 152) 153)

Proceed as follows:

stop the car in a position that is not

dangerous for oncoming traffic where

you can change the wheel safely. The

ground must be flat and sufficiently

compact;

stop the engine, engage the hazard

warning lights and the electric parking

brake;

engage first gear or reverse or, for

versions with automatic transmission,

move the lever to position P (Park);

wear the reflective safety jacket

(compulsory by law) before getting out

of the car;

open the luggage compartment and

set the adjustable load platform in the

diagonal position (see "Luggage

Compartment" section of the "Getting

to know your car" chapter);

take out the tool bag supplied,

anchored to the boot mat by special

fasteners. The bag contains fig. 133:

jack A; screwdriver B; adaptor C for

refuelling in the event of an emergency;

pin D for centring the wheel (where

provided, to be used in the spare wheel

fitting procedure); special anti-theft nut

E (where provided, to be used in the

wheel stud bolt fitting/removal

procedure); chock F for blocking the

159

wheels and the vehicle; tow hook G;

key H for the wheel stud bolts and the

jack; Allen key I for emergency

operation of the sun roof (where

provided);

lift up the mat A fig. 134 and take out

the space-saver spare wheel B;

position the spare wheel and tool

bag next to the wheel for changing;

take the chock A (where provided)

fig. 135 and fold it out as shown in the

diagram;

place the chock A on the wheel

diagonally opposite the one to be

replaced (see fig. 136 ) to prevent the

car from moving irregularly when it is

lifted from the ground;

using the spanner A fig. 137, loosen

the fixing stud bolts by about one turn.

For versions with alloy rims it is a good

idea to "shake" the car to facilitate

detachment of the rim from the wheel

hub.

position the jack under the car, near

the wheel to be changed;

133

F1B0218C

134

F1B0219C

135

F1B0220C

136

F1B0221C

137

F1B0223C

160

IN AN EMERGENCY

until the top splined area fits correctly

into the side member C of the car, next

to the

symbol on the side member

itself;

alert any bystander that the car is

about to be raised; all persons should

be kept away from the car and nobody

must touch it until it has been lowered;

use the wrench A to turn the jack

(clockwise) and raise the car until the

wheel is a few centimetres off the

ground;

with the wrench A, completely

unscrew the stud bolts and remove the

wheel with the puncture;

make sure the contact surfaces

between space-saver wheel and hub

are clean so that the mounting stud

bolts will not come loose;

to simplify fitting of the space-saver

spare wheel, screw the centring pin into

the highest hole in the wheel hub then

fit the wheel, screwing on the first stud

bolt by hand for at least two turns of

the thread;

remove the centring pin and screw

on the other stud bolts by hand;

using the wrench A, screw down all

the stud bolts.

turn the wrench A (anticlockwise) on

the hexagonal part of the jack to lower

the car, then extract the jack;

use the wrench A to fully tighten all

the stud bolts, working in a criss-cross

fashion as per the numerical sequence

illustrated in fig. 139;

place the wheel with the puncture in

the luggage compartment upside down

(with the finished side facing upwards),

then put the jack and the tools used

away in the correct positions;

replace the mat in the luggage

compartment, then return the

adjustable load platform to the level

position (see "Luggage Compartment"

section of the "Getting to know your

car" chapter);

Restore the standard wheel as soon as

possible, also because, since it is larger

than the space-saver spare wheel,

when it is placed in the relative

compartment the floor of the luggage

compartment becomes slightly uneven.

CHANGING A WHEEL

(versions with

subwoofer)

Versions with space-saver wheel

On these versions, the tools for

replacing the wheel are located in a

dedicated bag in the luggage

compartment.

In the case of a puncture, proceed as

follows:

open the luggage compartment and

then lift up the mat;

unscrew the locking device A

fig. 140, remove the space-saver spare

wheel B and fit it in place of the

punctured tyre, carrying out the

procedures described previously.

138

F1B0224C

139

F1B0225C

161

insert the wrench A fig. 138 on the

hexagonal part of the jack B to extend it

When the operation is completed, lower

the luggage compartment mat and

position the punctured tyre on top of it,

ensuring that it is locked correctly so

that it doesn’t move during driving.

Versions with “Fix&Go Automatic”

kit

To find the “Fix&Go Automatic” kit,

open the luggage compartment then lift

up the mat: the kit A fig. 141 is located

on the right-hand side.

WARNING

147) If left in the passenger compartment,

the punctured wheel and jack constitute a

serious risk to the safety of occupants in

the event of accidents or sharp braking.

Therefore, always place both the jack and

punctured wheel in the dedicated housing

in the boot.

148) It is extremely dangerous to attempt

to change a wheel on the side of the

vehicle next to the driving lane: make sure

that the vehicle is at a sufficient distance

from the road, to avoid being run over.

149) Alert other drivers that the car is

stationary in compliance with local

regulations: hazard warning lights, warning

triangle, etc. Any passengers on board

should leave the car, especially if it is

heavily laden. Passengers should stay

away from on-coming traffic while the

wheel is being changed. For safety

reasons, always block the wheels with the

chocks provided.

150) The vehicle's driving characteristics

will be modified with the space-saver wheel

fitted. Avoid violent acceleration and

braking, abrupt steering and fast cornering.

The overall duration of the space-saver

wheel is about 3000 km, after which the

relevant tyre must be replaced with another

one of the same type. Never install a

standard tyre on a rim that is designed for

use with a space-saver wheel. Have the

wheel repaired and refitted as soon as

possible. Using two or more space-saver

wheels at the same time is forbidden. Do

not grease the threads of the stud bolts

before fitting them: they might slip out

when driving!

151) The space-saver wheel is specific to

your vehicle: do not use it on other models,

or use the space-saver wheel of other

models on your vehicle. The space-saver

wheel must only be used in the event of an

emergency. Never use it for more than

strictly necessary and never exceed

80 km/h. On the space-saver wheel there

is an orange label, summarising the main

warnings regarding space-saver wheel

usage restrictions. Never remove or cover

the sticker.

152) The space-saver wheel cannot be

fitted with snow chains. If a front (drive) tyre

is punctured and chains are needed, use a

standard wheel from the rear axle and

install the space-saver wheel on the rear

axle. In this way, with two normal drive

wheels at the front axle, it is possible to

use snow chains (this instruction is also

valid for 4x4 versions).

140

F1B0453C

141

F1B0452C

162

IN AN EMERGENCY

153) Never tamper with the inflation valve.

Never introduce tools of any kind between

the rim and the tyre. Check tyre and

space-saver wheel pressures regularly,

complying with the values given in the

"Technical specifications" chapter.

154) The jack is a tool developed and

designed only for changing a wheel, if a

tyre gets punctured or damaged, on the

vehicle with which it is supplied or on other

vehicles of the same model. Any other use,

e.g. to jack up other vehicle models or

different things, is strictly prohibited. Never

use it to carry out maintenance or repairs

under the vehicle or to change

summer/winter wheels and vice versa: we

advise you to contact a Fiat Dealership.

Never go under the raised vehicle: use it

only in the positions indicated. Do not use

the jack for loads higher than the one

shown on its label. Never start the engine

with car raised. If the car is raised more

than necessary, everything can become

more unstable, with the risk of the car

dropping violently. Thus, lift the car only as

needed in order to access the space-saver

spare wheel.

155) When turning the jack handle make

sure that it can turn freely without scraping

your hand against the ground. The moving

components of the jack ("worm screw" and

joints) can also cause injuries: do not touch

them. If you come into contact with

lubricating grease, clean yourself

thoroughly.

FIX&GO AUTOMATIC

KIT

(where provided)

156) 157)

80)

DESCRIPTION

The Fix&Go quick tyre repair kit

fig. 142 is located in the boot, inside a

dedicated container and consists of:

one cartridge 1 containing sealant

and fitted with: transparent tube for

injecting the sealant 4 and sticker 3 with

the wording “Max. 80 km/h” to be

placed in a clearly visible position (e.g.

on the dashboard) after repairing the

tyre;

one compressor 2;

one leaflet containing instructions for

using the kit;

a pair of gloves located in the hose

compartment of the cartridge 4.

REPAIR PROCEDURE

Proceed as follows:

stop the car in a position that is not

dangerous for oncoming traffic where

you can carry out the procedure safely.

The ground must be flat and sufficiently

compact;

stop the engine, engage the hazard

warning lights and the parking brake;

wear the reflective safety jacket

before getting out of the car (anyway

comply with the laws in force in the

country you are driving in);

Insert the cartridge 1 containing the

sealant in the proper compartment of

the compressor 2, pressing it down

hard fig. 142. Remove the speed limit

sticker 3 and apply it in a clearly visible

position fig. 143;

142

P2000158

163

wear the gloves;

remove the cap from the tyre valve

and connect and firmly tighten the

transparent tube of the sealing fluid 4

fig. 142. If a 250 ml cartridge is present

the housing of the transparent tube is

provided with removable ring to

facilitate extraction. Make sure that the

ON-OFF button 5 fig. 144 is in the off

position (button not pressed);

insert the electrical connector 6

fig. 145 into the 12V socket on the car;

operate the compressor by pressing

the ON-OFF button 5 fig. 144. When

the pressure shown in the Owner

Handbook or on the specific label

appears on the pressure gauge 7, stop

the compressor by pressing the

ON-OFF button 5 again;

disconnect the cartridge 1 from the

compressor, by pressing the release

button 8 and lifting the cartridge

1 upwards fig. 146.

If the pressure gauge 7

fig. 144 indicates a pressure lower than

1.8 bar / 26 psi 15 minutes after

starting the compressor, switch off the

compressor, disconnect the sealing

fluid tube 4 from the tyre valve and

remove the cartridge 1 from the

compressor fig. 146.

Move the car by approximately 10 m to

distribute the sealant; stop the car

safely, engage the handbrake and use

the black inflation pipe 9 fig. 147 to

reach the required pressure. If also in

this case, the pressure is lower than

1.8 bar / 26 psi after 15 minutes, do not

resume driving but contact a Fiat

Dealership.

143

P2000162

144

P2000160

145

P2000159

146

P2000161

164

IN AN EMERGENCY

After driving for about 8 km / 5 miles,

position the car in a safe and suitable

area and engage the handbrake. Take

the compressor and restore pressure

using the black inflation tube 9 fig. 147.

If the pressure shown is higher than

1.8 bar / 26 psi, restore the pressure

and drive safely to a Fiat Dealership as

soon as possible. If, however, the

pressure is lower than 1.8 bar / 26 psi,

do not resume driving but contact a Fiat

Dealership.

INFLATION PROCEDURE

Proceed as follows:

stop the car safely, as described

above, and operate the handbrake;

extract the black inflation tube 9

fig. 147 and screw it firmly onto the tyre

valve. Follow the instructions shown in

fig. 145 and fig. 147.

Press the air release button 10

fig. 144 to adjust any tyre overpressure.

CARTRIDGE

REPLACEMENT

Proceed as follows:

only use original Fix&Go cartridges,

which can be purchased from the Fiat

Dealership.

to remove the cartridge 1 fig. 142,

press the release button 8 fig. 146 and

lift it.

WARNING

156) The information required by the

applicable regulation is indicated on the

Fix&Go kit package label. Carefully read the

label on the cartridge before use, avoid

improper use. The kit should be used by

adults and cannot be used by children.

157) IMPORTANT: Do not exceed 80 km/h.

Avoid sudden acceleration or braking. The

kit provides a temporary repair, therefore

the tyre must be examined and repaired by

a specialist as soon as possible. Before

using the kit, ensure that the tyre is not

excessively damaged and that the rim is in

good condition, otherwise do not use it

and call roadside assistance. Do not

remove foreign bodies from the tyre. Do

not let the compressor turned on for more

than 20 consecutive minutes - overheating

hazard.

IMPORTANT

80) The sealant is effective with external

temperatures of between -40°C and

+55°C. The sealant has an expiry date. It is

possible to repair tyres which have been

damaged on tread up to a diameter of

6 mm. Show the cartridge and the label to

the personnel charged with handling the

tyre treated with the tyre repair kit.

147

P2000163

165

EMERGENCY

STARTING

81)

If the battery is flat, a jump starting can

be performed using the battery and the

cables of another vehicle, or using an

auxiliary battery. In all cases, the battery

used must have a capacity equal to or

a little higher than the flat one.

IMPORTANT

Do not use an auxiliary battery or any

other source of external supply with a

voltage above 12 V: the battery, the

starter, the alternator and the electrical

system of the vehicle could be

damaged.

Do not attempt jump starting if the

battery is frozen. The battery could

break and explode!

JUMP STARTING

The vehicle battery is located in the

engine compartment, behind the left

light cluster.

158) 159) 160) 161)

IMPORTANT The positive terminal (+) of

the battery is shielded by a protective

element. Raise it to access the terminal.

Proceed as follows:

operate the parking brake, move the

lever to P (Park), for versions equipped

with automatic transmission, or neutral,

for versions with manual gearbox, then

set the ignition device to STOP;

switch off all the other electrical

appliances in the vehicle;

should you be using the battery of

another vehicle, park the other vehicle

within the range of the cables used for

the connection, operate the parking

brake and ensure that its ignition is off.

IMPORTANT If the procedure below is

carried out incorrectly, it can cause

severe injury to people or damage the

recharging system of one or both

vehicles. Carefully follow the

instructions given below.

Cable connection

82)

Proceed as follows to carry out bump

starting fig. 148:

connect one end of the cable used

for positive (+) to the positive terminal

(+) of the vehicle with flat battery;

connect the other end of the cable

used for positive (+) to the positive

terminal (+) of the auxiliary battery;

connect one end of the cable used

for negative (–) to the negative terminal

(–) of the auxiliary battery;

Connect the other end of the cable

used for negative (–) to an engine earth

(a visible metal part of the engine or

gearbox/transmission of the vehicle

with flat battery) away from the battery

and the fuel injection system;

148

F1B0217C

166

IN AN EMERGENCY

start the vehicle engine with the

auxiliary battery, let it run for a few

minutes at idling. Start the engine of the

vehicle with flat battery.

Cable disconnection.

Once the engine is started, remove the

leads, reversing the order above.

If after a few attempts the engine does

not start, do not persist but contact a

Fiat Dealership.

If it is often necessary to perform an

emergency starting, have the vehicle

battery and the recharging system

checked by a Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT Any accessories (e.g.

mobile phones, etc.) connected to the

vehicle power sockets, draw current

even if they are not used. These

devices, if left connected too much time

with engine off, may cause the battery

to drain with following reduction of its

life and/or failure to start the engine.

WARNING

158) Before opening the bonnet, make

sure that the engine is off and that the

ignition key is in the STOP position. Follow

the indications on the plate underneath the

bonnet. We recommend that you remove

the key from the ignition if other people

remain in the vehicle. The vehicle should

always be left after the key has been

removed or turned to the STOP position.

During refuelling, make sure that the engine

is off (and that the ignition key is in the

STOP position).

159) Do not get too close to the radiator

cooling fan: the electric fan may start;

danger of injury. Scarves, ties and other

loose clothing might be pulled by moving

parts.

160) Remove any metal objects (e.g. rings,

watches, bracelets), that might cause an

accidental electrical contact and cause

serious injury.

161) The batteries contain acid that can

burn skin or eyes. Batteries produce

hydrogen, which is easily flammable and

explosive. Therefore, keep away flames or

devices which may cause sparks.

IMPORTANT

81) Never use a fast battery-charger to

start the engine as this could damage the

electronic systems of your vehicle,

particularly the ignition and engine fuel

supply control units.

82) Do not connect the cable to the

negative terminal (–) of the flat battery. The

following spark could lead to battery

explosion and cause serious harm. Only

use the specific earth point; do not use any

other exposed metallic part.

167

FUEL CUT-OFF

SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION

This intervenes in the case of an impact

causing:

the interruption of the fuel supply

with the engine consequently switching

off;

the automatic unlocking of the

doors;

turning on of the lights inside the

vehicle;

deactivation of climate control

system ventilation;

switching on of the hazard warning

lights (to deactivate the lights press the

button on the dashboard).

On some versions, the intervention of

the system is indicated by a message

shown on the display. In the same way,

a dedicated message on the display

warns the driver if system operation is

compromised.

IMPORTANT Carefully check the vehicle

for fuel leaks, for instance in the engine

compartment, under the vehicle or near

the tank area. After a collision, bring the

ignition device to STOP to prevent the

battery from running down.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM

RESET

162)

To restore correct operation of the car,

carry out the following procedure (this

procedure must be started and

completed within less than 1 minute):

with direction indicator lever in

neutral position, turn the ignition device

to STOP;

turn the ignition device to MAR;

activate the right direction indicator

and then the left one;

activate the right direction indicator

and then the left one again;

deactivate the left direction indicator;

turn the ignition device to STOP and

then to MAR.

WARNING

162) If, after an impact, you smell fuel or

notice leaks from the fuel system, do not

reactivate the system to avoid the risk of

fire.

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION -

LEVER UNLOCK

In the event of a fault, to move the gear

lever from P (Park), proceed as follows:

stop the engine;

engage the electric parking brake;

working carefully in the point

indicated by the arrow, remove the trim

A fig. 149 (complete with gaiter) lifting it

upwards (see also fig. 150 );

149

F1B0028C

168

IN AN EMERGENCY

fully depress the brake pedal and

hold it down;

insert the screwdriver supplied

perpendicularly in hole B fig. 151 and

adjust the release lever;

place the gear lever in N (Neutral)

position;

refit the gear lever gaiter and trim

correctly;

start the engine.

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION -

KEY REMOVAL

83)

The ignition key (for versions with key

without remote control) can be removed

only if the gear lever is in position P

(Park).

If the vehicle battery is flat and the

ignition key is engaged, the latter is

locked in position.

To remove the key manually, proceed

as follows:

stop the vehicle in safety conditions,

engage a gear and the electric parking

brake;

using the provided key A

fig. 152 (located in the casing

containing the on-board documents),

undo the fixing screws B fig. 153 for the

lower cover C;

remove the lower steering wheel

cover C fig. 153 by releasing it from its

housing;

pull tab D fig. 154 downwards using

one hand and with the other one

remove the key, sliding it outwards;

150

F1B0055C

151

F1B0056C

152

F1B0022C

153

F1B0143C

169

once the key has been removed,

refit lower cover C fig. 153, make sure it

locks correctly and tighten the fixing

screws B firmly.

IMPORTANT

83) It is advisable to contact a Fiat

Dealership to have the refitting procedure

carried out. If you would like to proceed

autonomously, special attention must be

paid to the correct coupling of the retaining

clips. Otherwise, noise might be heard due

to an incorrect fastening of the lower cover

with the upper cover.

DUAL CLUTCH

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION -

LEVER UNLOCK

In case of failure or flat battery, to

unlock the gear lever, proceed as

follows:

stop the engine;

engage the electric parking brake;

working carefully in the point

indicated by the arrow, remove the trim

A fig. 155 (complete with gaiter) lifting it

upwards (see also fig. 156 );

154

F1B0222C

155

F1B0028C

170

IN AN EMERGENCY

fully depress the brake pedal and

hold it down;

insert the screwdriver supplied

perpendicularly in hole B fig. 157 and

adjust the release lever;

place the gear lever in N (Neutral)

position;

refit the gear lever gaiter and trim

correctly;

start the engine.

DUAL CLUTCH

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION -

REMOVING THE KEY

83)

The ignition key (for versions with key

without remote control) can be removed

only if the gear lever is in position P

(Park).

If the vehicle battery is flat and the

ignition key is engaged, the latter is

locked in position.

To remove the key manually, proceed

as follows:

stop the vehicle in safety conditions,

engage a gear and the electric parking

brake;

using the provided key A

fig. 158 (located in the casing

containing the on-board documents),

undo the fixing screws B fig. 159 for the

lower cover C;

remove the lower steering wheel

cover C fig. 159 by releasing it from its

housing;

pull tab D fig. 160 downwards using

one hand and with the other one

remove the key, sliding it outwards;

156

F1B0055C

157

F1B0056C

158

F1B0022C

159

F1B0143C

171

once the key has been removed,

refit lower cover C fig. 159, make sure it

locks correctly and tighten the fixing

screws B firmly.

IMPORTANT

84) It is advisable to contact a Fiat

Dealership to have the refitting procedure

carried out. If you would like to proceed

autonomously, special attention must be

paid to the correct coupling of the retaining

clips. Otherwise, noise might be heard due

to an incorrect fastening of the lower cover

with the upper cover.

TOWING THE

VEHICLE

ATTACHING THE TOW

HOOK

163) 164) 165)

The tow hook provided is located in the

tool box inside the boot.

Front

Proceed as follows:

release cap A fig. 161, operating in

the point shown by the arrow;

take tow hook B and screw it fully

onto the front threaded pin.

160

F1B0222C

161

F1B0196C

172

IN AN EMERGENCY

Rear

Proceed as follows:

release cap A fig. 162, operating in

the point shown by the arrow;

take tow hook B and screw it fully

onto the rear threaded pin

WARNING

163) For versions with key without remote

control, before towing, turn the ignition key

to MAR and then to STOP without

removing it. The steering column will

automatically lock when the key is removed

and the wheels cannot be steered. Also

check that the gearbox is in neutral (on

versions equipped with automatic

transmission, check that the gear lever is in

N position). For versions with electronic

key, move the ignition device to MAR and

then to STOP, without opening the door.

164) The brake servo and the

electromechanical power steering will not

work while the vehicle is being towed. You

will therefore need to apply more force on

the brake pedal and steering wheel. Do not

use flexible ropes when towing, and avoid

jerky movements. During towing, make

sure that the trailer hitch does not damage

any components it is touching. When

towing the car, you must comply with all

specific traffic regulations and adopt an

appropriate driving behaviour. Do not start

the engine while towing the car. Before

tightening the ring, clean the threaded

housing thoroughly. Make sure that the ring

is fully screwed into the housing before

towing the car.

165) The front and rear tow hooks should

be used only for emergencies on the road.

You are allowed to tow the vehicle for short

distances using an appropriate device in

accordance with the highway code (a rigid

bar), to move the vehicle on the road in

readiness for towing or transport via a

breakdown vehicle. Tow hooks MUST NOT

be used to tow vehicles off the road or

where there are obstacles and/or for

towing operations using cables or other

non-rigid devices. In compliance with the

above conditions, towing must take place

with the two vehicles (one towing, the other

towed) aligned as much as possible along

the same centre line.

162

F1B0197C

173

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct maintenance permits the

performance of the vehicle to be

maintained over time, as well as limited

running costs and safeguarding the

efficiency of the safety systems.

This chapter explains how.

SCHEDULED SERVICING.......175

ENGINE COMPARTMENT ......187

BATTERY RECHARGING .......197

SERVICING PROCEDURES .....198

LIFTING THE VEHICLE.........201

WHEELS AND TYRES .........201

BODYWORK ...............203

INTERIORS ................204

174

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED

SERVICING

Correct servicing is crucial for

guaranteeing a long life for the car

under the best conditions.

For this reason, Fiat has planned a

series of checks and services at fixed

distance and/or time intervals, as

described in the Service Schedule.

To keep the car’s efficiency in tip-top

condition, in the following Scheduled

Service plan pages a few additional

checks are listed that should be carried

out more frequently with respect to the

normal coupon redemption schedule.

Scheduled Servicing is offered by all

Fiat Dealerships according to fixed time

or kilometres/miles intervals. If, during

each operation, in addition to the ones

scheduled, the need arises for further

replacements or repairs, these may be

carried out with the owner's explicit

agreement only. If your car is used

frequently for towing, the interval

between one scheduled servicing

operation and the next should be

reduced.

IMPORTANT Scheduled Servicing

interventions are set out by the

Manufacturer. Failure to comply with the

schedule may invalidate the warranty.

We advise sharing any doubts

regarding the car’s proper operation

with your Fiat Dealership, before waiting

for the next coupon redemption.

175

SERVICE SCHEDULE (1.4 Turbo Multi Air, 1.4 T-Jet LPG and 2.4 Tigershark

versions)

WARNING: Once you have carried out the last intervention in the table, continue with the scheduled servicing, maintaining the

frequency indicated in the plan by marking each operation with a dot or dedicated note.

Warning: simply restarting the maintenance from the start of the plan may cause the allowed interval to be exceeded for some

operations!

Thousands of miles

9 182736455463728190

Thousands of kilometres

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years

12345678910

Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if

necessary. Check quick tyre repair kit recharge

conditions/expiry date (if provided)

●●●●●●●●●●

Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction

indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment,

passenger compartment, instrument panel warning lights,

etc.)

●●●●●●●●●●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels(1)

●●●●●●●●●●

Visually inspect condition of: LPG pipes and connectors,

LPG tank fixing (1.4 T-Jet LPG versions)

●●●●●

Check exhaust emissions

●●●●●●●●●●

Use the diagnosis socket to check the operation of the

engine management systems, emissions and, for

versions/markets where provided, engine oil degradation

●●●●●●●●●●

(1) Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.

176

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Thousands of miles

9 182736455463728190

Thousands of kilometres

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years

12345678910

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork,

underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel

system, brakes), rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves,

bushes, etc.)

●●●●●

Check windscreen and rear window wiper blade

position/wear

●●●●●

Check operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system

and adjust jets, if necessary

●●●●●

Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment

locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

●●●●●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front and rear disc

brake pads and integrity of pad wear indicator

●●●●●●●●●●

Visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belt(s)(6)

●

Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without

automatic tensioner)

●●

Visually inspect condition of toothed timing drive belt

(2.4 Tigershark excluded)(6)

●

Check pressure regulator and seal of the corresponding

heating pipes (1.4 T-Jet LPG versions)

●●●●●

(6) The maximum mileage is 120,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 6 years, regardless of distance travelled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions (dusty

areas, cold climates, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum mileage is 60,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 4 years regardless of the

mileage.

177

Thousands of miles

9 182736455463728190

Thousands of kilometres

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years

12345678910

Check correct fitting of injectors (positioning, clip retention)

(1.4 T-Jet LPG versions)

●●●●●

Check drive transmission idler unit (PTU) oil level

(4x4 versions)

●●

Check rear differential fluid level (4x4 versions)

●●

Check oil level of electro-hydraulic actuator and top up, if

necessary (1.4 Turbo Multi Air versions with dual-clutch

automatic transmission)(2)

●

Change engine oil and replace oil filter (1.4 Turbo Multi Air

and 1.4 T-Jet LPG versions)(3) (O) (●)

● ● ● ● ●

Change engine oil and oil filter (2.4 Tigershark versions)(4)

●●●●●●●●●●

Replace spark plugs (1.4 Turbo Multi Air and 1.4 T-Jet

LPG versions)(5)

●●●●●

Replace spark plugs (2.4 Tigershark versions)

●●●

(2) Check to be carried out every year for cars on the road in countries with particularly severe climates (cold countries).

(3) If the car's annual mileage is less than 10,000 km, the engine oil and filter must be replaced every year.

(O) Recommended operations

(●) Obligatory operations

(4) The engine oil and oil filter must be replaced when the warning light on the instrument panel switches on or, in any case, every year.

(5) For 1.4 Turbo MultiAir and 1.4 T-Jet LPG versions, to guarantee correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine, it is essential to: only use spark

plugs specifically certified for these engines; all spark plugs should be of the same type and brand (see the "Engine" paragraph in the "Technical specifications"

chapter); strictly comply with the spark plugs replacement intervals on the Service Schedule. It is advisable to contact a FIAT Dealership for plug replacement.

178

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Thousands of miles

9 182736455463728190

Thousands of kilometres

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years

12345678910

Replace accessory drive belt/s

(6)

Replace toothed timing drive belt (1.4 Turbo Multi Air and

1.4 T-Jet LPG versions only)

(6)

Change the brake fluid

(7)

Replace the filter inside the pressure regulator (1.4 T-Jet

LPG versions)

●

Replace the paper filter (LPG in gaseous state) (1.4 T-Jet

LPG versions)

●●●●●

Replace air cleaner cartridge(8)

●●●●●

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner(8) (O) (●)

● ● ● ● ●

(6) The maximum mileage is 120,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 6 years, regardless of distance travelled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions (dusty

areas, cold climates, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum mileage is 60,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 4 years regardless of the

mileage.

(7) Brake fluid is to be replaced every 2 years regardless of the distance travelled.

(8) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 15,000 km.

(O) Recommended operations

(●) Obligatory operations

NOTE change automatic transmission oil and replace oil filter every 240,000 km.

179

SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN (1.6 E.Torq versions)

WARNING: Once you have carried out the last intervention in the table, continue with the scheduled servicing, maintaining the

frequency indicated in the plan by marking each operation with a dot or dedicated note.

Warning: simply restarting the maintenance from the start of the plan may cause the allowed interval to be exceeded for some

operations!

Thousands of miles

9 182736455463728190

Thousands of kilometres

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years

12345678910

Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if

necessary. Check quick tyre repair kit recharge

conditions/expiry date (if provided)

●●●●●●●●●●

Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction

indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment,

passenger compartment, instrument panel warning lights,

etc.)

●●●●●●●●●●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels(1)

●●●●●●●●●●

Check exhaust emissions

●●●●●●●●●●

Use the diagnosis socket to check the operation of the

engine management systems, emissions and, for

versions/markets where provided, engine oil degradation

●●●●●●●●●●

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork,

underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel

system, brakes), rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves,

bushes, etc.)

●●●●●

(1) Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.

180

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Thousands of miles

9 182736455463728190

Thousands of kilometres

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years

12345678910

Check windscreen and rear window wiper blade

position/wear

●●●●●

Check operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system

and adjust jets, if necessary

●●●●●

Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment

locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

●●●●●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front and rear disc

brake pads and integrity of pad wear indicator

●●●●●●●●●●

Visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belt(s)

●●●●●●●●●●

Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without

automatic tensioner)

●●●●●●●●●●

Change engine oil and replace oil filter

●●●●●●●●●●

Spark plug replacement

●●●●●

Replace accessory drive belt/s

●

Replace air cleaner cartridge(2)

●●●●●

Change the brake fluid

(3)

(2) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 15,000 km.

(3) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every 2 years, irrespective of the mileage.

181

Thousands of miles

9 182736455463728190

Thousands of kilometres

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years

12345678910

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner(2) (O) (●)

● ● ● ● ●

(2) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 15,000 km.

(O) Recommended operations

(●) Obligatory operations

182

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN (Diesel versions)

WARNING: Once you have carried out the last intervention in the table, continue with the scheduled servicing, maintaining the

frequency indicated in the plan by marking each operation with a dot or dedicated note.

Warning: simply restarting the maintenance from the start of the plan may cause the allowed interval to be exceeded for some

operations!

Thousands of miles

12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Thousands of kilometres

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Years

12345678910

Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if

necessary. Check quick tyre repair kit recharge

conditions/expiry date (if provided)

●●●●●●●●●●

Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction

indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment,

passenger compartment, instrument panel warning lights,

etc.)

●●●●●●●●●●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels(1)

●●●●●●●●●●

Check exhaust emissions

●●●●●●●●●●

Use the diagnosis socket to check supply/engine

management systems operation, emissions and, for

versions/markets, where provided, engine oil degradation

●●●●●●●●●●

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork,

underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel

system, brakes), rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves,

bushes, etc.)

●●●●●

(1) Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.

183

Thousands of miles

12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Thousands of kilometres

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Years

12345678910

Check windscreen and rear window wiper blade

position/wear

●●●●●

Check operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system

and adjust jets, if necessary

●●●●●

Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment

locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

●●●●●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front and rear disc

brake pads and integrity of pad wear indicator

●●●●●●●●●●

Visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belt(s)(4)

●●

Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without

automatic tensioner)

●●

Visually inspect condition of toothed timing drive belt

(excluding 1.3 Multijet 16V version)(4)

●●

Check drive transmission idler unit (PTU) oil level (except

2.0 Multijet 4x4 versions)

●●

Check oil level of electro-hydraulic actuator and top up, if

necessary (1.6 Multijet versions with dual-clutch automatic

transmission)(2)

●

Check rear differential fluid level (2.0 Multijet 4x4 versions)

●●

(4) The maximum mileage is 120,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 6 years, regardless of distance travelled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions (dusty

areas, cold climates, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum mileage is 60,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 4 years regardless of the

mileage.

(2) Check to be carried out every year for cars on the road in countries with particularly severe climates (cold countries).

184

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Thousands of miles

12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Thousands of kilometres

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Years

12345678910

Change engine oil and replace oil filter

(3)

Replace accessory drive belt/s

(4)

Replace toothed timing drive belt (excluding 1.3 Multijet

16V versions)

(4)

Replace fuel filter cartridge(5)

●●●

Replace air cleaner cartridge(6)

●●●●●

Change the brake fluid

(7)

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner(6) (O) (●)

● ● ● ● ●

(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signalled by the warning light or

message in the instrument panel. In any case, it must never exceed 2 years. Where the car is used mostly in urban settings you need to replace the engine oil

filter every year.

(4) The maximum mileage is 120,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 6 years, regardless of distance travelled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions (dusty

areas, cold climates, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum mileage is 60,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 4 years regardless of the

mileage.

(5) If the car runs on fuel with quality below the relevant European specification, this filter should be replaced every 20,000 km

(6) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 20,000 km.

(7) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.

(O) Recommended operations

(●) Obligatory operations

NOTE change automatic transmission oil and replace oil filter every 240,000 km.

185

PERIODIC CHECKS

Every 1,000 km or before long trips

check and, if necessary, top up:

engine coolant level;

brake fluid level;

windscreen washer fluid level;

tyre inflation pressure and condition;

operation of lighting system

(headlights, direction indicators, hazard

warning lights, etc.);

operation of screen washer/wiper

system and positioning/wear of

windscreen/rear window wiper blades.

Every 3,000 km, check and top up if

required: engine oil level.

DEMANDING USE OF THE

CAR

If the car is used mainly under one of

the following conditions:

law enforcement (or security service),

taxi service;

towing a trailer or caravan;

dusty roads;

short, repeated journeys (less than

7-8 km) at sub-zero outside

temperatures;

engine often idling or driving long

distances at low speeds or long periods

of inactivity;

the following checks must be carried

out more often than indicated in the

Service Schedule:

check front disc brake pad condition

and wear;

check cleanliness of bonnet and

luggage compartment locks,

cleanliness and lubrication of linkage;

visually inspect conditions of: engine,

gearbox, transmission, pipes and hoses

(exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and

rubber elements (gaiters/sleeves/

bushes, etc.);

check battery charge and battery

fluid level (electrolyte);

visually inspect conditions of the

accessory drive belts;

check and, if necessary, change

engine oil and replace oil filter;

check and, if necessary, replace

pollen filter;

check and, if necessary, replace air

cleaner.

186

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CHECKING LEVELS

166) 167)

85)

1.4 Turbo MultiAir versions

A - Engine oil level dipstick-B-Engine oil Cap/Filler-C-Engine coolant-D-Windscreen/rear window washer - E - Brake

fluid-F-Battery

163

F1B0171C

187

1.4 T–Jet LPG versions

A - Engine oil level dipstick/B-Engine oil Cap/Filler/C-Engine coolant/D-Windscreen/rear window washer/E-Brake

fluid/F-Battery

164

F1B0346C

188

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

1.6 E.Torq versions

A - Engine oil level dipstick-B-Engine oil Cap/Filler-C-Engine coolant-D-Windscreen/rear window washer - E - Brake

fluid-F-Battery

165

F1B0234C

189

2.4 Tigershark version (where provided)

A - Engine oil level dipstick-B-Engine oil Cap/Filler-C-Engine coolant-D-Windscreen/rear window washer - E - Brake

fluid-F-Battery

166

F1B0399C

190

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

1.3 16V MultiJet version

A - Engine oil level dipstick-B-Engine oil Cap/Filler-C-Engine coolant-D-Windscreen/rear window washer - E - Brake

fluid-F-Battery

NOTE To access the engine oil cap/filler B, remove the cover G by operating on the point indicated by the arrow.

167

F1B0239C

191

1.6 16V MultiJet version

A - Engine oil level dipstick-B-Engine oil Cap/Filler-C-Engine coolant-D-Windscreen/rear window washer - E - Brake

fluid-F-Battery

168

F1B0172C

192

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

2.0 16V MultiJet version

A - Engine oil level dipstick-B-Engine oil Cap/Filler-C-Engine coolant-D-Windscreen/rear window washer - E - Brake

fluid-F-Battery

169

F1B0173C

193

ENGINE OIL

168)

86)

Check the oil level a few minutes (about

5) after the engine has stopped, with

the vehicle parked on level ground.

Check that the oil level is between the

MIN and MAX references on the

dipstick A.

If the oil level is near or under the MIN

reference, add oil through the filler B

until it reaches the MAX reference.

Take out the engine oil dipstick A, clean

it with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it.

Extract it again and check that the level

is between the MIN and MAX marks on

the dipstick.

Engine oil consumption

87)

The maximum engine oil consumption

is usually 400 grams every 1,000 km.

When the vehicle is new, the engine

needs to be run in; therefore the engine

oil consumption can only be considered

stabilised after the first 5,000 -

6,000 km.

IMPORTANT After adding or changing

the oil, let the engine turn over for a few

seconds and wait a few minutes after

turning it off before you check the level.

ENGINE COOLANT

169)

88)

If the level is too low, unscrew the cap

of reservoir C and add the fluid

described in the "Technical

Specifications" chapter.

WINDSCREEN/REAR

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

170) 171)

If the level is too low, lift reservoir cap D

and add the fluid described in the

chapter "Technical Specifications".

IMPORTANT The headlight washer

system (present) will not operate when

the fluid level is low, even though the

windscreen/rear window washer

continues to operate.

BRAKE FLUID

172) 173)

89)

Check that the fluid is at the max. level.

If the fluid level in the reservoir is too

low, undo reservoir cap E and add the

fluid described in the chapter "Technical

Specifications".

IMPORTANT Carefully clean the cap of

the reservoir and the surrounding

surface. Take great care to ensure that

impurities do not enter the reservoir

when the cap is opened.

For topping-up, always use a funnel

with integrated filter with mesh equal to

or lower than 0.12 mm.

IMPORTANT Brake fluid is hygroscopic

(i.e. it absorbs moisture). For this

reason, if the vehicle is mainly used in

areas with a high degree of

atmospheric humidity, the fluid should

be replaced at more frequent intervals

than specified in the "Scheduled

Servicing Plan".

194

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION / TWIN

CLUTCH AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

ACTUATION SYSTEM OIL

The transmission control oil level should

only be checked at a Fiat Dealership.

BATTERY

174) 175) 176)

90)

The battery does not require the

electrolyte to be topped up with distilled

water.

A periodic check carried out at a Fiat

Dealership is, however, necessary to

check efficiency.

Replacing the battery

If necessary, replace the battery with

another original battery with the same

specifications. Follow the battery

Manufacturer’s instructions for

maintenance.

USEFUL ADVICE FOR

EXTENDING THE LIFE OF

YOUR BATTERY

Useful advice for extending the life

of your battery

To avoid draining your battery and

make it last longer, observe the

following instructions:

when you park the vehicle, ensure

that the doors, tailgate and bonnet are

closed properly, to prevent any lights

from remaining on inside the passenger

compartment;

switch off all roof lights inside the

vehicle: the vehicle is however

equipped with a system which switches

all interior lights off automatically;

do not keep accessories (e.g. radio,

hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on

for a long time when the engine is not

running;

before performing any operation on

the electrical system, disconnect the

negative battery cable.

If, after purchasing the vehicle, you wish

to install electrical accessories which

require permanent electrical supply (e.g.

alarm, etc.) or accessories which

influence the electrical supply

requirements, contact a Fiat Dealership,

whose qualified staff will evaluate the

overall electrical consumption.

91)

IMPORTANT After the battery is

disconnected, the steering must be

initialised. The

warning light on the

instrument panel (or symbol on the

display) switches on to indicate this. To

carry out this procedure, simply turn the

steering wheel all the way from one end

to the other or drive in a straight line for

about a hundred metres.

IMPORTANT If the charge level remains

under 50% for a long time, the battery

is damaged by sulphation, reducing its

capacity and efficiency at start-up. The

battery is also more prone to the risk of

freezing (at temperatures of -10°C).

Refer to the "Vehicle inactivity"

paragraph in "Starting and driving"

chapter if the vehicle is left parked for a

long time.

WARNING

166) Never smoke while working in the

engine compartment: gas and inflammable

vapours may be present, with the risk of

fire.

167) Be very careful when working in the

engine compartment when the engine is

hot: you may get burned.

168) If the engine oil is being topped up,

wait for the engine to cool down before

loosening the filler cap, particularly for

vehicles with aluminium cap (where

provided). WARNING: risk of burns!

195

169) The cooling system is pressurised. If

the cap needs replacing, do so with

another original or the effectiveness of the

system may be compromised. Do not

remove the reservoir plug when the engine

is hot: you risk scalding yourself.

170) Do not travel if the windscreen

washer reservoir is empty: using the

windscreen washer is essential for

improving visibility. Repeated operation of

the system without fluid could damage or

cause rapid deterioration of some system

components.

171) Some commercial additives for

windscreen washer fluid are flammable.

The engine compartment contains hot

components which may start a fire.

172) Brake fluid is poisonous and highly

corrosive. In the event of accidental

contact, immediately wash the affected

parts with water and mild soap. Then rinse

thoroughly. Call a doctor immediately if

swallowed.

173) The symbol

, on the brake fluid

container indicates if a brake fluid is

synthetic or mineral-based. Use of mineral

type fluids will damage the special rubber

seals of the braking system beyond repair.

174) Battery fluid is poisonous and

corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin and

eyes. Keep open flames away from the

battery and do not use objects that might

create sparks: risk of explosion and fire.

175) Using the battery with insufficient fluid

irreparably damages the battery and may

cause an explosion.

176) When performing any operation on

the battery or near it, always protect your

eyes with special goggles.

IMPORTANT

85) Be careful not to confuse the various

types of fluids while topping up: they are

not compatible with each other! Topping up

with an unsuitable fluid could severely

damage your vehicle.

86) The oil level must never exceed the

MAX. mark.

87) Always top up using engine oil of the

same specifications as that already in the

engine.

88) PARAFLU

anti-freeze is used in the

engine cooling system. Use fluid of the

same type as that contained in the cooling

system for any top-ups. PARAFLU

cannot be mixed with any other type of

fluid. If this happens, do not start the

engine under any circumstances and

contact a Fiat Dealership.

89) Prevent brake fluid, which is highly

corrosive, from coming into contact with

painted parts. Should it happen,

immediately wash with water.

90) If the vehicle must remain unused for a

long time at a very low temperature,

remove the battery and take it to a warm

place, to avoid freezing.

91) Incorrect installation of electric and

electronic devices may cause severe

damage to your car. After purchasing your

vehicle, if you wish to install any

accessories (e.g. anti-theft, radio phone,

etc.), go to a Fiat Dealership, which will

suggest the most suitable devices and

advise you whether a higher capacity

battery needs to be installed.

IMPORTANT

3) The used engine oil and the filter that has

been replaced contain substances that are

harmful to the environment. To change the

oil and filters, we advise you to contact a

Fiat Dealership.

4) Used transmission fluid contains

substances that are harmful to the

environment. It is advisable to contact a

Fiat Dealership to have the fluid changed.

5) Batteries contain substances which are

very dangerous for the environment. For

battery replacement, contact a Fiat

Dealership.

196

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

BATTERY

RECHARGING

IMPORTANT

IMPORTANT The battery recharging

procedure is given as information only.

To carry out this operation contact a

Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT After setting the ignition

device to STOP and having closed the

driver side door, wait at least one

minute before disconnecting the

electrical supply from the battery. When

reconnecting the electrical supply to the

battery, make sure that the ignition

device is in the STOP position and the

driver side door is closed.

IMPORTANT Charging should be slow

at a low ampere rating for

approximately 24 hours. Charging for a

longer time may damage the battery.

IMPORTANT The cables of the

electrical system must be correctly

reconnected to the battery, i.e. the

positive cable (+) to the positive

terminal and the negative cable (–) to

the negative terminal. The battery

terminals are marked with the positive

(+) and negative (–) symbols, and are

shown on the battery cover. The battery

terminals must also be corrosion-free

and firmly secured to the terminals. If a

"quick-type" battery charger is used

with the battery fitted on the vehicle,

before connecting it disconnect both

cables of the battery itself. Do not use a

"quick-type" battery charger to provide

the starting voltage.

VERSIONS WITHOUT

START&STOP SYSTEM

To recharge, proceed as follows:

disconnect the terminal from the

negative battery pole;

connect the charger cables to the

battery terminals, observing the polarity;

turn on the charger;

when it is recharged, turn the

charger off before disconnecting it from

the battery;

reconnect the negative battery

terminal.

VERSIONS WITH

START&STOP SYSTEM

To recharge, proceed as follows:

disconnect the connector A

fig. 170 (pressing the button B) from the

sensor C monitoring the battery

conditions, on the negative pole (–) D of

the battery;

170

F1B0300C

197

connect the positive cable (+) of the

battery charger to the positive battery

terminal E and the negative cable (–) to

sensor terminal D as shown;

turn on the battery charger. At the

end of the charging process, switch the

battery charger off;

after having disconnected the

charging device, reconnect connector A

to the sensor C as shown.

SERVICING

PROCEDURES

92) 93) 94)

The following pages contain the rules

on the required maintenance

envisaged by the technical personnel

who designed the vehicle.

In addition to these specific

maintenance instructions specified for

routine scheduled servicing, there are

other components which may require

intervention or replacements over the

vehicle’s life cycle.

ENGINE OIL

95)

Engine oil level check

To ensure correct engine lubrication, the

oil must always be kept at the

prescribed level (see "Engine

compartment" in this chapter).

AIR CLEANER

177)

Replacing the air cleaner

See the "Scheduled servicing plan" for

the correct servicing intervals.

It is advisable to replace it with a

genuine spare part, designed especially

for this vehicle.

AIR CONDITIONING

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

96) 97)

To ensure the best possible

performance, the air conditioning

system must be checked and undergo

maintenance at a Fiat Dealership at the

beginning of the summer.

WINDOWS

When cleaning the heated windscreen

and rear window be careful, if the

defrosting function is active, regarding

the temperature of the glass; also make

sure that children do not come into

contact with the heated surface. The

glass may be hot.

Never use an abrasive detergent to

clean the surface of the windows.

Do not use scrapers or sharp items that

might scratch the windows.

Spray the detergent on the cloth to be

used for cleaning the rear view mirror.

Do not spray the detergent directly on

the glass.

Cleaning the window with hot water

could cause the removal of any labels.

198

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WINDSCREEN / REAR

WINDOW WIPERS

Raising the windscreen wipers

If you need to lift the windscreen wiper

blades (e.g. in case of snow or when

they need to be replaced), you need to

activate the "Service Position" function

(see paragraph "Windscreen/Rear

window wiper" in the "Knowing your

vehicle" chapter).

To lower the blades, set the ignition

device to MAR-ON.

IMPORTANT Place the blades back in

contact with the windscreen before

activating the windscreen wiper again

and/or setting the ignition device to

MAR-ON.

Replacing the windscreen wiper

blades

Proceed as follows:

raise the wiper arm, press button A

fig. 171 of the attachment spring and

remove the blade from the arm;

fit the new blade, inserting the tab in

the dedicated housing in the arm and

checking that it is locked;

lower the wiper arm on the

windscreen.

IMPORTANT Do not operate the

windscreen wiper with the blades lifted

from the windscreen.

Replacing the rear window wiper

blade

Proceed as follows:

widen the two tabs as shown by the

arrows and rotate cover A

fig. 172 outwards;

undo nut B and remove arm C from

the central pin;

correctly align the new arm;

fully tighten nut B and then refit

cover A.

IMPORTANT Do not operate the rear

window wiper with the blade lifted from

the rear window.

NOZZLES

Windscreen washer

The window washer nozzles are fixed. If

there is no jet of fluid, firstly check that

there is fluid in the reservoir (see

paragraph “Engine compartment” in

this chapter). Then check that the

nozzle holes are not clogged; use a

needle to unblock them if necessary.

IMPORTANT In versions with sun roof,

make sure that the roof is closed before

operating the windscreen washer

nozzles.

Rear window washer

The rear window washer nozzle is fixed.

The jet nozzle is located at the side of

the third brake light.

171

F1B0302C

172

F1B0303C

199

EXHAUST SYSTEM

178) 179)

98)

Adequate maintenance of the engine

exhaust system represents the best

protection against leaks of carbon

monoxide into the passenger

compartment.

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

99)

Use only a gearbox fluid with the same

characteristics as those indicated in the

"Fluids and lubricants" table (see

"Technical specifications" chapter).

WARNING

177) The air intake system (air cleaner,

rubber hoses, etc.) can be a protection in

the case of blowbacks from the engine. DO

NOT REMOVE this system unless you

need to carry out repair or servicing

operations. Before starting the engine,

ensure that the system has not been

removed: failure to observe this precaution

may result in serious injury.

178) Exhaust emissions are very

dangerous, and may be lethal. They

contain carbon monoxide, a colourless,

odourless gas which can cause fainting

and poisoning if inhaled.

179) The exhaust system may reach high

temperatures and may cause a fire if the

vehicle is parked on flammable material.

Dry grass or leaves can also catch fire if

they come into contact with the exhaust

system. Do not park or use the vehicle in a

place in which the exhaust system might

come into contact with flammable material.

IMPORTANT

92) It is recommended to have the vehicle

serviced by a Fiat Dealership. When

carrying out normal periodic operations and

small servicing interventions personally on

the vehicle, it is recommended to use

suitable equipment, genuine spare parts

and the necessary fluids. Do not carry out

any interventions if you don't have the

necessary experience.

93) Incorrect servicing of the vehicle or

failure to carry out operations or repairs

(when necessary) may lead to more

expensive repairs, damage to other

components or have a negative impact on

the vehicle performance. Have any

malfunction inspected immediately by a Fiat

Dealership.

94) The vehicle is equipped with fluids

which are optimised or protecting its

performance and life and extending service

intervals. Do not use chemicals for washing

these components since they may damage

the engine, the gearbox or the climate

control system. This damage is not covered

by the vehicle’s warranty. If any component

needs to be washed due to malfunctioning,

use only the specific liquid for that

procedure.

95) An excessive or insufficient amount of

oil inside the base is extremely damaging to

the engine. Make sure it is always at an

adequate level.

96) Always require the use of only

compressor coolants and lubricants

approved and suitable for the specific air

conditioning system fitted on the vehicle.

Some non-approved coolants are

flammable and may explode, with the risk

of injuries. The use of non-approved

coolants or lubricants may adversely affect

system efficiency, leading to expensive

repairs.

97) The air conditioner system contains

coolant under high pressure: to avoid

injuries to people or damage to the system,

any coolant addition or repair that requires

to disconnect the cables must be carried

out by a Fiat Dealership.

200

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

98) Vehicles equipped with catalytic

converter must be fuelled only with

unleaded petrol. Leaded petrol would

permanently damage the catalytic

converter and eliminate its ability to reduce

polluting emissions, seriously

compromising the engine performance,

which would be irreparably damaged. If the

engine does not work correctly, especially if

it starts irregularly or if there is a reduction

of its performance, immediately go to a Fiat

Dealership. Prolonged and faulty operation

of the engine may cause overheating of the

converter and, as a consequence, possible

damage to the converter and the vehicle.

99) Using a gearbox fluid different from that

approved may compromise gearshifting

quality and/or cause vibration of the

gearbox itself.

LIFTING THE

VEHICLE

If the vehicle needs to be jacked up, go

to a Fiat Dealership, which is equipped

with shop jacks and jack arms.

The vehicle lifting points are marked on

the side skirts with the

symbols (see

illustration in fig. 173 ).

WHEELS AND TYRES

180) 181) 182) 183) 184) 185)

RIMS AND TYRES

For the type of wheel rims and tyres

fitted on the vehicle see the "Wheels"

paragraph in the "Technical data"

chapter.

SNOW CHAINS

100)

Front Wheel Drive and All Wheel

Drive versions

7-mm snow chains can be used on

215/60 R16 95H and 215/55 R17 94V

tyres.

225/45 R18 91V and 225/45 R18 91Y

tyres cannot be fitted with snow chains.

Important

The use of snow chains should be in

compliance with local regulations of

each country. In certain countries, tyres

marked with code M+S (Mud and

Snow) are considered as winter

equipment; therefore their use is

equivalent to that of the snow chains.

The snow chains may be applied only

to the front wheel tyres.

173

F1B0301C

201

Check the tension of the snow chains

after the first few metres have been

driven.

IMPORTANT Using snow chains with

tyres with non-original dimensions may

damage the vehicle.

IMPORTANT Using different size or type

(M+S, snow, etc.) tyres between front

and rear axle may adversely affect

vehicle driveability, with the risk of losing

control of the vehicle and resulting

accidents.

SUGGESTIONS ABOUT

THE ROTATION OF THE

TYRES

The front and rear tyres are subject to

different loads and stress due to

steering, manoeuvres and braking. For

this reason they are subject to uneven

wear.

To resolve this problem, tyres should be

rotated at the appropriate time. Tyre

rotation means moving the wheels to a

different position, with respect to the

vehicle. The single wheel will therefore

operate on a different axle and, where

possible, on the opposite side of the

vehicle.

Tyre rotation contributes to the

preservation of the grip and traction

performance on wet, muddy or snowy

roads, guaranteeing optimal driveability

of the vehicle.

In the case of irregular wear of the tyres

identify the cause and correct it as soon

as possible, by contacting a Fiat

Dealership.

WARNING

180) The road holding qualities of the car

also depend on the correct inflation

pressure of the tyres.

181) If tyre pressure is too low, it may

overheat and be severely damaged as a

result.

182) If the tyres are "unidirectional", do not

switch tyres from the right-hand side of the

vehicle to the left-hand side, and vice

versa. This type of tyres can only be

switched from the front axle to the rear axle

and vice versa, keeping them on the same

side of the vehicle.

183) Never submit alloy rims to repainting

treatments requiring the use of

temperatures exceeding 150°C. The

mechanical properties of the wheels could

be impaired.

184) The wheel rotation methods shown in

the text must NOT be used with one-way

tyres! This type of tyres can only be

switched from the front axle to the rear axle

and vice versa, keeping them on the same

side of the vehicle.

185) Travelling with partially or completely

deflated tyres can cause safety problems

and damage the concerned tyre beyond

repair.

IMPORTANT

100) Keep your speed down when snow

chains are fitted; do not exceed 50 km/h.

Avoid potholes, do not drive over steps or

sidewalks and do not drive long distances

over roads without snow, to avoid

damaging both your vehicle and the road

surface.

202

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

BODYWORK

PRESERVING THE

BODYWORK

Paintwork

101)

Touch up abrasions and scratches

immediately to prevent the formation of

rust.

Maintenance of paintwork consists of

washing the vehicle: the frequency

depends on the conditions and

environment in which the vehicle is

used. For example, it is advisable to

wash the vehicle more often in areas

with high levels of atmospheric pollution

or salted roads.

Some parts of the vehicle may be

covered with a matt paint which, in

order to be maintained intact, requires

special care: see the instructions in the

warning at the end of this paragraph

102).

To correctly wash the vehicle, follow

these instructions:

if the vehicle is washed remove the

aerial from the roof;

if high pressure jets or cleaners are

used to wash the vehicle, keep a

distance of at least 40 cm from the

bodywork to avoid damage or

alteration. Build up of water could

cause damage to the vehicle in the long

term;

wash the bodywork using a low

pressure jet of water if possible;

wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy

solution over the bodywork, frequently

rinsing the sponge;

rinse well with water and dry with a

jet of air or a chamois leather.

Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door

frames, bonnet, headlight frames, etc.)

with special care, as water may

stagnate more easily in these areas. Do

not wash the vehicle after it has been

left in the sun or with the bonnet hot:

this may alter the shine of the

paintwork.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned

in the same way as the rest of the

vehicle.

IMPORTANT

Avoid parking under trees; the resin

dropped by trees makes the paintwork

go opaque and increases the possibility

of corrosion.

Bird droppings must be washed off

immediately and thoroughly as the acid

they contain is particularly aggressive.

Windows

Use specific detergents and clean

cloths to prevent scratching or altering

the transparency.

IMPORTANT Wipe the rear window

inside gently with a cloth following the

direction of the filaments to avoid

damaging the heating device.

Headlights

Use a soft cloth soaked in water and

detergent for washing cars.

IMPORTANT Never use aromatic

substances (e.g. petrol) or ketones (e.g.

acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses

of the headlights.

IMPORTANT When cleaning with a

pressure washer, keep the water jet at

least 20 cm away from the headlights.

203

Engine compartment

At the end of every winter, wash the

engine compartment thoroughly, taking

care not to aim the jet of water directly

at the electronic control units or at the

windscreen/rear window wiper motors.

Have this operation performed at a

specialised workshop.

IMPORTANT The washing should take

place with the engine cold and the

ignition device in the STOP position.

After the washing operation, make sure

that the various protections (e.g. rubber

caps and guards) have not been

removed or damaged.

IMPORTANT

101) In order to preserve the aesthetic

appearance of the paint abrasive products

and/or polishes should not be used for

cleaning the vehicle.

102) Avoid washing with rollers and/or

brushes in washing stations. Wash the

vehicle only by hand using neutral pH

detergents; dry it with a wet chamois

leather. Abrasive products and/or polishes

should not be used for cleaning the car.

Bird droppings must be washed off

immediately and thoroughly as the acid

they contain is particularly aggressive.

Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle

under trees; remove vegetable resins

immediately as, when dried, it may only be

possible to remove them with abrasive

products and/or polishes, which is highly

inadvisable as they could alter the typical

opaqueness of the paint. Do not use pure

windscreen washer fluid for cleaning the

front windscreen and rear window; dilute it

min. 50% with water. Only use pure screen

washer fluid when strictly necessary due to

outside temperature conditions.

IMPORTANT

6) Detergents pollute the environment. Only

wash your vehicle in areas equipped to

collect and treat wastewater from this type

of activity.

INTERIORS

186) 187) 188)

Periodically check the cleanliness of the

interior, beneath the mats, which could

cause oxidation of the sheet metal.

SEATS AND FABRIC

PARTS

Remove dust with a soft brush or a

vacuum cleaner. It is advisable to use a

moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub

the seats with a sponge moistened with

a solution of water and mild soap.

LEATHER SEATS

(where provided)

Remove the dry dirt with a slightly

damp buckskin or cloth, without

exercising too much pressure.

Remove any liquid or grease stains

using an absorbent dry cloth, without

rubbing. Then clean with a soft cloth or

buckskin cloth dampened with water

and mild soap. If the stain persists, use

specific products and observe the

instructions carefully.

IMPORTANT Never use alcohol. Make

sure that the cleaning products used

contain no alcohol or alcohol

derivatives, even in small quantities.

204

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

PLASTIC AND COATED

PARTS

103)

Clean interior plastic parts with a damp

cloth (if possible made from microfibre),

and a solution of water and neutral,

non-abrasive detergent.

To clean oily or persistent stains, use

specific products free from solvents and

designed to maintain the original

appearance and colour of the

components.

Remove any dust using a microfibre

cloth, if necessary moistened with

water. The use of paper tissues is not

recommended as these may leave

residues.

GENUINE LEATHER

PARTS

(where provided)

Use only water and mild soap to clean

these parts. Never use alcohol or

alcohol-based products.

Before using a specific product for

cleaning interiors, make sure that it

does not contain alcohol and/or

alcohol-based substances.

WARNING

186) Never use flammable products, such

as petrol ether or rectified petrol to clean

the inside of the car. The electrostatic

charges which are generated by rubbing

during the cleaning operation may cause a

fire.

187) Do not keep aerosol cans in the car:

they might explode. Aerosol cans must not

be exposed to a temperature exceeding

50°C. When the vehicle is exposed to

sunlight, the internal temperature can

greatly exceed this value.

188) There must be no obstacles on the

floor underneath the pedals; make sure

that mats are always flat and do not

interfere with the pedals.

IMPORTANT

103) Never use alcohol, petrols and

derivatives to clean the dashboard and

instrument panel lens.

205

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Everything you may find useful for

understanding how your vehicle is

made and works is contained in this

chapter and illustrated with data, tables

and graphics. For the enthusiasts and

the technician, but also just for those

who want to know every detail of their

vehicle.

IDENTIFICATION DATA.........207

ENGINE ..................208

WHEELS .................211

DIMENSIONS ..............213

WEIGHTS .................215

SUPPLIES ................218

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS......222

PERFORMANCE ............225

FUEL CONSUMPTION.........226

CO2 EMISSIONS ............229

PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING

THE CAR AT THE END OF ITS

LIFE ....................231

206

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION

DATA

VIN PLATE

It is located on the driver's door pillar. It

can be read with the door open and

bears the following data fig. 174:

Name of manufacturer

Vehicle type-approval number

Vehicle identification number

Technically allowed max. weight with

full load

Technically allowed max. weight for

combined vehicle

Technically allowed max. weight on

axle 1

Technically allowed max. weight on

axle 2

Engine identification

Type variant version

Paintwork colour code

Smoke absorption coefficient (diesel

versions)

Further instructions.

CHASSIS MARKING

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

is stamped on the plate shown in

fig. 175, located on the front left corner

of the dashboard cover, which can be

seen from outside the vehicle, through

the windscreen.

This number is also stamped on the

passenger compartment floor, in front

of the front right seat.

To access it, slide flap A fig. 176 in the

direction shown by the arrow.

The marking includes:

type of vehicle;

chassis serial number.

ENGINE MARKING

Engine marking is stamped on the

cylinder block and includes the model

and the chassis serial number.

174

F1B0330C

175

F1B0333C

176

F1B0058C

207

ENGINE

189)

Versions 1.4 T-Jet LPG 120 HP

1.4 Turbo Multi Air

136/140 HP

1.4 Turbo Multi Air

163/170 HP

Engine code 55277701 55263624 55263623

Cycle

Otto Otto Otto

Number and position of

cylinders

4 in line 4 in line 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 72 × 84 72 × 84 72 × 84

Total displacement (cm³) 1368 1368 1368

Compression ratio 9.8 ± 0.2 10.0 ± 0.2 10.0 ± 0.2

LPG PETROL

Maximum power (EC) (kW) 88 88

100

(*)

/ 103

120

(**)

/ 125

Maximum power (EEC) (HP) 120 120

136

(*)

/ 140

163

(**)

/ 170

corresponding engine speed

(rpm)

5000 5000 5000 5500

Maximum torque (EEC) (Nm) 215 215 230 250

corresponding engine speed

(rpm)

2500 2500 1750 2500

Spark plugs NGK IKR9J8 NGK IKR9J8 NGK IKR9J8

Fuel

LPG for motor

vehicles

(EN589 Specification)

Unleaded petrol

95 R.O.N.

(EN228 specifications)

Unleaded petrol 95 R.O.N.

(EN228 specifications)

Unleaded petrol 95 R.O.N.

(EN228 specifications)

(*) 1.4 Turbo Multi Air 136 HP version

(**) 1.4 Turbo Multi Air 163 HP version

208

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Versions 1.6 E.Torq 2.4 Tigershark(*)

Engine code 55263842

Cycle Otto Otto

Number and position of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 77 × 85.8 88 × 97

Total displacement (cm³) 1598 2360

Compression ratio 11 ± 0.15 10 ± 0.2

Maximum power (EC) (kW) 81 129

Maximum power (EEC) (HP) 110 175

corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5500 6400

Maximum torque (EEC) (Nm) 152 230

corresponding engine speed (rpm) 4500 3900

Spark plugs

NGK - SINGLE IR - ZKR7BI - 10 JAPAN

C128

CHAMPION - SP148183AB

Fuel

Unleaded petrol 95 R.O.N.

(EN228 specifications)

Unleaded petrol 95 R.O.N.

(EN228 specifications)

(*) Version for specific markets

209

Versions 1.3 Multijet 1.6 Multijet 2.0 MultiJet (*) 2.0 MultiJet (**)

Engine code 55266963 55260384 55263087 55263088

Cycle Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Number and position of

cylinders

4 in line 4 in line 4 in line 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke

(mm)

69.6 X 82 79.5 × 80.5 83 × 90.4 83 × 90.4

Total displacement (cm³) 1248 1598 1956 1956

Compression ratio 16.8 ± 0.2 16.5 ± 0.4 16.5 ± 0.4 16.5 ± 0.4

Maximum power (EC)

(kW)

88 / 84.4

(***) 103 / 100 (***) 103 / 100 (***)

Maximum power (EC)

(HP)

120 / 115

(***) 140 / 136 (***) 140 / 136 (***)

corresponding engine

speed (rpm)

3750 3750 3750 4000

Maximum torque (EC)

(Nm)

200 320 350 350

corresponding engine

speed (rpm)

1750 1750 1750 1500

Fuel

Diesel for motor vehicles

(EN 590 Specification)

Diesel for motor vehicles

(EN 590 Specification)

Diesel for motor vehicles

(EN 590 Specification)

Diesel for motor vehicles

(EN 590 Specification)

(*) Versions with mechanical gearbox

(**) Versions with AT9 automatic transmission

(***) Version for specific markets

WARNING

189) Modifications or repairs to the supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system technical specifications into

account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

210

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

WHEELS

RIMS AND TYRES PROVIDED

190) 191)

Alloy or pressed steel rims. Tubeless radial carcass tyres. All approved tyres are listed in the Registration Document.

IMPORTANT If there are any discrepancies between the Owner Handbook and the Registration Document, take the information

from the latter. For safe driving, the car must be fitted with tyres of the same make and type on all wheels.

IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes with Tubeless tyres.

Wheels Tyres fitted Winter tyres

6 1/2J x 16 H2 ET40 215 / 60 R16 95H 215 / 60 R16 95Q (M+S)

x 17 H2 ET40

215 / 55 R17 94V

(*)

215 / 55 R17 94Q (M+S)

215 / 55 R17 98V (M+S)

7J x 18 H2 ET40

225 / 45 R18 91V

225 / 45 R18 91Q (M+S)

225 / 45 R18 91Y

(*) Mandatory tyre for some specific versions/markets.

On versions with 215/60 R16 and 215/55 R17 tyres, use smaller snow chains with a maximum projection of 7 mm beyond the

tyre profile.

ECO PACK versions (1.3 Multijet 95 HP / 1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP)

Wheels Tyres fitted Winter tyres

7J x 17 H2 ET40 215 / 55 R17 94V Goodyear 215 / 55 R17 94Q (M+S)

Space-saver wheel (where provided)

Rim: 4.0x16/Tyre: T145/90 R16 106M

211

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

When the tyres are warm, the inflation pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the prescribed value. However, recheck that

the value is correct with the tyre cold.

With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.

If it is necessary to raise the vehicle, refer to the "Raising the vehicle" paragraph in the "In an emergency" chapter.

Tyres

Unladen/medium load Full load

Space-saver

wheel

Front Rear Front Rear

215 / 60 R16 95H 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.6

4.2

215

/ 55 R17 94V 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.6

225 / 45 R18 91V 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.6

225 / 45 R18 91Y 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.6

WARNING

190) If winter tyres with a lower speed rating than that indicated in the Registration Document are used, do not exceed the maximum speed

corresponding to the speed rating of the tyres used.

191) DO NOT fit wheel hub caps when using integral hub caps fixed (with springs) to the steel rim and after sale tyres provided with Rim

Protector. Use of unsuitable tyres and wheel caps may cause sudden decrease of tyre pressure.

212

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS

Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tyres. Height is measured with

vehicle unladen. Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

AB C D E FGH I

877 2570 801 4248

1600

/ 1608

(*)

1545 1545 2025 1796

(*) With roof rack bars

177

F1B0169C

213

Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tyres. Height is measured with

vehicle unladen. Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

AB C D E FGH I

902 2570 801 4273

1608

/ 1620

(*)

1545 1545 2025 1796

(*) 4x4 versions

178

F1B0170C

214

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

WEIGHTS

Weights (kg) 1.4 T-Jet LPG 120 HP 1.4 Turbo MultiAir(°°) 1.4 Turbo MultiAir(°) 1.6 E.Torq

Unladen weight (with all

fluids,

fuel tank filled to

90% and without

optional equipment)

1320 1320 1430

1275 / 1320

(**)

Payload including the

driver

(*)

555

555 / 540

(**)

670

600 / 555

(**)

Maximum permitted

loads

(***)

– front axle 1050 1050 1150 1050

– rear axle 930 900 1000 900

– total 1875 1875 2100 1875

Towable loads

– braked trailer 900 1200 1200 800

Maximum load on tow

hitch (trailer with brakes)

(*****)

60 60 60

Maximum load on

roof

(****)

50 50 50 50

(°°) Manual transmission versions with dual clutch

(°) Versions with AT9 automatic transmission

(**) Version for specific markets

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload in relation to the maximum

permissible loads.

(***) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted

loads.

(*****) For some versions/markets, trailers cannot be towed so there are no provisions for fitting a tow hook.

(****) With carrier rack

215

Weights (kg) 2.4 Tigershark(*) 1.3 Multijet 1.6 Multijet

Unladen weight (with all fluids,

fuel

tank filled to 90% and

without optional equipment)

1505 1320 1320

Payload including the driver

(**)

595 555

555 / 580

(*****)

Maximum permitted loads(***)

– front axle 1150 1050 1050

– rear axle 1000 900 900

– total 2080 1875

1875 / 1900

(*****)

Towable loads

– braked trailer

1200

(°) / 900 (°°)

1000

1200 / 900

(*****)

Maximum load on tow hitch

(trailer with brakes)

60 60 60

Maximum load on roof

(****)

50 50 50

(*) Version for specific markets

(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload in relation to the maximum

permissible loads.

(*****) Automatic transmission versions with dual clutch

(***) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted

loads.

(°) 4x4 version

(°°) 4x2 version

(****) With carrier rack

216

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Weights (kg) 2.0 Multijet (*) 2.0 Multijet (**)

Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled

to 90% and without optional equipment)

1430 1495

Payload including the driver

(***)

620 605

Maximum permitted loads

(****)

– front axle 1150 1150

– rear axle 1000 1000

– total 2050 2100

Towable loads

– braked trailer 1200 1200

Maximum load on tow hitch (braked trailer) 60 60

Maximum load on roof

(*****)

50 50

(*) Versions with manual transmission

(**) Versions with AT9 automatic transmission

(***) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload in relation to the maximum

permissible loads.

(****) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum

permitted loads.

(*****) With carrier rack

217

SUPPLIES

1.4 T-Jet

LPG 120 HP

1.4 Turbo

Multi Air

(*)

1.4 Turbo

Multi Air

(**)

Recommended fuels and original lubricants

Fuel tank (litres) 48 48 48

Unleaded

petrol with RON no lower than 95

(EN228 specifications)

including a reserve of (litres) 5 - 7 5 - 7 5 - 7

Fuel tank (LPG) (litres) 38 – – LPG for motor vehicles (EN589 Specification)

Engine cooling system (litres) 5.2 5.2 5.2

Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU

50%(***)

Engine sump (litres)

– 3.2 3.2 SELENIA DIGITEK P.E.

2.95 – – SELENIA Multipower GAS

Engine sump and filter (litres)

– 3.6 3.6 SELENIA DIGITEK P.E.

3.25 – – SELENIA Multipower GAS

Gearbox casing/differential (litres) 2.0 1.8 2.1 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE

Hydraulic brake circuit (kg) 0.83 0.83 0.83 TUTELA TOP 4/S

Windscreen and rear window

washer fluid reservoir (litres)

2.5 2.5 2.5

Mixture of water and PETRONAS DURANCE

SC35

(*) Versions with manual transmission

(**) Automatic transmission versions with dual clutch

(***) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a mixture of 60% PARAFLU

and 40% demineralised water.

218

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.4 Turbo MultiAir(*) 2.4 Tigershark(**) Prescribed fuels and original lubricants

Fuel tank (litres) 48 48

Unleaded

petrol with RON no lower than 95

(EN228 specifications)

including a reserve of (litres) 5 - 7 5 - 7

Engine cooling system (litres) 5.2 6.45

Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU

50%(***)

Engine sump (litres)

3.2 – SELENIA DIGITEK P.E.

– – SELENIA K POWER 0W-20

Engine sump and filter (litres)

3.6 – SELENIA DIGITEK P.E.

– 5.3 SELENIA K POWER 0W-20

Gearbox casing/differential (litres) 6.0 TUTELA TRANSMISSION AS8

Idler unit (PTU) (litres) – TUTELA TRANSMISSION B-5X

Rear differential (litres) – TUTELA TRANSMISSION COMPAQ DRIVE

Hydraulic brake circuit (kg) 0.83 0.83 TUTELA TOP 4/S

Windscreen and rear window

washer fluid reservoir (litres)

2.5 2.5

Mixture of water and PETRONAS DURANCE

SC35

(*) Versions with AT9 automatic transmission

(**) Version for specific markets

(***) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60-40 mixture of PARAFLU

and demineralised water.

219

1.6 E.Torq 1.3 Multijet Prescribed fuels and original lubricants

Fuel tank (litres) 48 48

Unleaded

petrol with RON no lower than 95 (EN

228 specifications) (1.6 E.Torq versions) / Diesel

for motor vehicles (EN 590 Specification)

(1.3 Multijet versions)

including a reserve of (litres) 5 - 7 5 - 7

Engine cooling system (litres) 5.6 6.1

Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU

50% (***)

Engine sump (litres) 4.0 3.7

SELENIA DIGITEK P.E. (1.6 E.Torq versions) /

SELENIA WR FORWARD (1.3 Multijet versions)

Engine sump and filter (litres) 4.3 3.9

Transmission/differential casing

(litres)

2.0 2.0 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE

Hydraulic brake circuit (kg) 0.83 0.83 TUTELA TOP 4/S

Windscreen and rear window

washer fluid reservoir (litres)

2.5 2.5

Mixture of water and PETRONAS DURANCE

SC35

(***) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLU

and 40% demineralised water.

220

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.6 Multijet 2.0 Multijet Prescribed fuels and original lubricants

Fuel tank (litres) 48 48

Diesel

for motor vehicles (EN590 Specification)

including a reserve of (litres) 5 - 7 5 - 7

Engine cooling system (litres) 6.1 6.5

Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU

50% (*)

Engine sump (litres) 4.4 3.9

SELENIA WR FORWARD

Engine sump and filter (litres) 4.8 4.3

Transmission/differential casing

(litres)

1.8

(**)

/ 6.0 (***)

TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE (versions

with automatic transmission) / TUTELA

TRANSMISSION AS8 (versions with

AT9 automatic transmission)

Idler unit (PTU) (litres) – 0.4 TUTELA TRANSMISSION B-5X

Rear differential (litres) – 0.6 TUTELA TRANSMISSION COMPAQ DRIVE

Hydraulic brake circuit (kg) 0.83 0.83 TUTELA TOP 4/S

Windscreen and rear window

washer fluid reservoir (litres)

2.5 2.5

Mixture of water and PETRONAS DURANCE

SC35

(*) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLU

and 40% demineralised water.

(**) Versions with manual transmission

(***) Versions with AT9 automatic transmission

221

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of

the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission

specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

Use Features Specification

Original fluids and

lubricants

Replacement interval

Lubricant for petrol

engines

(excluding

2.4 Tigershark)

SAE 0W-30

ACEA C2 / API SN

9.55535-GS1

SELENIA DIGITEK P.E.

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F020.B12

According to Scheduled

Servicing Plan

Lubricant for

2.4 Tigershark

petrol engines

SAE 0W-20

API SN

9.55535-CR1 or MS-6395

SELENIA K POWER

0W-20

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F029.F14

According to Scheduled

Servicing Plan

Lubricant for diesel

engines

SAE 0W-30

ACEA C2

9.55535-DS1 or

MS.90047

SELENIA WR FORWARD

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F842.F13

According to Scheduled

Servicing Plan

Lubricants for

petrol/LPG

engines

SAE 5W-40

ACEA C3/API SM

9.55535-T2

SELENIA Multipower

GAS

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F922.E09

According to Scheduled

Servicing Plan

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to

top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

222

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

194)

Use Features Specification

Original fluids and

lubricants

Applications

Lubricants and

eases for drive

transmission

Synthetic lubricant.

9.55550-AV5 or

MS.90030-A5

TUTELA TRANSMISSION

AS8

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F139.I11

Lubricant for versions with

AT9 automatic

transmission

Fully synthetic oil with

dedicated additive.

9.55550-SA1 or

MS.90030-H1

TUTELA CS SPEED

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F005.F98

Lubricant for

electro-hydraulic actuator

(dual clutch automatic

transmission versions)

SAE 75W grade synthetic

lubricant.

9.55550-MZ6 or

MS.90030-M1

TUTELA

TRANSMISSION

GEARFORCE

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F002.F10

Manual gearbox and

differential

Molybdenum disulphide

grease, for use at high

temperatures. N.L.G.I.

consistency 1-2.

9.55580-GRAS II

TUTELA ALL STAR

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F702.G07

Wheel side constant

velocity joints

Grease for constant

velocity joints with low

friction coefficient.

N.L.G.I. consistency 0-1.

9.55580-GRAS II

TUTELA STAR 700

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F701.C07

Differential side constant

velocity joints

Diesel fuel additive

Antifreeze additive for

diesel, with protective

action for diesel engines.

PETRONAS DURANCE

DIESEL ART

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F601.L06

To be mixed with diesel

(25 cc per 10 litres)

223

Use Features Specification

Original fluids and

lubricants

Applications

Lubricants and

eases for drive

transmission

SAE 75W-90 API

GL5 grade synthetic

lubricant.

9.55550-DA6

TUTELA

TRANSMISSION B-5X

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F006.A14

Transfer unit (PTU -

4x4 versions)

SAE 75W-90 API

GL5 grade synthetic

lubricant.

9.55550-DA7

TUTELA

TRANSMISSION

COMPAQ DRIVE

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F007.A14

Rear differential

(4x4 versions)

Brake fluid

Synthetic fluid for brake

and clutch systems.

Exceeds specifications:

FMVSS no. 116 DOT 4,

ISO 4925 SAE J1704.

9.55597 or MS.90039

TUTELA TOP 4/S

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F005.F15

Hydraulic brakes and

hydraulic clutch controls

Protective agent for

radiators

Red protective with

antifreeze action, based

on inhibited monoethyl

glycol with organic

formula. Exceeds CUNA

NC 956-16, ASTM D

3306 specifications.

9.55523 or MS.90032

PARAFLU

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F101.M01

Cooling circuits

proportions of use: 50%

water 50% PARAFLU

(**)

Windscreen/rear

window washer fluid

Mixture of spirits and

surfactants. Exceeds

CUNA NC

956-11 specifications.

9.55522 or MS.90043

PETRONAS DURANCE

SC 35

Contractual Technical

Reference N° F001.D16

To be used diluted or

undiluted in screen

washer/wiper systems

(**) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a mixture of 60% PARAFLU

and 40% demineralised water.

IMPORTANT

104) The use of products with different specifications than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine that is not covered by

the warranty.

224

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PERFORMANCE

Top speed reachable after the initial period of usage of the vehicle.

Versions km/h

1.4 T-Jet LPG 120 HP 186

1.4

Turbo Multi Air 140 HP 190

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 140 HP

(*)

190

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 136 HP

(*)

187

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 170 HP 4x4

(**)

200

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 163 HP 4x4

(**) (***)

197

1.6 E.Torq 180

2.4 Tigershark

(***)

190

1.3 MultiJet 95 HP 172

1.6 MultiJet 120 HP 186

1.6 MultiJet 120 HP

(*)

186

1.6 Multijet 115 HP

(***)

183

1.6 Multijet 115 HP

(*)

183

2.0 Multijet 140 HP 4x4 190

2.0 Multijet 140 HP 4x4

(*)

190

2.0 Multijet 136 HP 4x4

(***)

187

2.0 Multijet 136 HP 4x4

(*) (***)

187

(*) Automatic transmission versions with dual clutch

(**) Versions with AT9 automatic transmission

(***) Version for specific markets

225

FUEL CONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption values given in the table below are determined on the basis of the type-approval tests laid down by

specific European Directives. The procedures below are followed for measuring consumption:

urban cycle: cold starting followed by driving that simulates urban use of the vehicle;

extra-urban cycle: frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating extra-urban use of the vehicle: speed varies between 0 and

120 km/h;

combined fuel consumption: calculated with a weighting of approximately 37% of the urban cycle and 63% of the

extra-urban cycle.

IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic conditions, weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the car, trim

level/equipment/accessories, use of the climate control system, car load, presence of roof racks and other situations that

adversely affect the aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to different fuel consumption figures than those measured. The fuel

consumption will get more regular only after having driven the first 3000 km.

226

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FUEL CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO THE CURRENT EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE

(litres/100 km)

Versions Urban Extra-urban Combined

1.4 T-Jet LPG 120 HP

9.2(°)

/ 9.1

(°) (°°°)

12.2(°°)

/ 12.1

(°°) (°°°)

5.3(°)

/ 5.3

(°) (°°°)

7.0(°°)

/ 6.9

(°°) (°°°)

6.7(°)

/ 6.7

(°) (°°°)

8.9(°°)

/ 8.9

(°°) (°°°)

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 136/140 HP 7.8 5.0 6.0

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 136/140 HP

(*)

7.6 4.9 5.9

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 136/140 HP

(**)

7.2 4.9 5.7

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 136/140 HP

(*) (**)

7.0 4.8 5.6

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 163/170 HP 4x4

(***)

8.5 5.7 6.7

1.6 E.Torq 110HP 8.7 5.0 6.4

1.6 E.Torq 110 HP Start&Stop 7.8 5.0 6.0

2.4 Tigershark

(****)

1.3 MultiJet 95 HP 4.7 3.8 4.1

1.3 MultiJet 95 HP

(*****)

4.5 3.7 4.0

1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP 4.7 3.8 4.1

1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP

(**)

4.8 4.0 4.3

1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP

(*)

4.4 3.8 4.0

(°) Running on petrol

(°°°) ECO PACK versions

(°°) Running on LPG

(*) Low environmental impact versions for specific markets (low emissions)

(**) Automatic transmission versions with dual clutch

(***) Versions with AT9 automatic transmission

(****) Version for specific markets

(*****) ECO PACK versions

227

Versions Urban Extra-urban Combined

1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP (*****)

4.4 3.8 4.0

1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP

(*) (**)

4.7 4.0 4.3

1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP

(**) (******)

4.7 4.0 4.2

2.0 Multijet 136/140 HP 4x4 5.8 4.4 4.9

2.0 Multijet 136/140 HP 4x4

(***)

6.5 4.9 5.5

(*****) ECO PACK versions

(*) Low environmental impact versions for specific markets (low emissions)

(**) Automatic transmission versions with dual clutch

(******) Ultra low environmental impact versions for specific markets (low emissions)

(***) Versions with AT9 automatic transmission

228

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS

The CO

emission levels given in the following table refer to combined consumption.

Versions

CO EMISSIONS

ACCORDING TO THE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE IN FORCE

(g/km)

1.4 T-Jet LPG 120 HP

157

(°) / 155(°) (°°°)

145(°°) / 143(°°) (°°°)

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 136/140 HP 139

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 136/140 HP

(*)

137

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 136/140 HP

(**)

133

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 136/140 HP

(*) (**)

131

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 163/170 HP 4x4

(***)

157

1.6 E.Torq 110HP 147

1.6 E.Torq 110 HP Start&Stop 139

2.4 Tigershark

(****)

1.3 MultiJet 95 HP 107

1.3 MultiJet 95 HP

(*****)

105

1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP 109

(°) Running on petrol

(°°°) ECO PACK versions

(°°) Running on LPG

(*) Low environmental impact versions for specific markets (low emissions)

(**) Automatic transmission versions with dual clutch

(***) Versions with AT9 automatic transmission

(****) Version for specific markets

(*****) ECO PACK versions

229

Versions

CO EMISSIONS

ACCORDING TO THE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE IN FORCE

(g/km)

1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP

(*)

107

1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP

(*****)

106

1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP

(*) (**)

111

1.6 Multijet 115/120 HP

(**) (******)

110

2.0 Multijet 136/140 HP 4x4 130

2.0 Multijet 136/140 HP 4x4

(***)

144

(*) Low environmental impact versions for specific markets (low emissions)

(*****) ECO PACK versions

(**) Automatic transmission versions with dual clutch

(******) Ultra low environmental impact versions for specific markets (low emissions)

(***) Versions with AT9 automatic transmission

230

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE CAR AT THE END OF ITS

LIFE

(where provided)

FCA has been committed for many years to safeguarding the environment through the constant improvement of its production

processes and manufacturing products that are increasingly "eco-compatible". To grant customers the best possible service in

terms of respecting environmental laws and in response to European Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of

their life, FCA is offering its customers the chance to hand over their vehicle at the end of its life without incurring any additional

costs. The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over, the last keeper or owner should not incur any

expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value.

To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, contact one of our dealerships if you are purchasing another

vehicle or an FCA-authorised collection and scrapping centre. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality

service for the collection, treatment and recycling of vehicles at their end of life, respecting the surrounding environment.

You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from an FCA dealership or by calling the

number in the Warranty Booklet or by consulting the websites of the various FCA brands.

231

MULTIMEDIA

This chapter describes the main

functions of the Uconnect™ Radio or

Uconnect™ 7” HD LIVE or

Uconnect™ 7” HD Nav LIVE remote

info systems which may be installed on

the car.

TIPS, CONTROLS AND GENERAL

INFORMATION..............233

Uconnect™ Radio ...........235

Uconnect™ 7” HD LIVE /

Uconnect™ 7” HD Nav LIVE .....245

MOPAR CONNECT ...........261

OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS . . . .262

232

MULTIMEDIA

TIPS, CONTROLS

AND GENERAL

INFORMATION

ROAD SAFETY

Learn how to use the various system

functions before setting off.

Read the instructions for the system

carefully before setting off.

192) 193)

RECEPTION CONDITIONS

Reception conditions change

constantly while driving. Reception may

be interfered with by the presence of

mountains, buildings or bridges,

especially when you are far away from

the broadcaster.

IMPORTANT The volume may be

increased when receiving traffic alerts

and news.

CARE AND

MAINTENANCE

Observe the following precautions to

ensure the system is fully operational:

the display lens should not come into

contact with pointed or rigid objects

which could damage its surface; use a

soft, dry anti-static cloth to clean and

do not press.

never use alcohol, petrols and

derivatives to clean the display lens.

prevent any liquid from entering the

system: this could damage it beyond

repair.

105) 106)

MULTIMEDIA DEVICES

IMPORTANT Some multimedia players

may not be compatible with the

Uconnect™.

Only use devices (e.g. USB flash drives)

from safe sources on the car. Devices

from unknown sources could contain

software infected by viruses which, if

installed on the car, could increase the

vulnerability of the car's electric/

electronic systems to hacking.

ANTITHEFT PROTECTION

The system is equipped with an

anti-theft protection system based on

the exchange of information with the

electronic control unit (Body Computer)

on the vehicle.

This guarantees maximum safety and

prevents the secret code from being

entered after the power supply has

been disconnected.

If the check has a positive outcome, the

system will start to operate, whereas if

the comparison codes are not the same

or if the electronic control unit (Body

Computer) is replaced, the system will

ask the user to enter the secret code

according to the procedure described

in the paragraph below.

Entering the secret code

When the system is switched on, if the

code is requested, the display will show

"Please enter Anti-Theft Code" followed

by the screen showing a keypad to

enter the secret code.

The secret code is made up of four

digits, from 0 to 9: to insert the code,

turn the "BROWSE ENTER" right knob

and press to confirm.

After inserting the fourth digit, move the

cursor to "OK" and press the

"BROWSE ENTER" right knob: the

system will start to operate.

233

If an incorrect code is entered, the

system displays "Incorrect Code" to

notify the user of the need to enter the

correct code.

After the 3 available attempts to enter

the code, the system displays

"Incorrect Code. Radio locked. Wait for

30 minutes". After the text has

disappeared it is possible to start the

code entering procedure again.

Vehicle radio passport

This document certifies ownership of

the system. The vehicle radio passport

shows the system model, serial number

and secret code.

In case of loss of the car radio

passport, contact the Fiat Dealership,

taking an ID document and the car

ownership documents.

IMPORTANT Keep the vehicle radio

passport in a safe place so that you

can give the information to the relevant

authorities if the system is stolen.

IMPORTANT

Look at the screen only when it is

necessary and safe. If you need to look

at the screen for a long time, pull over

to a safe place so as not to be

distracted while driving.

Immediately stop using the system in

the event of a fault. Otherwise the

system might be damaged. Contact a

Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to

have the system repaired.

WARNING

192) Follow the safety rules here below:

otherwise serious injuries may occur to the

occupants or the system may be

damaged.

193) If the volume is too loud this can be

dangerous. Adjust the volume so that you

can still hear background noises (e.g.

horns, ambulances, police vehicles, etc.).

IMPORTANT

105) Only clean the front panel and the

display lens with a soft, clean, dry,

anti-static cloth. Cleaning and polishing

products may damage the surface. Never

use alcohol, petrols and derivatives.

106) Do not use the display as a base for

supports with suction pads or adhesives for

external navigators or smartphones or

similar devices.

234

MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect™ Radio

CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL

179

F1B0623C

235

FRONT CONTROL PANEL SUMMARY TABLE

Button Functions Mode

Power on/off

Short button press

Volume adjustment

Left/right rotation of knob

Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) Short button press

Exit the selection/return to previous screen Short button press

BROWSE ENTER

Scrolling the list or tuning to a radio station or select

previous/next track

Left/right rotation of knob

Confirmation of the option displayed Short button press

INFO Display mode selection (Radio, Media Player) Short button press

PHONE Access to the Phone mode Short button press

MENU Access to the Settings menu Short button press

MEDIA Source selection: USB or AUX Short button press

RADIO Access to the Radio mode Short button press

1-2-3-4-5-6

Store current radio station Long button press

Stored radio station recall Short button press

A-B-C

Selection of the group of radio presets or selection of

the desired letter in each list

Short button press

236

MULTIMEDIA

Button Functions Mode

Search for previous radio station or selection of USB

previous track

Short button press

Scan of lower frequencies until beginning of previous

track

Long button press

Search for next radio station or selection of USB next

track

Short button press

Scan of higher frequencies beginning of next track Long button press

Shuffle of USB tracks Short button press

USB track repeat Short button press

237

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS

The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier.

The activation of the function selected is controlled, in some cases, by how long the button is pressed (short or long press) as

described in the table below.

180

F1B0213C

238

MULTIMEDIA

CONTROLS ON STEERING WHEEL SUMMARY TABLE

Button Interaction

Acceptance of incoming call

Acceptance of the second incoming call and putting the active call on hold

Rejection of incoming call

Ending of call in progress

239

CONTROLS BEHIND THE STEERING WHEEL

Buttons Interaction

Button A (left side, behind the steering wheel)

Upper

button

Brief button press: search for next radio station or selection of USB next track

Long button press: scan of higher frequencies until released/fast forward of USB

track

Central button

With each press it scrolls through sources AM, FM, USB, AUX. Only the available

sources will be selected.

Lower button

Brief button press: search for next radio station or select USB previous track

Long button press: scan of lower frequencies until released/fast forward of USB

track.

Button B (right side, behind the steering wheel)

Upper button

Increasing volume

Brief button press: single volume increase

Long button press: fast volume increase

Central button Activation/deactivation of Mute function

Lower button

Decreasing volume

Brief button press: single volume decrease

Long button press: fast volume decrease

240

MULTIMEDIA

SWITCHING THE SYSTEM

ON/OFF

The system is switched on/off by

pressing the

button/knob.

Turn the button/knob clockwise to

increase the radio volume or

anticlockwise to decrease it.

RADIO (TUNER) MODE

The system features the following

tuners: AM, FM.

RADIO MODE SELECTION

Press the RADIO button on the front

panel to activate radio mode.

FREQUENCY BAND

SELECTION

The different tuning modes can be

selected by pressing the RADIO button

on the front panel.

DISPLAYED

INFORMATION

After the desired radio station is

selected on the display, the following

information is shown (INFO mode

activated):

In the upper part: the preset station, the

time and the other active radio settings

are highlighted.

In the central part: the name of the

current station, the frequency and the

radio text information (if any) are

highlighted.

FM station list

Press the BROWSE ENTER

button/knob to display the complete list

of the FM stations that can be received.

SETTING THE PRESETS

The preset stations are available in all

system modes and are selected by

touching one of the presetting buttons

1-2-3-4-5-6 on the front panel.

If you are tuned to a radio station that

you wish to store, hold down the button

on the display which corresponds to

the desired preset until an acoustic

confirmation signal is emitted.

RADIO STATION

SELECTION

To search for the desired radio station

press the

or button or use

the wheel of the steering wheel controls

, or turn the "BROWSE ENTER"

knob.

PREVIOUS/NEXT RADIO

STATION SEARCH

Press briefly the or button

or use the wheel of the steering wheel

controls

: when the button is

released the previous or next radio

station is displayed.

PREVIOUS/NEXT RADIO

STATION FAST SEARCH

Hold down the or button to

start the fast search: when the button is

released, the first tunable radio is

played.

MEDIA MODE

Press the MEDIA button to select the

desired audio source among those

available: AUX or USB.

To select and playback music tracks on

the mobile phone CD card (where the

phone allows) press the BROWSE

ENTER button/knob, select Folders

then Card.

IMPORTANT Some multimedia player

devices may not be compatible with the

Uconnect™ system.

TRACK CHANGE

(previous/next)

Briefly press the button or turn

the BROWSE ENTER button/knob

clockwise to play the next track.

Briefly press the

button or turn

the BROWSE ENTER button/knob

anticlockwise to return to the beginning

of the selected track or to the beginning

of the previous track (if this has been

played for less than 3 seconds).

241

TRACK FAST FORWARD/

REWIND

Hold down the button to fast

forward the selected track.

Hold down the

button to fast

rewind the track.

TRACK SELECTION

(Browse)

Use this function to scroll through and

select the tracks on the active device.

The choices available depend on the

device connected.

For example, on a USB device, you can

also use the BROWSE ENTER

button/knob to scroll through the list of

artists, genres and albums available on

the device, depending on the

information available in the tracks.

Within each alphabetical list, the A-B-C

button on the front panel allows the

user to skip to the desired letter in the

list.

NOTE This button might be disabled for

some

Apple

devices.

NOTE The BROWSE ENTER button

does not allow any operation on an

AUX device.

Press the BROWSE ENTER button to

activate this function on the source

being played.

Turn the BROWSE ENTER button/knob

to select the desired category and then

press the button/knob to confirm the

selection.

Press the

button to cancel the

function.

TRACK INFORMATION

DISPLAY

Press the INFO button to select the

information displayed while playing

(Artist, Album, Genre, Name, Folder, File

name).

Press the

button to exit the

screen.

SHUFFLE

Press the button to play the tracks

on USB in a random order.

Press the button again to deactivate the

function.

TRACK REPETITION

To listen to the track again, press the

button.

Press again to deactivate the function.

AUX SUPPORT

To activate AUX mode, insert an

appropriate device in the AUX socket

on the vehicle.

Adjust the volume using the

button/knob on the front panel or

using the volume adjustment control on

the connected device.

For the "Audio source selection"

function, see the "Media mode"

chapter.

IMPORTANT

The functions of the device connected

with the AUX socket are directly

managed by the device itself: it is not

possible to change track/folder/playlist

or control playing start/end/pause with

the controls on the front panel or on the

steering wheel.

Do not leave the cable of your portable

player connected to the AUX socket

after disconnection, to avoid possible

hiss from the speakers.

242

MULTIMEDIA

USB SOURCE

To activate the USB mode, insert the

corresponding device into the USB port

on the central tunnel fig. 181.

IMPORTANT After using a USB

recharging socket, we recommend

disconnecting the device (smartphone),

always removing the cable from the

vehicle socket first, never from the

device fig. 182. Cables left flying or

connected incorrectly could

compromise correct recharging and/or

the USB socket condition.

PHONE MODE

Phone mode activation

Press the PHONE button on the front

panel to activate the Phone mode.

If no mobile phone is connected, the

respective display warning screen

appears:

Pairing of a

Bluetooth

mobile

phone

The system connects automatically to

the paired mobile phone with the

highest priority.

To choose a specific

Bluetooth

mobile phone, proceed as follows:

press the MENUbutton on the front

panel;

select "Phone menu/Bluetooth" on

the display;

select the "Bluetooth/Phones" list

using the corresponding button;

select the specific device

(

Bluetooth

mobile phone);

select "Connect";

the device connected is highlighted

in the list.

Unpairing of a

Bluetooth

mobile

phone

To disconnect a specific

Bluetooth

mobile phone, proceed as follows:

press the MENUbutton on the front

panel;

select "Phone menu/Bluetooth" on

the display;

select the "Bluetooth/Phones" list

using the corresponding button;

select the specific device (mobile

phone or

Bluetooth

device);

select "Disconnect".

Making a phone call

A call can be made by:

selecting "Contacts" (Phonebook

......);

select the “Recent calls list”: the

received, made and missed calls are

viewed;

press PHONE on the front panel,

then select “Keypad” to enter the

numbers using the “BROWSE/ENTER”

right knob and finally press the

icon

to make the call. Alternatively, you can

use the keypad of your phone (not while

driving).

181

F1B0006C

182

F1B0395C

243

Ending a call

Press the "End" button or the

button on the steering wheel

controls (where present) to end a call in

progress.

SETTINGS

Press the MENU button on the front

panel to display the "Settings" menu.

NOTE The menu items displayed can

vary according to the versions.

The menu includes the following items:

System Settings: Language, Reset

Default Value, System Power Off,

Power on Volume Limit, Auto-On Radio.

Radio Settings: Browse FM Station

List, Traffic Announcements, Regional,

Alternative Frequency.

Radio off delay: allows the system

to be kept on for a preset time after the

ignition device has been turned to

STOP.

Audio settings: access the audio

settings menu.

Telephone: access to the telphone

settings menu.

AUDIO SETTINGS

This option accesses the audio settings

menu.

The menu includes the following items:

TREBLE: adjustment of high tones;

MID: adjustment of mid tones;

BASS: adjustment of bass tones;

FADER: balancing of front/rear

speakers;

BALANCE: balancing of left/right

speakers;

SVC: speed adjustment according to

vehicle speed;

LOUDNESS: audio improvement at

low volume;

AUX OFFSET: alignment of the

portable device volume with that of the

other sources.

244

MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect™ 7” HD LIVE / Uconnect™ 7” HD Nav LIVE

CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL

183

F1B0520C

245

FRONT CONTROL PANEL SUMMARY TABLE

Button Functions Mode

Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) Short button press

Power on/off Short button press

Volume adjustment Left/right rotation of knob

Display on/off Short button press

BROWSE ENTER

Scrolling the list or tuning to a radio station.

Station change (RADIO mode)

Scroll contents of sources (Media mode)

Media source track change

Left/right rotation of knob

Confirmation of the option displayed. Open browsing

list (Radio or Media mode)

Display list of stations (Radio mode)

Short button press

246

MULTIMEDIA

SUMMARY TABLE OF DISPLAY BUTTONS

Button Functions Mode

Radio Access

to the Radio mode Press button

Media

Source selection: USB, AUX (where provided),

Bluetooth

Press button

Phone Access to the Phone mode Press button

Uconnect™

Access to the system functions (Audio, Media, Phone,

Radio, Uconnect

™ LIVE services, etc.)

Press button

Nav

(*)

Access to the Navigation menu Press button

Settings Access the settings menu Press button

Trip Access to the Trip function Press button

(*) Uconnect™ HD Nav LIVE versions only

247

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS

The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier.

The activation of the function selected is controlled, in some cases, by how long the button is pressed (short or long press) as

described in the table below.

184

F1B0213C

248

MULTIMEDIA

CONTROLS ON STEERING WHEEL SUMMARY TABLE

Button Interaction

Acceptance of incoming call

Acceptance of the second incoming call and putting the active call on hold

Display on the instrument panel of the list of the last 10 calls and favourite phone numbers (only with call browsing

active)

Activation of voice recognition

Interruption of the voice message in order to give a new voice command

Interruption of voice recognition

Long press: activation of Siri, Apple CarPlay and Android Auto functions

Rejection of incoming call

Ending of call in progress

Exit the display of the last calls on the instrument panel display (only with call browsing active) (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Short press (Phone mode): selection, on the instrument panel display, of the last calls/text messages (only with call

browsing active)

249

CONTROLS BEHIND THE STEERING WHEEL

Buttons Interaction

Button A (left side, behind the steering wheel)

Upper

button

Brief button press: search for next radio station or selection of USB next track

Long button press: scan of higher frequencies until released/fast forward of USB

track

Central button

With each press it scrolls through sources AM, FM, USB, AUX (where provided). Only

the available sources will be selected.

Lower button

Brief button press: search for next radio station or select USB previous track

Long button press: scan of lower frequencies until released/fast forward of track

on USB and SD (where provided).

Button B (right side, behind the steering wheel)

Upper button

Increasing volume

Brief button press: single volume increase.

Long button press: fast volume increase.

Central button Activation/deactivation of Mute function

Lower button

Decreasing volume

Brief button press: single volume decrease.

Long button press: fast volume decrease.

250

MULTIMEDIA

SWITCHING THE SYSTEM

ON/OFF

The system is switched on/off by

pressing the

button/knob.

Turn the button/knob clockwise to

increase the radio volume or

anticlockwise to decrease it. The

electronic volume adjustment control

rotates continuously (360°) in both

directions, without stop positions.

"TOUCH SCREEN"

FUNCTION

The system uses the "touch screen”

function; to interact with the different

functions, press the "graphic buttons"

displayed.

Confirming a selection: press the

"OK" button.

Return to the previous screen: press

the

(Delete) button or, depending

on the active screen,

/Done.

RADIO MODE

After the desired radio station is

selected, the following information is

shown on the display:

At the top: the list of radio stations

stored (preset) is displayed; the station

currently playing is highlighted.

At the centre: the name of station

being listened too is displayed.

On the left side: the "AM", "FM",

"DAB” (for versions/markets, where

provided) buttons to select the desired

frequency band are displayed (the

button corresponding to the selected

band is highlighted);

On the right: display of the following

buttons:

“Info”: additional information on the

source being listened to;

“Map": navigation map view (versions

with Uconnect™ 7" HD Nav LIVE

only).

At the bottom: display of the following

buttons:

“Browse”: list of the radio stations

available;

/ selecting previous/next

radio station;

“Tune” : manual radio station tuning;

“Audio”: access to the “Audio

Settings” screen.

Audio menu

To access the "Audio" menu press the

Audio" button located at the bottom of

the display.

The following adjustments can be

carried out using the “Audio” menu:

“Balance & Fader" (left/right and

front/rear audio balance adjustment)

"Equaliser" (for versions/markets,

where provided)

“Speed Adj Volume” (speed-

dependent automatic volume control)

"Loudness" (for versions/markets,

where provided)

“AUX Volume compensation” (only

active if an AUX device is inserted)

(where provided)

“AutoPlay”

“Auto-On Radio”

MEDIA MODE

Press the "Media" button to select the

desired audio source among those

available: USB,

Bluetooth

and AUX

(where provided).

IMPORTANT Applications used on

portable devices may be not

compatible with the Uconnect™

system.

After Media mode is selected, the

following information is shown on the

display.

At the top: information on the track

being played and the following graphic

buttons:

“Repeat”: to repeat the track being

played

“Shuffle”: to play the tracks in

random order

Track progress and duration

In the middle: information on the track

being played.

251

On the left: display of the following

buttons:

Selected device or audio source

“Select Source”: select the required

audio source

On the right: display of the following

buttons:

"Info": additional information about

the track playing

“Tracks”: list of available tracks

“Map": navigation map view (versions

with Uconnect™ 7" HD Nav LIVE only)

At the bottom: information on the

track being played and the following

graphic buttons:

“Bluetooth” (for Bluetooth

audio

source): displays the list of devices

“Browse” (for USB source): opens

browsing

/ : previous/next track

selection;

: pause track being played

“Audio”: access to the “Audio

Settings” screen

Track selection

The “Tracks” function allows you to

open a window with the list of tracks

being played.

The choices available depend on the

device connected. For example, on a

USB device you can also scroll through

the list of artists, genres and albums

available on the device depending on

the information present on the tracks

using the TUNE SCROLL button/knob

or by means of the

and

buttons.

Within each list, the “ABC” button

allows the user to skip to the desired

letter in the list.

NOTE This button might be disabled for

some

Apple

devices.

NOTE The TUNE SCROLL button does

not allow any operation on an AUX

device (where provided).

Bluetooth® SOURCE

This mode is activated by pairing a

Bluetooth

device containing music

tracks with the system.

PAIRING A Bluetooth®

AUDIO DEVICE

To pair a Bluetooth

audio device,

proceed as follows:

activate the Bluetooth

function on

the device;

press the “Media” button on the

display;

press the "Select Source" button;

select the Bluetooth

Media

source;

press the "Add Device" button;

search for Uconnect™ on the

Bluetooth

audio device (during the

pairing stage a screen is displayed

showing the progress of the operation);

when requested by the audio device,

enter the PIN code shown on the

system display or confirm on the device

the PIN displayed;

if the pairing procedure is completed

successfully, a screen is displayed.

Answer “Yes” to the question to pair the

Bluetooth

audio device as favourite

(the device will have priority over all

other devices to be paired

subsequently). If “No” is selected, the

priority is determined according to the

order of connection. The last device

connected will have the highest priority;

an audio device can also be paired

by pressing the "Phone" graphic button

on the display and by selecting

"Settings" or selecting "Phone/

Bluetooth” from the "Settings" menu.

252

MULTIMEDIA

NOTE When modifying the

name-device in the

Bluetooth

settings of the phone (where provided),

the Radio may change the track being

played if the device is connected via

USB after the

Bluetooth

connection.

After updating the phone software, for

proper operation, it is recommended to

remove the phone from the list of

devices linked to the radio, delete the

previous system pairing also from the

list of

Bluetooth

devices on the

phone and make a new pairing.

IMPORTANT If the Bluetooth

connection between mobile phone and

system is lost, consult the mobile

phone handbook.

USB SOURCE

To activate the USB mode, insert the

corresponding device into the USB port

on the central tunnel fig. 185.

Some versions feature a second USB

port, located inside the front armrest.

USB charging port

(where provided)

Some versions have a USB charging

port on the central tunnel fig. 186.

When a USB device is inserted with the

radio on, it starts to play the tracks on

the device if the “AutoPlay” is set to

"ON" in the “Audio” menu.

IMPORTANT After using a USB

recharging socket, we recommend

disconnecting the device (smartphone),

always removing the cable from the

vehicle socket first, never from the

device fig. 187. Cables left flying or

connected incorrectly could

compromise correct recharging and/or

the USB socket condition.

AUX SOURCE

(where provided)

To activate AUX mode, insert an

appropriate device in the AUX socket in

the car.

When a device is inserted using the

AUX output socket the system starts

reproducing the AUX source

connected, if it is already being played.

Adjust the volume using the

button/knob on the front panel

or using the volume adjustment control

on the connected device.

185

F1B0238C

186

F1B0212C

187

F1B0383C

253

The "AUX Volume Offset" function can

be selected in “Audio” settings only

when the AUX source is active.

IMPORTANT NOTES

The functions of the device connected

with the AUX socket are directly

managed by the device itself: it is not

possible to change track/folder/playlist

or control playing start/end/pause with

the controls on the front panel or on the

steering wheel.

To avoid possible speaker noise, do not

leave the cable of the portable reader

connected to the AUX socket after

disconnection.

PHONE MODE

Phone mode activation

Press the “Phone” button on the display

to activate the Phone mode.

NOTE To consult the list of mobile

phones and supported functions, visit

the www.driveuconnect.eu website

Use the buttons on the display to:

dial the phone number (using the

graphic keypad on the display);

display and call the contacts in the

mobile phone phonebook;

display and call contacts from the

registers of previous calls;

pair up to 10 phones/audio devices

to make access and connection easier

and quicker;

transfer calls from the system to the

mobile phone and vice versa and

deactivate the microphone audio for

private conversations.

The mobile phone audio is transmitted

through the vehicle’s audio system; the

system automatically mutes the radio

when the Phone function is used.

Pairing a mobile phone

IMPORTANT Carry out this operation

only with vehicle stationary and in safety

conditions; this function is deactivated

when the vehicle is moving.

The pairing procedure for a mobile

phone is described below: always

consult the handbook for the mobile

phone in any case.

To pair the mobile phone, proceed as

follows:

activate the Bluetooth

function on

the mobile phone;

press the “Phone” button on the

display;

if no phone is paired with the system

yet, the display shows a dedicated

screen;

access “Settings” and select “Add

device” to start the pairing procedure,

then search for the Uconnect™ device

on the mobile phone;

when prompted by the mobile

phone, use its keypad to enter the PIN

code shown on the system display or

confirm on the mobile phone the PIN

displayed;

during the pairing stage a screen is

displayed showing the progress of the

operation;

when the pairing procedure is

completed successfully, a screen is

displayed: answer “Yes” to the question

to pair the mobile phone as favourite

(the mobile phone will have priority over

all other mobile phones to be paired

subsequently). If no other devices are

paired, the system will consider the first

associated device as favourite.

NOTE After updating the phone

software, for proper operation, it is

recommended to remove the phone

from the list of devices linked to the

radio, delete the previous system

pairing also from the list of

Bluetooth

devices on the phone and make a new

pairing.

Making a phone call

The operations described below can

only be accessed if supported by the

mobile phone in use. For all functions

available, refer to the mobile phone

owner's handbook.

254

MULTIMEDIA

A call can be made by:

selecting "Phonebook";

selecting "Recent";

selecting "Dial";

selecting "Redial".

Favourites

You can add a number or a contact (if

already in Contacts) to the favourite list

during a call by pressing one of the 5

"Empty" graphic buttons on the upper

part of the display. The favourites can

also be managed by using the

Phonebook options

Text message reader

The system can read the messages

received by the mobile phone. To use

this function the mobile phone must

support the SMS exchange function

through

Bluetooth

If this function is not supported by the

phone, the corresponding "Text" button

is deactivated (greyed out).

When a text message is received, the

display will show a screen where the

options "Read", "Show", "Call" or

"Ignore" can be selected.

Press the "Text Message" graphic

button to access the list of text

messages received by the mobile

phone (the list displays a maximum of

60 messages received).

NOTE On some mobile phones, to

make the SMS voice reading function

available, the SMS notification option

on the phone must be enabled; this

option is usually available on the phone,

in the

Bluetooth

connections menu

for a device registered as Uconnect™.

After enabling this function on the

mobile phone, it must be disconnected

and reconnected with the Uconnect™

system in order to make it effective.

IMPORTANT Some mobile phones may

not take the SMS delivery confirmation

settings into account when interfacing

with Uconnect™. If a text message is

sent via the Uconnect™ system, the

driver could face an additional cost,

without any warning, due to the text

message delivery confirmation request

sent by the phone. For any problems

related to the above, contact your

telephone service provider.

"Do not disturb" function

If supported by the connected phone,

by pressing the "Do not disturb"

graphic button the user will not receive

notifications of incoming calls or text

messages. The user can reply with a

default or customised message by

means of the settings.

SMS message options

Default SMS messages are stored in

the system memory and can be sent to

answer a received message or as a

new message.

Yes

Okay

I can't talk right now

Call me

I'll call you later

I'm on my way

Thanks

I'll be late

Stuck in traffic

Start without me

Where are you?

Are you there yet?

I need directions

I'm lost

See you later

I will be 5 (or 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45,

60) (*) minutes late

See you in 5 (or 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,

45, 60) (*) minutes

(*) Only use the numbers listed,

otherwise the system will not take the

message. When receiving an SMS, the

systems also allows the same message

to be forwarded.

NOTE For details on how to send an

SMS using the voice commands, refer

to the dedicated paragraph.

255

Browsing text messages

(where provided)

Using the steering wheel commands,

you can view and manage the last

10 SMS messages received on the

instrument panel display. To use this

function the mobile phone must

support the SMS exchange function

through

Bluetooth

Select “Phone” on the instrument panel

Setup Menu and then select “SMS

reader” using the steering wheel

controls. The "SMS reader" submenu

allows the last 10 SMS messages to be

displayed.

Browsing favourites

(where provided)

Using the steering wheel commands,

you can view and manage your

favourite phone numbers on the

instrument panel display. To use this

function, the mobile phone must

support SNS exchange via

Bluetooth

and the favourite numbers

must have been saved previously as

such in the Uconnect™ system.

Use the steering wheel controls to

select “Phone” on the instrument panel

Setup Menu. If the phone is connected,

select the "Favourite numbers" option:

the "Favourite numbers" submenu

enables you to view and select the

favourite number.

If the "Phone" option is selected with

the phone not connected, the list of

favourite numbers cannot be viewed.

Uconnect™ LIVE

SERVICES

Press the Uconnect™ button to

access the Uconnect™LIVE

applications.

The application functions are present

according to the vehicle configuration

and to the market.

To use the Uconnect™LIVE services,

you need to download the

Uconnect™LIVE App from Google

Play or Apple Store and register using

the app or on www.driveuconnect.eu

First access to the car

After starting the Uconnect™LIVE

App and entering your credentials, to

access the Uconnect™LIVE App

services in the car you need

Bluetooth

pairing between your

smart phone and the Unconnect

™system as described in the

"Registering your cell phone" chapter.

The list of supported mobile phones is

available on www.driveuconnect.eu

After pairing, press the

Uconnect™LIVE button on the display

to access the connected services.

Before using the connected services,

you must complete the activation

procedure following the instructions that

appear in the Uconnect™LIVE App

once the

Bluetooth

pairing has been

completed

Uconnect™ LIVE services setup

using the Uconnect™ system

Through the Uconnect™ LIVE

services you can access the "Settings"

section by pressing the

icon. You

can then check the system options and

change them according to your

preferences .

System updates

If an update for the Uconnect™LIVE

system is available while the

Uconnect™LIVE services are being

used, the driver will be informed with a

message on the display of the system.

Connected services that can be

accessed on the car

The eco:Drive™applications and

my:Car applications are developed to

improve the customer's driving

experience, and they are therefore

usable in all the markets where the

Uconnect™LIVE services are

accessible.

On Uconnect™ 7” HD Nav LIVE

versions, the access to

Uconnect™LIVE services enables the

use of “LIVE” services.

256

MULTIMEDIA

eco:Drive™

The eco:Drive™ application allows you

to display your driving behaviour in real

time, in order to help you achieve a

more efficient driving style as far as

consumption and emissions are

concerned.

In addition, the data can be saved on a

USB flash drive, and the data analysis

can be made on your personal

computer thanks to the eco:Drive™

desktop application, available on

www.fiat.it (for Italy) or www.fiat.com

(for other countries) or

www.driveuconnect.eu

Driving style is evaluated by means of

four indices which monitor the following

parameters:

Acceleration

Deceleration

Transmission

Speed

Display of the eco:Drive™

Press the eco:Drive™ button to

interact with the function. A screen will

be displayed showing the 4 indices

described above.

These indices are grey until the system

has enough data to evaluate the driving

style. Once sufficient data are available,

the indices will have 5 colours

depending on the evaluation: dark

green (very good), light green, yellow,

orange and red (very bad).

In the event of extended inactivity the

display will show the average of the

indices up to that moment (“Average

index”) then the indices will be coloured

again in real time as soon as the car is

restarted.

Recording and transferring trip data

The trip data can be stored in the

system memory and transferred

through a properly configured USB

memory stick or by the

Uconnect™LIVE App. This allows you

to display the history of the collected

data, showing the complete analysis of

the trip data and of your driving style.

For further information visit the

www.driveuconnect.eu website

IMPORTANT Do not remove the USB

memory stick nor unpair the

smartphone and the Uconnect™LIVE

App before the system has

downloaded the data, since these

could be lost. During the transfer of

data to the devices, Uconnect™

messages may appear on the display

to guide the user correctly through the

operation; follow these instructions.

These messages are only displayed

with the ignition device at STOP and

when a delay in the Uconnect™

system switching off is set. The data

are automatically transferred to the

devices when the engine is switched

off. Transferred data will be deleted

from the system memory in this

manner. You can choose to store the

trip data or not, by pressing the

"Settings" button and by setting the

storage activation and the transfer

mode (USB or Cloud), as required.

When the USB memory stick is full, the

dedicated messages are shown on the

Uconnect™ system display.

When the eco:Drive™ data have not

been transferred to the USB key for a

while, the Uconnect™ system internal

memory could become saturated: in

this case, follow the recommendations

provided by the messages on the

display.

my:Car

my:Car allows you to keep the

condition of your car always under

control. The my:Car application is

capable of detecting malfunctioning in

real time and lets the driver know about

the expiry of maintenance coupons, To

interact with the application, press "

my:Car" button: a screen will appear

on the display showing the "care:Index"

section which contains detailed

information on car status. Press the

"Active warnings" button to show the

details of any faults on the car which

caused a warning light to switch on.

257

The car status can be seen both on

www.driveuconnect.eu or through the

Uconnect™LIVE App.

Apple CarPlay and

Android Auto

(where provided)

The Apple CarPlay and Android Auto

applications allow you to use your

smartphone in the car safely and

intuitively. To enable them, just connect

a compatible smartphone via the USB

port and the phone's contents will be

automatically shown on the

Uconnect™ system display.

To check the compatibility of your

smartphone, see the indications on the

websites:

https://www.android.com/intl/it_it/auto/

and http://www.apple.com/it/ios/

carplay/.

If the smartphone is connected

correctly to the car via the USB port,

the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto icon

will be displayed in place of the

button in the main menu.

Android Auto APP Setup

Before use, download the Android Auto

application to your smartphone from

Google Play Store.

The application is compatible with

Android 5.0 (Lollipop) and later

versions. To use Android Auto, the

smartphone must be connected to the

car with a USB cable.

On the first connection, you will have to

perform the setup procedure that

appears on the smartphone. You can

only perform this procedure with the

vehicle stationary.

Once connected to the USB port, the

Android Auto application establishes a

parallel

Bluetooth

connection.

Apple CarPlay App Setup

Apple CarPlay is compatible with the

iPhone 5 or more recent models, with

the iOS 7.1 operating system or later

versions. Before using Apple CarPlay,

enable Siri from Settings > General >

Siri on the smartphone.

To use Apple CarPlay, the smartphone

must be connected to the car with a

USB cable.

NOTE Enabling CarPlay/Android Auto

or some functions could require

interaction on the smartphone. If

necessary, complete the step on your

device (smartphone).

Interaction

After the setup procedure, on

connecting your smartphone to the

car's USB port, the application will run

automatically on the Uconnect™

system.

You can interact with Apple CarPlay

and Android Auto using the steering

wheel button

(long press of the

button), using the SCROLL TUNE

button/knob (to select and confirm) or

using the Uconnect™ system

touchscreen.

Navigation

With the Apple CarPlay and Android

Auto applications, the driver can

choose to use the navigation system on

their smartphone.

If the system “Nav” mode is already

active, or when a device is connected

to the car with a navigation session in

progress, the Uconnect™ display

shows a pop-up alert enabling the

driver to choose between system

navigation or navigation using the

smartphone.

The selection can be changed at any

time by accessing the chosen

navigation system and setting a new

destination.

258

MULTIMEDIA

Setting “AutoShow smartphone

display on connection"

Through the Uconnect™ system

settings, the user can decide to view

the smartphone screen on the

Uconnect™ system display as soon as

the smartphone is connected via the

USB port.

When this function is set, each time a

connection is made via USB, the Apple

CarPlay or Android Auto apps will run

automatically on the Uconnect™

system display.

The "AutoShow smartphone display on

connection" item can be found in the

"Display" submenu. The function is

enabled by default.

Exiting the Android Auto and Apple

CarPlay apps

To end the Apple CarPlay or Android

Auto session, physically disconnect the

smartphone from the car's USB port.

SETTINGS

Press the “Settings” button on the

display to show the main “Settings”

menu.

NOTE The menu items displayed vary

according to the versions.

As a guideline, the menu includes the

following items:

Display

Units (where provided)

Voice commands

Time and Date;

Safety/Driving assistance (where

provided)

Lights

Doors & Locks

Engine Off Options

Audio

Telephone/Bluetooth

Radio Setup

SiriusXM Setup (where provided)

Restore Default Settings

Clear Personal Data

Apps restore (where provided)

NAVIGATION

(versions with Uconnect™ 7" HD Nav

LIVE only)

Press the "Nav" button to show the

navigation map on the display.

NOTE: The navigation system volume

can only be adjusted during navigation

when the system provides voice

indications.

Navigation main menu

In the navigation view, tap the "Main

menu" button to open the menu:

Select the "Search" button to search

for an address, a place or a point of

interest, then plan a route to the

location.

Select the "Current trip" button to

delete or edit the planned route.

Select the "My places" button to

create a collection of useful or preferred

addresses. The following items are

always available in "My places": “Home”

and “Recent destinations”.

Select the "Parking" button to search

for car parks.

Select the "Weather" or "Speed

Camera Warning" button to receive

information on the weather or warnings

about speed camera locations.

NOTE The "Weather" and "Speed

Camera Warnings" functions are only

active if TomTom Services are activated.

Otherwise, the button will appear

greyed out (and the functions will not

be available).

Select the "Petrol Station" button to

search for petrol stations.

Select the "TomTom Services" button

to view the activation state of the

following services (subscription

needed): “Traffic”, “Speed cameras”,

“Weather”, “Online search”.

Select this button to open the

"Settings" menu.

Select this button to open the

"Help" menu. The "Help"

menu contains information on

the Uconnect™ system, for

example the map version, the

serial number of the device

and the legal notices.

259

Select this button to return to

the map display or navigation

view.

Select this button to

activate/deactivate voice

instructions. Select off to no

longer hear voice instructions.

You will still receive information

such as traffic information and

warning sounds. Tip: you can

deactivate the warning sounds

by selecting “Settings”, then

“Sounds and warnings”.

Select this button to

increase/decrease the screen

brightness and display the

map in brighter/darker colours.

When driving at night or in unlit

tunnels, watching the screen is

more comfortable and less

distracting for the driver if the

map uses darker colours. Tip:

the device will automatically

switch between day and night

view depending on the time of

day. To deactivate this

function, select “Appearance”

in the “Settings” menu and

deselect the option "Switch to

night colours" when it is dark.

Map update

To ensure optimal performance, the

navigation system must be updated

periodically. For this, the Mopar Map

Care service offers a new map update

every three months.

The updates can be downloaded from

the maps.mopar.eu website and

installed directly on the navigator in your

car. All updates are free of charge for

3 years from the start of the warranty

on the car.

The navigation system can also be

updated at the Fiat Dealership.

NOTE The dealer may charge for

updating the navigation system.

VOICE COMMANDS

Note For languages not supported by

the system, voice commands are not

available.

To use the voice commands, press the

button on the steering wheel (”Voice”

button) and say out loud the command

you want to activate.

Global voice commands

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Help

Cancel

Repeat

Voice Prompts

Phone voice commands

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Call

Dial

Re-dial

Call back

Recent calls

Calls made

Missed calls

Calls received

PhoneBook

Show SMS

Send an SMS

Show messages

Radio voice commands

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Tune to FM "frequency"

Tune to AM "frequency"

Tune to "radio name" FM

Media voice commands

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Play song...

Play album…

Play artist…

Play genre…

Play playlist…

260

MULTIMEDIA

Play podcast…

Play audiobook…

Select the source...

View...

Navigation voice commands

(versions with Uconnect™ 7" HD Nav

LIVE only)

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Find "POI"

"Go to" “address”

Go to "city name" centre

Drive towards a town centre

Navigate home

Go via home

Cancel Route

Add this position to “My places”

Display “My Places”

Navigate through a saved location

Recent Destinations

Stop at a recent destination

Zoom in

Zoom out

2D view

3D view

Report Speed Camera

Report risk area

MOPAR

CONNECT

(where provided)

These services let you keep your

vehicle under control at all times and

receive assistance in the event of

accident, theft or breakdown.

To have these services, install the

Mopar

Connect Device on your

vehicle from the country (list

available on the

www.driveuconnect.eu website)

and request activation by following

the instructions received at the

email address given when your

vehicle was handed over to you.

To use the connected services, you

must download the Uconnect™LIVE

App or access the

www.driveuconnect.eu portal.

You can find all the details about the

services in the Mopar

Connect

section of the

www.driveuconnect.eu portal.

PRIVACY MODE

Privacy mode lets you disable the “Find

car”, “Notify Area” and “Notify Speed”

services, which allow registered

customers to locate their cars, for a

fixed time.

IMPORTANT Vehicle position tracing

remains active for the assistance

services, where provided, in the event

of accident or vehicle theft, but is not

visible to the customer.

PRIVACY MODE activation

procedure

Proceed as follows:

take note of the total odometer

reading;

make sure that the instrument panel

is off;

Send the following text message to

+393424112613: “PRIVACY

<VEHICLE_CHASSIS_NUM>

<TOTAL_MILEAGE_KM>” (e.g.:

PRIVACY

ZFA3340000P123456 12532). You can

find the chassis number in the

registration document;

before starting the engine, wait to

receive the text message confirming

that Privacy mode has been activated

and indicating when it expires.

When you have received the

confirmation, you can start your trip in

the knowledge that the vehicle will not

be traced until the indicated expiry time.

If it expires while you are still travelling,

Privacy mode will be extended until you

turn off the engine (instrument panel

off).

261

If you receive a text message indicating

that your request was not successful,

you must be aware that the vehicle will

continue to be visible to the registered

customer.

If you have any doubts or problems

during activation, consult the FAQ on

the www.driveuconnect.eu portal,

contact the Fiat Dealership or contact

Customer Care.

OFFICIAL TYPE

APPROVALS

All radio equipment supplied with the

vehicle complies with the 2014/53/EU

directive.

For further information visit the

www.mopar.eu/owner or

http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum/

websites

262

MULTIMEDIA

IMPORTANT INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS

WARNING

INTERIOR FITTINGS

Do not travel with the storage compartment open: it may injure the front seat occupants in the event of an accident.

The cigar lighter gets extremely hot. Handle it carefully and make sure that children don’t use it: risk of fire and/or burns.

Do not use the ashtray as a waste paper basket: it may catch fire in contact with cigarette stubs.

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK

Before driving, make sure that the transversal bars have been fitted properly.

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS

The catalytic converter and particulate filter (DPF) reach very high temperatures during operation. Therefore do not park the vehicle on

flammable materials (e.g. grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.): fire hazard.

IMPORTANT

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK

The use of transversal bars on longitudinal ones prevents the use of the sunroof, because the latter, while opening, interferes with the bars.

Therefore do not move the sunroof if transversal bars have been fitted.

Fully comply with the regulations in force concerning maximum clearance.

Mopar Vehicle Protection offers a series of service contracts that are designed to give all our customers the

pleasure of driving their vehicle without any hitch's and concerns.

Our product portfolio consists of a wide and flexible range of extended warranty and maintenance plans

endorsed by FCA. Each with a series of different coverage tiers, in terms of durability and mileage, built to

accommodate you’re driving needs.

Service contracts are made by experts that know every part of your vehicle, and commit themselves

to maintain it in tip top conditions. Our knowledge and passion is tailored around designing

products that promises all our drivers “worry-free driving”.

Only with Mopar Vehicle Protection you are ensured that all service operations are performed

by highly qualified and specialized technicians in authorized FCA repair facilities, using the right tools,

equipment and only original parts, all over Europe.

Check which Service Contract plans are available on your market today and choose the

Service Contract that suits your driving habits best.

Ask your local dealer for further information.

MAINTAIN YOUR VEHICLE IN

TIP TOP CONDITIONS WITH

INDEX

ABS (system) ...............74

Active safety systems...........74

Adaptive Cruise Control ........129

Airbag

Front airbags .............106

Side bags ...............110

Airbags (SRS supplementary

restraint system) ...........106

Alarm .....................14

Automatic dual zone climate

control system .............35

Automatic light control (AUTO

function) .................25

Automatic main beam headlights . . .27

Automatic transmission.........119

Automatic transmission - key

removal .................169

Automatic transmission - lever

unlock..................168

Battery ..................195

advice for extending its life .....195

replacement ..............195

Battery recharging ............197

Blind Spot Assist System ........78

Bodywork (cleaning and

maintenance) .............203

Bonnet ....................40

Boot .....................41

Boot (extension) ..............20

Brakes

brake fluid level ............194

Bulbs

types of bulbs ............149

Carrying children safely .........93

Changes/alterations to the car ......5

Changing a wheel ............159

Checking levels..............187

Child restraint systems ..........93

Child safety device ............18

Climate control system ..........33

CO2 emissions ..............229

Colour display ...............48

Control buttons ..............49

Control panel and on-board

instruments ...............47

Daytime running lights (DRL)......26

Dead Lock (device) ............17

Dimensions................213

Dipped beam headlights.........25

Dipped/main beam headlights

(bulb replacement) ..........151

Direction indicators ............28

Display ....................49

Doors.....................15

Driving assistance systems .......78

DST (system) ................76

DTC (system) ................74

Dual clutch automatic

transmission - lever unlock .....170

Dual clutch automatic

transmission - removing the

key....................171

Electric Parking Brake (EPB) .....115

Electric sun roof ..............38

Electric windows..............37

Electrically adjustable front seats....19

Electronic Cruise Control........127

Emergency starting ...........166

Engine ...................208

engine coolant level .........194

marking ................207

Engine compartment ..........187

Engine compartment (washing). . . .204

Engine oil

consumption .............194

level check ..............194

EPB (Electric Parking Brake) .....115

ERM (system)................76

ESC (system) ................74

Exterior lights ................25

Fiat Code (system) ............14

Fix&Go Automatic kit ..........163

Fluids and lubricants ..........222

Fog lights ..................26

Fog lights (bulb replacement) .....151

Follow Me Home .............26

Front roof light ...............29

Front seat electric heating ........20

Front seats (manual adjustments) . . .19

Fuel consumption ............226

Fuel cut-off system ...........168

Full Brake Control (system) .......80

Fuse boxes ................154

Fuses (replacement)...........154

GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) ........49

Hazard warning lights .........148

emergency braking .........148

Head restraints...............21

Headlight alignment adjustment ....28

Headlight alignment corrector .....28

Headlights (cleaning) ..........203

Heavy-duty use of the car

(scheduled servicing) ........186

HHC (system)................75

i-Size child restraint systems .....100

Identification data

chassis marking ...........207

engine marking ............207

VIN plate ................207

Ignition device ...............12

Important information and

recommendations ..........263

Interior lights ................29

Interiors (cleaning) ............204

ISOFIX child restraint system

(installation) ...............97

iTPMS (indirect Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System) ..........84

Jump starting ..............166

Keyless Entry (system) .........16

Keys

electronic key .............11

key with remote control .......11

Lane Assist system...........137

Lane Change ................28

Lifting the vehicle.............201

Light switch .................25

Main beam headlights..........27

Main menu .................50

Manual climate control system .....33

Manual gearbox .............118

Monochrome display ...........47

Mood Selector / Drive Mode

(drive mode selector) ........133

Mopar Connect .............261

Number plate lights (bulb

replacement)..............153

Occupant protection systems .....87

Official type approvals .........262

Paintwork (cleaning and

maintenance) .............203

Park Assist (system)...........135

Parking lights ................26

Parking the vehicle ...........115

PBA (system) ................75

Performance (top speed)........225

Periodic checks (scheduled

servicing) ................186

Pre-tensioners ...............91

load limiters ...............91

Prescriptions for handling the car

at the end of its life ..........231

Rain sensor ................30

RCP system ................79

Read this carefully..............2

Rear fog light ................26

Rear light cluster (bulb

replacement)..............152

Rear seats..................20

Rear view camera ............139

Rear View Camera............139

Rear view mirrors .............23

Rear window washer

windscreen/rear window

washing fluid level ..........194

Rear window wiper/washer .......32

Reconfigurable load platform ......42

Refuelling procedure ..........145

emergency refuelling ........145

Refuelling the vehicle ..........144

Replacing a bulb .............148

Replacing an external bulb ......151

Rims and tyres (dimensions)......211

INDEX

SBR (Seat Belt Reminder)

system ..................89

Scheduled Servicing ..........175

Scheduled Servicing Plan . . . .176 ,180

Screen wiper/washer ...........29

Seat belts ..................87

Seats .....................19

Service Position (windscreen

wiper) ...................31

Servicing procedures ..........198

Side bag ..................110

Side direction indicators (bulb

replacement)..............152

Side lights/daytime running lights

(DRL) (bulb replacement) ......151

Smart washing function .........30

Snow chains ...............201

Speed Limiter...............127

Start&Stop system ...........125

Starting the engine ...........114

Steering lock ................13

Steering wheel ...............23

Supplies ..................218

Symbols....................4

TC (system) ................75

Technical specifications ........207

The keys...................11

Third brake light (bulb

replacement)..............153

Tips, controls and general

information ...............233

Towing the vehicle ............172

Towing trailers ..............140

Trip Computer ...............51

TSC (system) ................76

Twin clutch automatic

transmission ..............122

Tyres (inflation pressure) ........212

Uconnect™ 7” HD LIVE /

Uconnect™ 7” HD Nav LIVE. . . .245

Uconnect™ Radio ............235

Use of the owner handbook .......6

Version with LPG system ........43

Warning lights and messages .....52

Weights ..................215

Wheels and tyres.............201

Window bag ...............110

Windows (cleaning) ...........203

Windscreen/rear window wiper ....29

FCA Italy S.p.A. - MOPAR - Technical Services - Service Engineering

Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Turin (Italy)

Print no. 603.91.552 - 11/

2017 - 1 Edition

Nosotros, que hemos creado, diseñado y fabricado tu automóvil,

lo conocemos realmente hasta el más mínimo detalle y componente.

En los talleres autorizados Fiat Service encontrarás a técnicos formados directamente por nosotros

que te ofrecen calidad y profesionalidad en todas las intervenciones de mantenimiento.

Los talleres Fiat siempre están a tu lado para realizar el mantenimiento periódico,

las revisiones estacionales y brindarte consejos prácticos de nuestros expertos.

Utilizando los Recambios Originales distribuidos por MOPAR

, las características de fiabilidad,

confort y prestaciones por las que has elegido tu nuevo vehículo se conservan a lo largo del tiempo.

Te recomendamos solicitar siempre Recambios Originales, ya que son el resultado de nuestro esfuerzo

constante en la búsqueda y el desarrollo de tecnologías cada vez más innovadoras.

Por todos estos motivos elige Recambios Originales:

los únicos especialmente diseñados por FCA para tu automóvil.

SEGURIDAD:

SISTEMA DE FRENOS

ECOLOGÍA: FILTROS ANTIPARTÍCULAS,

MANTENIMIENTO DEL CLIMATIZADOR

CONFORT: SUSPENSIONES

Y LIMPIAPARABRISAS

PRESTACIONES:

BUJÍAS, INYECTORES Y BATERÍAS

LINEACCESSORI:

BARRAS PORTA TODO, LLANTAS

POR QUÉ ELEGIR

RECAMBIOS ORIGINALES

Los datos contenidos en esta publicación son a título indicativo.

FCA Italy S.p.A. podrá modificar en cualquier momento los modelos descritos en esta publicación por razones técnicas o comerciales.

El Cliente puede solicitar más información en los concesionarios de la Red de Asistencia Fiat.

Impreso en papel ecológico sin cloro.

ESPAÑOL

Fiat 500X 2018 Car

Product's Documents

OWNER HANDBOOK

Specifications

Fiat 500X Questions and Answers

Related Products

Fiat 2018 Panda Cars

2016 FIAT 500C

Smeg 500RDUS Beverage Center Adjustable Thermostat, Removable Holders, Two Sliding Doors and Fiat 500 Parts

Sealey VS7101 Engine Oil Funnel 4pc - BMW/Fiat/Ford/Mazda/Mercedes/Toyota/Lexus/VAG

Sealey VS2005 Diesel Injector Puller for Citroen, Peugeot, Fiat

FIAT 2023 500X sedan 2023 FIAT 500X